Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
CRT DISPLAY
FE2111SB / FE2111SB-BK
(C22BW701)
NEC-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VISUAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION

SEPTEMBER 2002
CBB-S5778
X-RADIATION WARNING
The surface of pucture tube may generate X-Radiation.

Precaution during servicing, and if possible use of a lead apron or metal
for shielding is recommended. To avoid possible exposure to X-Radiation
and electrical shock hazard, the high voltage compartment and the picture
tube shield must be kept in place whenever the chassis is in operation.
When replacing picture tube use only designated replacement part since
it is a critical component with regard to X-Radiation as noted above.
CRITICAL COMPONENT WARNING
• In the schematic diagram/parts list, the components marked " " are
critical components for X-ray radiation.
When replacing these parts, use exactly the same one indication in
parts list.
• If one or some of the components listed below are replaced, the high
voltage and the operating voltage of high voltage hold-down circuit must
be re-adjusted according to Clause 2.4 ADJUSTMENT on page 2-6 :
T701, IC102, IC104, R706, R707
ii
Contents
1. Circuit description ......................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Power block ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Rectifying circuit and higher harmonics suppression (active filter) circuit ...... 1-1
1.1.3 Sub power circuit ...................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4 Main power circuit ..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.5 Demagnetizing circuit ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.6 Power management circuit ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Deflection processor block ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2.1 Deflection processor (IC601) .................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Pressure-reduction type horizontal deflection power circuit (IC5C0) ............... 1-3
1.2.3 Horizontal width control circuit ............................................................................... 1-3
1.2.4 Vertical deflection circuit ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.4.1 Sawtooth waveform generation, vertical size/position control, and
linearity control circuit ............................................................................... 1-3
1.2.4.2 Vertical output amplification circuit ......................................................... 1-4
1.2.5 High voltage block .................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.6 DBF (Dynamic Beam Focus) circuit ....................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Video block .......................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 Video signal amplifier circuit ................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1.1 Video clamp ................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.1.2 Video blanking ............................................................................................ 1-6
1.3.1.3 Video mixing/amplifying ............................................................................. 1-6
1.3.1.4 Control of contrast and white balance .................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Cut-off control circuit ................................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.2.1 Control of brightness .................................................................................. 1-7
1.3.2.2 Control of BIAS ........................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.3 OSM (On Screen Manager) ..................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.4 Asset circuit ............................................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.5 AUTO-SIZE function ................................................................................................. 1-8
1.3.6 SB MODE (Super Bright Mode) function ............................................................... 1-8
1.3.6.1 Adjustment item/operating function in selecting SB Mode .................. 1-8
1.3.6.2 Circuit (cathode) operation in selecting SB Mode [Window pattern] .. 1-9
1.3.6.3 SB Mode setting data and control method ............................................. 1-9
1.3.7 CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function ...................................................................... 1-9
1.4 CRT compensation block ................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4.1 Rotation circuit .......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 Corner purity circuit .................................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.2.1 Corner purity circuit operation .................................................................. 1-11
iii
1.4.3 Digital dynamic convergence clear (DDCC) circuit ............................................. 1-11
1.4.3.1 Production of compensation current waveform ..................................... 1-11
1.4.3.2 Waveform, and operation on the picture ................................................ 1-12
1.4.3.3 Adjustment method .................................................................................... 1-12
1.4.3.4 Block diagram ............................................................................................. 1-12
1.5 Control block ........................................................................................................................ 1-17
1.5.1 Function of control circuit ........................................................................................ 1-17
1.5.2 Auto-tracking process .............................................................................................. 1-17
1.5.3 EEPROM .................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.5.4 On-Screen-Manager (OSM) controller .................................................................. 1-17
1.5.5 Heater voltage control .............................................................................................. 1-17
1.5.6 Protection circuit operation ..................................................................................... 1-17
1.5.6.1 X-ray protector ............................................................................................ 1-17
1.5.6.2 High voltage data error detection ............................................................ 1-18
1.5.6.3 Beam current protector .............................................................................. 1-18
1.5.6.4 Power-On Indicator (LED) flickering pattern in each protector operating .... 1-18
1.5.6.5 Operating time ............................................................................................ 1-18
1.5.6.6 The DDC communication ........................................................................... 1-18
1.5.6.7 Microcomputer pin assignment ................................................................ 1-19
1.6 Safety protection circuit and X-ray protection circuit .................................................... 1-20
1.6.1 X-ray protection circuit ............................................................................................. 1-20
1.6.2 Beam current protection circuit .............................................................................. 1-20
1.6.3 IC701 overcurrent protection circuit ...................................................................... 1-20
1.6.4 IC701 overload protection circuit ........................................................................... 1-20
1.6.5 IC902 overcurrent protection circuit ...................................................................... 1-20
1.6.6 Short-circuit protection circuit on secondary power side ................................... 1-20
1.6.7 Overvoltage protection circuit ................................................................................. 1-20
1.7 Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.7.1 Adjustment mode ...................................................................................................... 1-21
1.7.2 User mode (Normal mode) ...................................................................................... 1-21
1.7.3 Factory mode ............................................................................................................. 1-24
1.7.3.1 How to entering to Factory mode ............................................................. 1-24
1.7.3.2 How to cancel Factory mode .................................................................... 1-24
1.7.3.3 How to enter FACTORY-HV mode ........................................................... 1-24
2. Adjustment procedure ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Measuring instruments ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Preparatory inspections ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Names of each monitor part .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 Configuration of front control panel ....................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Configuration of rear input connector (signal input) ........................................... 2-2
iv
2.3.3 OSM display matrix .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.3.1 User mode ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.3.2 Factory mode .............................................................................................. 2-4
2.4 Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 How to select the factory adjustment (FACTORY) mode ................................... 2-7
2.4.1.1 Selecting with front panel switches ......................................................... 2-7
2.4.2 Adjustments before aging ........................................................................................ 2-7
2.4.2.1 Adjusting the high voltage and high voltage protector ......................... 2-7
2.4.2.2 FOCUS adjustment (Rough adjustment) ................................................ 2-8
2.4.2.3 Shock test .................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2.4 Preadjustment before aging ...................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2.5 Adjusting the landing (ITC/4 corner purity adjustment) ........................ 2-9
2.4.3 Adjusting the picture size, position and distortion, DBF amplitude and phase 2-9
2.4.3.1 Adjusting the picture inclination ............................................................... 2-9
2.4.3.2 Adjusting the back raster position ........................................................... 2-9
2.4.3.3 Adjusting the left/right distortion, picture width, picture position (LEFT/
RIGHT) and vertical linearity (all preset) ................................................ 2-10
2.4.3.4 Adjusting the DBF amplitude and phase ................................................ 2-10
2.4.4 Adjusting the cut off ................................................................................................. 2-11
2.4.4.1 Adjusting BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT), BTMAX (BRIGHT-MAX) and BS1
(BIAS-H) ....................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.4.2 Adjusting BS2 (BIAS-M) / BS3 (BIAS-L) .................................................. 2-12
2.4.5 Setting CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS circuit (Factory mode) ................................ 2-13
2.4.5.1 Reading beam current default data ......................................................... 2-13
2.4.5.2 Confirming CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function ................................... 2-13
2.4.6 Adjusting the RGB drive signal ............................................................................... 2-13
2.4.6.1 Adjusting GN1 (GAIN-H) (adjustment of 9300K) .................................. 2-13
2.4.6.2 Adjusting ABL .............................................................................................. 2-15
2.4.7 Adjusting the focus ................................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.8 Adjusting the convergence ...................................................................................... 2-16
2.4.8.1 Adjusting with ITC ...................................................................................... 2-16
2.4.8.2 Adjusting DDCP .......................................................................................... 2-18
2.4.9 Default settings (With factory mode) ..................................................................... 2-23
2.5 Inspections (In normal mode) ........................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.1 Electrical performance ............................................................................................. 2-24
2.5.1.1 Withstand voltage ....................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.1.2 Grounding conductivity check .................................................................. 2-24
2.5.1.3 Degaussing coil operation ......................................................................... 2-24
2.5.1.4 IPM OFF MODE function operation (Set the AC power input to 230V) ....... 2-24
2.5.1.5 Confirming the GLOBAL SYNC (CORNER-Purity) function ................. 2-25
2.5.1.6 Focus, picture performance ...................................................................... 2-25
v
2.5.1.7 Misconvergence .......................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1.8 Picture distortion ........................................................................................ 2-26
2.5.1.9 Linearity ....................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.1.10 Adjustment value list ................................................................................ 2-29
2.5.1.11 Checking the functions during Composite Sync input ........................ 2-30
2.5.1.12 Confirming the reset operation ............................................................... 2-30
2.5.1.13 Confirming the full white luminance/color coordination ...................... 2-30
2.5.1.14 Confirming CONVERGENCE compensation function ......................... 2-30
2.5.1.15 Confirming ROTATION compensation function ................................... 2-30
2.5.1.16 Luminance/color coordination uniformity .............................................. 2-30
2.5.1.17 Confirming the color tracking ................................................................. 2-31
2.5.1.18 CRT installation position ........................................................................ 2-31
2.5.1.19 Confirming SB MODE operation ............................................................ 2-31
2.5.1.20 Confirming AUTO-ADJUST operation ................................................... 2-32
2.5.1.21 Others ......................................................................................................... 2-32
2.6 DDC function, check of asset management .................................................................... 2-33
2.6.1 DDC write data contents .......................................................................................... 2-34
2.6.2 Self-diagnosis shipment setting ............................................................................. 2-35
2.7 Default inspection ............................................................................................................... 2-35
2.7.1 Default setting of switches ...................................................................................... 2-35
2.7.2 Default setting of OSM ............................................................................................. 2-35
2.7.3 Checking the labels .................................................................................................. 2-35
2.7.4 Packaging .................................................................................................................. 2-35
2.8 Degaussing with handy-demagnetizer ............................................................................. 2-36
2.8.1 General precautions ................................................................................................. 2-36
2.8.2 How to hold and use the handy-demagnetizer ................................................... 2-36
2.9 Caution ................................................................................................................................. 2-36
2.10 Timing chart ....................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.11 Adjustment timing ............................................................................................................. 2-38
3. Trouble shooting
4. Wave form
5. Schematic diagram
6. Removal Instruction Sheet of Bezel and Back cover
7. Exploded view/Packing view
<Appendix>
Serial number information
Specification
User's guide
All parts list
vi
1. Circuit description
1. 1 Power block
1.1.1 Outline
The power block is compatible with the business electric power, 100 to 120VAC/220 to 240VAC (50/60Hz).
The active filter circuit is adopted to suppress the higher harmonic current.
The circuit block is composed of two switching regulators, the main power which is the configuration used
the flyback converter system of pseudo resonance operation and the sub power which is the configuration
used PWM (pulse wise modulation) system.
The output on the secondary side is shown in Table 1.
Power block Output voltage Mai load

+215V H. deflection circuit, Cu-off circuit
+80V Video circuit, DBF circuit, High voltage circuit
+15V H. deflection circuit, Rotation circuit
Main power side
-15V Convergence circuit, Corner purity circuit
+12V Video circuit, H. deflection circuit
+8V Heater
+5V Microcomputer (MPU)
Sub power side
P-OFF+5V VIDEO circuit
Table 1
1.1.2 Rectifying circuit and higher harmonics suppression (active filter) circuit
The AC input voltage is rectified in the full wave mode with the diode bridge in D901 and input to pin 5 of
L903. The voltage of both end of C911 is the DC voltage approx. 390VDC boosted with the booster
circuit (active filter circuit) composed of IC901, Q901, L903 and D902. The active filter circuit compares
the voltage input to pin 1, pin 3 and pin 4 of IC901 and controls Q901 ON/OFF period so that the current
flows to L903 be sine-waved. The AC input current is sine-waved in the same phase with the input
voltage so as to improve the power factor, and the harmonic current is controlled consequently.
AC D933 To Main power

L902
and sub power
D901
⑥ ⑤④③ ②① D902
R904 L903 R913 +
C906 C911
R905
AC
⑦ ⑧ ⑨⑩ ⑪ ⑫ R914
R906
L905
R911
R907 R915
⑤
Q901
R912
③ ⑦ R917
R909
R908 ①
IC901 R937
From Sub power C910
⑧ R910
Vcc
C907 ④
⑥ ②
C908
Fig. 1
1- 1
1.1.3 Sub power circuit
When the power switch is turned ON, the rectified and smoothed DC voltage (AC voltage x √2) is
supplied to pin 5 of IC903, and is charged to C930 through pin 1. When pin 1 reaches 5.7V, oscillation is
started in IC903, and the built-in output FET is put into operation to add the pulse voltage between pin 5
and pin 3 on the primary side of T902. The flyback voltage in proportion to the voltage on the primary
side is generated on the secondary side, then the DC voltage is generated with the half-wave rectifier
circuit composed of D971 and C971. The DC voltage generated at the secondary side is monitored by
IC922 through R976, R977 and R978. This information detected at IC922 is fed back to pin 1 of IC903
via PC902, and the ON period of output FET internal IC903 is controlled to keep the DC voltage on the
secondary side constantly. The flyback voltage in proportion to the voltage on the primary side is also
generated at pin 2 of T902. The pulse voltage generated at pin 2 of T902 is converted to the DC voltage
at D932 and C931, and supplied to pin 8 of IC901 and pin 4 of IC902 via Q902.
1.1.4 Main power circuit
When the P-SUS signal from microcomputer is turned to HI, Q902 is turned to ON, and the voltage approx.
+18V is supplied to pin 4 (Vcc terminal) of IC902 from pin 2 of T902.
When the voltage of pin 4 of IC902 reaches approx. +16V, oscillation is started in the circuit, and the
built-in output FET is put into operation to add the pulse voltage between pin 5 and pin 2 on the primary
side of T901. The flyback voltage generated at the secondary side in proportion to the one in the primary
side is rectified at D961, D963, D964, D965 and D967 and smoothed at C961, C963, C964, C965 and
C969 to generate the DC voltage. The DC voltage generated at the secondary side is monitored by
IC921 through R960, R961, R962 and R985. The information detected at IC921 is fed back to pin 1 of
IC902 via PC901, and the ON period of output FET internal IC902 is controlled to keep the DC voltage on
the secondary side constantly.
1.1.5 Demagnetizing circuit
When the power is turned ON or the manual demagnetizing function on OSM menu is set to ON, pin 47 of
IC102 on the main board is turned to HI, and Q950 and RL901 are also turned ON.
When RL901 is turned ON, the current flows to the demagnetizing coil, however, the demagnetizing
current gradually converges with the fever of TH902.
1.1.6 Power management circuit
This monitor carries the power management function. This function is effective only when being
connected with the personal computer carrying the power management function.
Mode H-SYNC V-SYNC State Display

NORMAL ON ON Displaying a picture Displaying a picture
OFF ON No picture
SUSPENSION ON OFF CRT heater is
No raster
OFF OFF decreased voltage
mode (approx. 1.5V)
The power consumption and the indication of Power-On Indicator for each mode are as follows.
Mode Power consumption Power-On Indicator
NORMAL 125W Green
SUSPEND 2W or less Orange
The control signal executes the power management function is output from microcomputer IC102. The
control signal is composed of two signals, SUSPEND and P-OFF. The operating state of each signal is
as follows.
Control signal name Pin of IC102 Normal Suspension
SUSPEND Pin 5 H L
P-OFF Pin 42 H L
1- 2
1.2 Deflection processor block
1.2.1 Deflection processor (IC601)
Deflection processor IC601 horizontally compensates wise, position and distortion, and vertically controls
heights, position and linearity.
IC601 automatically tracks the frequency to output the appropriate horizontal/vertical drive pulse.
IC601 also outputs the horizontal parabola waveform for focus and the waveform for convergence
compensation.
1.2.2 Pressure-reduction type horizontal deflection power circuit (IC5C0)
IC5C0 compares the parabola waveform output from pin 64 of IC601 (this waveform controls the
horizontal width and distortion) with the sawtooth waveform (this waveform is synchronized with the
horizontal frequency) in order to output the +B drive pulse. The +B drive pulse output from pin 9 of IC5C0
will accumulate the 215V energy in T550 during Q5F1 ON period. During Q5F1 OFF period, the
accumulated energy will be released, and integrated by T550 and the S-shaped compensation capacitor.
The duty of this drive pulse depends on the DC level of the parabola waveform that is output from IC601.
1.2.3 Horizontal width control circuit
Q550 is controlled by the horizontal drive pulse that is output from IC601. When Q550 is ON, the energy
will be accumulated in the horizontal deflection yoke. When Q550 is OFF, the energy will flow into C550.
While repeating this operation, horizontal deflection will be carried out.
The collector pulse of Q550 will be subject to voltage division by C590 and C591, and the voltage-divided
pulse will be used for switching synchronization of the high-voltage control IC701 and also used as the
AFC pulse.
The duty of the +B drive pulse output from pin 9 of IC5C0 will be subject to change in order to control the
horizontal width. The parabola waveform output from IC601 is compared with the feedback waveform
output from T5C0 to obtain the comparison waveform, and this comparison waveform threshes the
sawtooth waveform inside IC5C0 in order to control the duty. If the duty is changed, the rectified voltage of
the S-shaped compensation capacitor will be changed, and the horizontal width will be also changed. The
vertical parabola waveform is generated inside IC601, and then mixed with the DC level for horizontal
width control. After that, the mixed parabola waveform will be output from 64 pin of IC601, and added to
IC5C0. This parabola output will be used for compensation of pin-cushion distortion, barrel distortion,
trapezoidal distortion, and upper/lower distortion.
1.2.4 Vertical deflection circuit
1.2.4.1 Sawtooth waveform generation, vertical size/position control, and linearity control circuit
If the vertical synchronization signal is input to 42 pin of IC601, the bipolar sawtooth waveform having the
same frequency as the input will be output from pins 1 and 11 of IC601. IC601 receives compensation
data from the MPU (IC102) to compensate the vertical size, vertical position, vertical raster position,
vertical linearity, and vertical linearity balance, and then outputs the compensated sawtooth waveforms
from pins 1 and 11. Pin 2 outputs the voltage to show the vertical deflection intermediate point.
The OP amplifier at the next stage outputs a signal to show the difference of the bipolar sawtooth
waveform. For this output, the RC low pass filter is adopted to eliminate the digital gradation of the output
waveform. In addition, pins 62 and 63 of IC601 will be turned ON during retracing operation in order to
prevent deterioration of the linearity and dispersion of scanning lines. Moreover, Q603 and Q604 are
switched depending on the vertical frequency in order to improve the linearity.
1- 3
IC601
R652
VSAW-P
11
R658
R648+R649
IC603
R650 2 R645+R646
1 5 7
VSAW-N 1 3 6
R642
R647
R651 IC603
C628
IMID 2
Q604 SW-VLIN1
R637
63
Q603 SW-VLIN2
62
Fig. 2 Vertical sawtooth waveform output circuit
1.2.4.2 Vertical output amplification circuit
A current proportional to the waveform of the voltage input to IC401 will flow to the vertical deflection coil
(V-DY). R410 reads out the voltage waveform of the vertical deflection current, and then feeds back it to
IC401.
R419+R409
IMID R411 IC451 V-DY

5
- 2
4 +
V SAW Input R405 R410
Pump Up
R406+R418
1 6 3 7
VFLY
C404
-15.0V
D401
+15.0V
Fig. 3 Vertical output amplifier circuit
1.2.5 High voltage block
The high voltage block applies PWM control system that controls ON/OFF time of the high voltage
generation FET.
IC701 is the control IC that executes PWM control. The pulse voltage generated at Q701 is boosted at
T701 (FBT) to generate 27kV. To keep the high voltage stably, the feedback voltage from pin 10 of T701
is adopted, the control voltage from pin 56 of microcomputer IC102 is returned to pin 5 of IC701 and the
pulse wise of PWM output is controlled. PWM synchronizes with the horizontal frequency. Trigger pulse
for synchronizing is output from the divided collector pulse of the horizontal deflection output TR Q550,
and is input to pin 8 of IC701.
For adjustment of high voltage value, the voltage of pin 56 of IC102 is adjusted with the adjustment item
HV-ADJ-CAUTION on the OSM menu.
1- 4
1.2.6 DBF (Dynamic Beam Focus) circuit
The horizontal/vertical DBF voltage is respectively generated and amplified, then synthesized at T7A1.
As for the horizontal DBF voltage waveform, the parabola waveform voltage (approx. 0.5Vp-p) is output
with IC601, and amplified about 10 times with OP-AMP IC6A2. After that, it is amplified to 50-60Vp-p
with Q7B5 (the amplification factor is about 10 times), then it is amplified about 10 times with T7A1.
On the other hand, as for the vertical DBF voltage waveform, the parabola waveform voltage (approx.
1.0Vp-p) is output from IC601. It is amplified about 40 times at Q7A1, and the vertical parabola wave is
superposed to the horizontal parabola wave on the secondary side of T7A1, then consequently
synthesized. The collector pulse voltage of the high voltage output TR (Q701) rectified at D7A1 and
C7A1 is used for the power source of Q7A1. The synthesized DBF waveform is input to pin 12 of T701.
1- 5
1.3 Video block
1.3.1 Video signal amplifier circuit
MPU 13 40 IC 601
IC102
IC 215
44 43 35 10
D-SUB 16 17 13 14
CN216 29 G 8 5 G
SDA SCL CLP-IN Retrace IC 210
B BLK in 27 R 9 MAIN 3 R
1 6 Amp
25 B 11 1 B
2
G 1
IC 211
Pre - Amp B OSD
R 11 17
IC212
3 3 G OSD
9 19 OSD
DAC DAC DAC
R-Bias B-Bias G-Bias R OSD
10 18
19 20 21 15 8
16 11
OSD BLK
DET
BIAS circuit
Fig. 4 Video signal amplifier circuit

1.3.1.1 Video clamp
The clamp signal (positive polarity, 3.3 Vo-p) output from pin 35 of the MPU (IC102) is input to pin 13 of
IC211. The clamp signal is normally set to the back of the video signal (clamp position of OSM menu:
BACK). To correspond to the Sync on Green signal, the clamp signal can be set to the front of the video
signal (clamp position of OSM menu: FRONT). If the signal is a separate signal, changing the clamp
position of the OSM menu to FRONT or BACK will not change anything.
1.3.1.2 Video blanking
The horizontal/vertical retrace line (blanking) signal (positive polarity, 3.3 Vo-p) output from pin 40 of IC601
is input to pin 13 of IC215. IC215 reverses the polarity and amplifies the waveform (positive polarity,
3.3Vo-p -> negative polarity, 5.0Vo-p), and then reverses the polarity again (negative polarity, 5.0Vo-p ->
positive polarity, 5.0Vo-p) to output the blanking signal. This blanking signal is input to pin 14 of IC211 to
perform blanking operation during horizontal/vertical retracing operation.
To perform image blanking at switching the signal mode or at turning ON or OFF the power, the contrast
and the brightness will be set to MINIMUM.
1.3.1.3 Video mixing/amplifying
IC211 mixes the video signal with the OSM signal (G, R, and B signals of pins 9, 10, and 11) and with the
video blanking signal described in Sec. 1.3.1.2. I2C bus (pins 16 and 17 of SCL and SDA) fixes the black
level of the mixed video signal to 1.8V, and amplifies the mixed video signal (0.7Vp-p -> approx. 2.6Vp-p).
After that, the B, R, and G signals are output from pins 25, 27, and 29, respectively. The video signal
output from IC211 is input to IC210, where the signal is amplified (approx. 2.6Vp-p -> approx. 36Vp-p),
and the black level is fixed to 67V. After that, the B, R, and G signals are respectively output from pins 1, 3,
and 5.
1.3.1.4 Control of contrast and white balance
The MPU (IC102) sends the 8-bit contrast/white balance control data to IC211 with I2C bus (SCL, SDA
line). The contrast data simultaneously control 3 channels to simultaneously control the gains of the R, G,
and B, and the white balance data respectively controls the gains of the R, G, and B.
1- 6
1.3.2 Cut-off control circuit
G G
29 8 5 GK
IC211 B IC210 B
25 11 1 BK
Pre-Amp MAIN-Amp CRT
R R
27 9 3 RK
19 21 20
215V LINE
B.BIAS
R250G R250B R250R

R251G
R251R
R251B
12V LINE
D250G D250B D250R
G.BIAS
D264
Q251G D251G D251B D251R

C250G
R252G
R261
R253G
R.BIAS
Q251B
C250B
R252B
R253B
Q251R
R260
Q250G
C250R
R252R
R253R
Q250B
Q250R
R255R
R255G
R256G
R254G
R256R
R254R
R255B
R256B
R254B
IC213
1 3 55 IC102
BRIGHT MPU
2
Fig. 5 Cut-off control circuit
The cut-off control circuit consists of Q250R, Q250G, Q250B, Q251R, Q251G, and Q251B, and
simultaneously adjusts 3 colors (brightness), or individually adjusts 3 colors (biases of R, G, and B). The
microcomputer controls both types of adjustment.
1.3.2.1 Control of brightness
To simultaneously adjust 3 colors (brightness), the DAC voltage (0 to 5V, variable) line of microcomputer
pin 55 is connected to the emitters of Q250R, Q250G, and Q250B via IC213. This connection enables
simultaneous control of three TR collector currents and adjustment of the brightness.
1.3.2.2 Control of BIAS
To individually adjust 3 colors (biases of R, G, and B), the DAC output (1.5 to 5.5V, variable) lines (pins 19,
20, and 21 of IC211) are respectively connected to the emitters of Q250R, Q250G, and Q250B via I2C
bus of the microcomputer. This connection enables respective control of three TR collector currents and
adjustment of biases of the R, G, and B.
1.3.3 OSM (On Screen Manager)
IC212 is the OSM (On-Screen Manager), and displays the screens for screen adjustment, etc. The data to
be displayed on the OSM screens is sent to the MPU (IC102) via I2C bus.
1- 7
1.3.4 Asset circuit
If the monitor power is turned OFF, 5V power will be supplied to pin 8 of EEPROM (IC218) from the PC via
pin 9 of CN216, and the data stored in the EEPROM (IC218) can be read out from I2C bus.
1.3.5 AUTO-SIZE function
The AUTO-SIZE function detects the phase data of RGB OR signal (output to pin 11 of OSM (IC212) from
pin 15 of AMP (IC211) from H-OSM and V-S signals input to pins 5 and 16 of IC212 in order to
automatically adjust the screen to the optimum width and position.
Using the OSM, select AUTO SIZE ADJUST, and then press (+) button to perform automatic size
adjustment.
1.3.6 SB MODE (Super Bright Mode) function
1.3.6.1 Adjustment item/operating function in selecting SB Mode
→SUPER BRIGHT MODE OFF (in factory adjustment state)

↓
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON (PICTURE)
↓
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON (MOVIE)
↓
User adjustment items related to luminance/color coordination

Color
Adjustment of Adjustment of Color mode Individual GAIN
temperature
brightness contrast selection adjustment
selection
SUPER BRIGHT MODE
Adjustable (*1) Adjustable (*1) Selectable Selectable (*2) Adjustable (*4)
OFF
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1
Adjustable (*1) Adjustable (*1) Not-selectable Selectable (*2) Not-adjustable
ON
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2
Adjustable (*1) Adjustable (*1) Not-selectable Selectable (*2) Not-adjustable
ON
(*1): Brightness and contrast are common among three display mode.
(*2): For color temperature, the adjustment value is memorized in every display mode.
Back raster luminance GAIN UP γ compensation Sharpness

SUPER BRIGHT MODE
Normal Normal --- ---
OFF
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1
Normal UP Presence ---
ON
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2
UP UP Presence Presence
ON
1- 8
1.3.6.2 Circuit (cathode) operation in selecting SB Mode [Window pattern]
SUPER BRIGHT MODE SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2
ccordance
Same amplitude
Amplitude: Approx. 36V

GND
1.3.6.3 SB Mode setting data and control method
(OSM FACT3) Data name Data (hex)

Setting of back raster SBBR1 0 BRT UP value in SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON "0"=No UP
luminance SBBR2 32 BRT UP value in SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON
Amplified value in SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON
SBCN1 3C
(see the following formula)
Setting of GAIN UP
Amplified value in SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON
SBCN2 3C
(see the following formula)
GAIN UP formula = GAIN adjustment value (hex)(*3) x {1+ (Data (hex) of SBCN1 or SBCN2)/FF (hex) }
(*3): GAIN adjustment value is the following data (in OSM FACT3).
9300K R-GN1 G-GN1 B-GN1
(*4): When the SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 or MODE-2 is ON, the GAIN cannot be adjusted as shown in the
table in Sec. 1.3.6.1 "Adjustment item/operating function in selecting SB Mode". However, when the
SUPER BRIGHT MODE is OFF, the MAX GAIN value calculated with the following formula will be written in
the following EEP address so that the GAIN value cannot be increased above that of the SUPER BRIGHT
MODE-1 and MODE-2 ON status.
MAX GAIN = Maximum value (hex) for R/G/B GAIN adjustment (Note 5) x {1 + (SBCN1 or SBCN2 data
(hex))/FF (hex)}
(*5): R/G/B GAIN MAX value is the maximum one among GAIN adjustment value mentioned (*3) above.
EEP address (hex)

R G B
MAX GAIN 89 8a 8b
* Every R/G/B MAX GAIN data applied to the address listed above table are totally same.
In case of repair, after CRT, Pre-AMP (IC211), MAIN-AMP (IC210), etc. are replaced and the
luminance/color coordination is adjusted, the MAX GAIN value mentioned above should be rewritten.
1.3.7 CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function
The brightness and color coordination of the screen will be deteriorated due to secular deterioration of the
1- 9
CRT. The CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function, however, will recover the deteriorated brightness close to
the initial level (level ensured at outgoing the factory).
If the CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function is activated, operation will be performed at 106kHz horizontally
and at 85Hz vertically while ignoring the input signal, and the OSM-IC (IC212) will output the reference
image signal. In this condition, R744 detects the beam current flowing to pin 9 of the flyback transformer
T701. This beam current is inverted and amplified by IC703, and then converted into a voltage value by
the current/voltage conversion circuit. After that, the converted voltage value will be input to the A/D
converter (pin 27 of IC102 (microcomputer)). To individually detect the beam current values of 3 colors (R,
G, and B), the desired color only will be brightened by increasing the cut-off voltages of the other 2 colors.
After obtaining the beam current values of 3 colors in this way, the obtained beam current values will be
compared with the beam current values used for factory adjustment (beam current values stored in the
EEPROM). After that, the cut-off voltage values of 3 colors (R, G, and B) will be adjusted so that the beam
current values close to the factory adjustment values can be obtained. In this way, the cut-off conditions of
the CRT will be recovered close to the factory adjustment level.
In addition, if the CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function is activated, the C_TIME_SEL signal input to the
base of Q704 will be set to the low level, Q704 is turned OFF, and the bias voltage will be applied to pin 5
of IC703. As a result, voltage proportional to the beam current value will be output from pin 7 of IC703. By
the way, difference in the flyback transformer or the CRT may cause difference in the beam current. To
eliminate such difference in the beam current, the DAC voltage (commonly used for the 6H-DC signal) can
adjust the bias voltage input to pin 5 of IC703 described above. During normal operation, the
C_TIME_SEL signal is set to the high level, Q704 is turned ON, and pin 5 of IC703 is grounded via the
GND line so that the output of IC703 pin 7 can be kept at the low level. The signal output from pin 7 of
IC703 is added to ABL signal with MD717 (Diode). When the CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function is
activated, the ABL signal is input to pin 27 of IC102 as the beam current signal.
1.4 CRT compensation block
1.4.1 Rotation circuit
The rotation circuit is a circuit to compensate the picture inclination caused by the earth magnetism by
letting DC current flow to the rotation coil wound on the front side of DY for adjustment. It is controlled to
0 to 5V with the reference of 2.5V by IC102 pin 45 (PWM_DAC), and DC current of +/-100mA (max) is
made to flow to the rotation coil by IC804 pin 2.
1.4.2 Corner purity circuit
The corner purity circuit is a circuit to compensate for the color shade and color deviation of the picture
corner. On the rear side of CRT, it is adjusted by DC current flowing to the corner purity coils installed in
the four corners on the display surface.
The compensation circuit is composed of the following three functions of (1) User adjustment (OSM
display), (2) Aging variation compensation and (3) High/low temperature drift compensation.
(1) User adjustment (OSM display)

The user causes DC current of +/-120mA (max) to flow to the purity coil of each corner according to
the value displayed on OSM.
(2) Aging variation compensation

As the electronic beam collides with the aperture grille, it is thermally expanded and contracted. The
thermal expansion/contraction is varied according to the elapse of the power ON/OFF time of the
monitor. The color shade and deviation of the picture corner thus generated are automatically
adjusted.
The voltage of the beam current supply pin (T701 pin 9) is detected with R723/R724, and the voltage
that detects the time elapse of the power ON/OFF of the monitor is read from the CR charge
(integration) circuit composed of C723 and R738, and CR discharge (integration) circuit composed of
C723 and R737 through IC702 (buffer amplifier) by IC102 pin 26 (CPU_ADC), then, the DC current of
+/-19mA (max) flows to the purity coil on each corner according to the specified control program.
(3) High/low temperature drift compensation

The front panel (glass) is thermally expanded and contracted as the temperature varies in the
installation environments of the monitor. The color shade and deviation of the picture corner are
automatically adjusted. The voltage that detects the temperature variation of the installation
environments of the monitor is read from the environment temperature detection circuit composed of
TH100 (thermistor) arranged near the front panel (glass) by IC102 pin 25 (CPU_ADC), and DC current
of +/-13mA (max) is made to flow to the purity coil on each corner according to the specified control
1- 10
program.
1.4.2.1 Corner purity circuit operation
<TL: Upper left corner>

Pin 50 (PWM_DAC) of IC102 controls the TL in the range of 0 to 5V while regarding 2.5V as the reference
voltage, and the DC current of the above value will flow from pin 2 of IC803 to the upper left corner purity
coil.
<TR: Upper right corner>

Pin 49 (PWM_DAC) of IC102 controls the TR in the range of 0 to 5V while regarding 2.5V as the reference
voltage, and the DC current of the above value will flow from pin 8 of IC803 to the upper right corner purity
coil.
<BL: Lower left corner>

Pin 52 (PWM_DAC) of IC102 controls the BL in the range of 0 to 5V while regarding 2.5V as the reference
voltage, and the DC current of the above value will flow from pin 2 of IC801 to the lower left corner purity
coil.
<BR: Lower right corner>

Pin 51 (PWM_DAC) of IC102 controls the BR in the range of 0 to 5V while regarding 2.5V as the
reference voltage, and the DC current of the above value will flow from pin 8 of IC801 to the lower right
corner purity coil.
1.4.3 Digital dynamic convergence clear (DDCC) circuit
In the digital dynamic convergence clear (hereafter called DDCC) circuit, the convergence compensating
current waveform is produced and amplified, and the convergence is compensated by the compensation
current flowing to the sub yoke that is installed as the rear unit of the deflection yoke.
Though the principle of the convergence compensation with the sub yoke is same as the CP ring, the CP
ring is used for the static variation with the parallel movement in the whole picture in the uniform magnetic
field with the permanent magnet but the sub yoke is used for dynamic variation that compensates a
desired position on the picture by controlling the current waveform that flows to the coil of the electric
magnet. (See Fig. 7)
1.4.3.1 Production of compensation current waveform
There are 30 kinds of compensation elements, and they are programmed in IC601 one by one using the
function. Inputting the compensation coefficient into the function controls the amplitude of the current.
Fig. 6 DDCC compensation image
1- 11
Examples of the functions and current waveform/compensation operation of YH (YHTT, THTB, YHJT,
YHJB) are shown as follows.
In the above formulas, b11T, b11B, b12T and b12B express the compensation coefficients, and y and y^2
express the primary and secondary functions of the vertical frequencies.
The other parts except the compensation coefficients are programmed, and desired amplitudes (=
compensation amount) are gained by varying the coefficients.
YHTT and YHTB compensate the upper and lower parts of the picture of the characteristic components of
their DYs to compensate the upper and lower parts of the picture of the axis deviation component. The
component gained by adding YHT and YHJ is multiplied by the offset compensation coefficient a11. The
resultant component is regarded as 4H_SC, and is output from IC601 pin 61.
1.4.3.2 Waveform, and operation on the picture
The case in which the currents flow through 4H coils of the sub yoke is explained. Regarding YHT
(secondary function in the vertical frequency), in case of Fig. 6 as an example, the current is large in the
same direction at the start (upper end of the picture) and the end (lower end of the picture) of the vertical
frequency, and is zeroed on the X axis of the picture. Therefore, the magnetic field that is proportional to it
is generated, and RED and BLUE vary in the same direction only at the upper and lower ends of the picture.
As aforementioned, YHT can be independently controlled at the upper part (b11t・y^2) and lower part
(b11B・y^2).
Moreover, regarding YHJ (primary function in the vertical frequency), if the flowing direction of the current is
opposite at the start (upper end of the picture) and the end (lower end of the picture) of the vertical
frequency as an example, RED and BLUE vary in the opposite direction only at the upper and lower ends of
the picture. Making the current flow to the 4V coil can do compensation in the vertical direction.
Fig. 8 (a) and (b) shows the image of each adjustment item of the DDCC adjustment.
1.4.3.3 Adjustment method
Before the adjustment with the compensation circuit, it is necessary that they are properly adjusted at the
center (H-STATIC and V-STATIC), on the X axis (XH slider, B-Bow 4P, XV differential coil) and on the Y axis
(YH volume, YV volume).
Though DC current is superimposed on the sub yoke, H-STATIC and V-STATIC are pushed to the greatest
possible extent by the adjustment with CP ring in order to reduce the stress of the driver IC8A1 (STK391-
110).
Moreover, since 4H and 4V coils alone are installed on the chassis, it is first necessary that the
convergence of RED, BLUE and GREEN (6H, 6V) satisfy the specifications for the performance of ITC
(CRT&DY).
As the adjustment procedure, the adjustment values of 30 elements are not respectively zeroed but they
are adjusted to nearest to zero with a total balance in good order.
In other words, the balance (compromise) adjustment with each adjustment item is applied.
The correspondence of the names of DDCC adjustment mode to the coefficients of all 30 elements is
shown below.
1.4.3.4 Block diagram
Fig. 9 shows the block diagram of the DDCC circuit.

The components 4H_DC (pin 6), 4H_SC (pin 61), 4V_DC (pin 8) and 4V_SC (pin 60) supplied from IC601
to 4H-Coil and 4V-Coil are output, the dynamic component (4H_DC, 4V_DC) is amplified with IC6A2, and
the static component (4H_SC, 4V_SC) is amplified with IC6A3.
DDC (pin 7) output from IC601 and DEFL_+3.3V (pin 3) output from IC602 are respectively the reference
1-12
voltage of Op-Amp (IC6A2) that amplifies the above dynamic component (4H_DC, 4V_DC) and the
reference voltage of Op-Amp (IC6A3) that amplifies the static component (4H_SC, 4V_SC).
On each of 4H and 4V, the waveform added with the dynamic component and static component is input to
IC8A1 pin 3 and pin 4, and it allows the specified current to flow to each convergence compensation coil.
Fig. 7 The principle of DDCC compensation
1- 13
Fig. 8 (a) DDCC adjustment item
1- 14
Fig. 8 (b) DDCC adjustment item
1- 15
Fig. 9 DDCC circuit diagram
1-16
1.5 Control block
1.5.1 Function of control circuit
The control block is mainly on MAIN board and DEFL-SUB board, and the function is as follows.
(1) Auto-tracking
(2) Control of picture size, distortion and position
(3) Adjustment data memory
(4) Sync. signal detection
(5) OSM control
(6) Video pre-amp control and clamp pulse position control
(7) Power ON/OFF control
(8) Heater voltage control
(9) DDC 1 / 2B / 2Bi
(10) Operating time display
The control block is composed of the following four components.

(1) Microcomputer: IC102 (MAIN board)
(2) OSM IC: IC212 (VIDEO board)
(3) EEPROM: IC104 (MAIN board)
(4) Sync. signal input: IC215 (VIDEO board)
1.5.2 Auto-tracking process
The microcomputer (IC102) calculates the frequency of the sync. signal input and outputs the distortion
compensation data corresponding to the input signal timing to the deflection IC (IC600).
Control with IC600 is carried out via I2C bus.
1.5.3 EEPROM
The capacity of the EEPROM (IC104) is 32 kilobits (4 kilobytes). The factory adjustment data, user
adjustment data, and EDID data are stored in the EEPROM.
Up to 9 items can be stored as the factory preset data, and up to 16 items can be stored as the user
preset data. Regarding the factory preset timing, if the user reset the memory, the factory adjustment data
will be called up.
The EDID data is stored in the last 128-byte area.
1.5.4 On-Screen-Manager (OSM) controller
The On-Screen-Manager (OSM) controller IC IC212 displays the picture used for picture adjustment and
so on. OSM display data is sent from the microcomputer (IC102) via I2C bus.
1.5.5 Heater voltage control
In the normally ON status, the heater voltage is supplied from the +8V line of the main power circuit.
Heater resistor R203H connected in series adjusts this supplied voltage to +6.15V (typ) (rated voltage for
the CRT) before application. In the suspend mode, the sub-power circuit applies the voltage so that the
screen can be instantaneously recovered. (In the suspend mode, the heater voltage is low compared with
that of the normally ON status.)
1.5.6 Protection circuit operation
This monitor can detect the following problems, and can stop the monitor operation after detection of a
problem. If the protector function is activated, the Power-On Indicator (LED) will flicker so that you can
localize the activated protector.
1.5.6.1 X-ray protector
The CRT monitor radiates X-rays, and exposure to too much radiation is very dangerous. For this reason,
the CRT monitor incorporates an X-ray protector. If the high voltage value rises above the specified value,
the protector will automatically stop applying the high voltage. For this model, the X-ray protector
activation point is set to 31.0kV (entirely black screen).
To disable the X-ray protector for the reason of repair, etc., set the monitor in the factory mode.
1- 17
1.5.6.2 High voltage data error detection
Important safety data, such as the high voltage adjustment value and the X-ray protector activation
voltage, are stored in the EEPROM. For each safety data, there is backup data. If both data values differ
from each other, the monitor will enter the power saving mode (the high voltage will not be applied).
1.5.6.3 Beam current protector
If too much beam current flows (1.5mA or more), "H" will be input to the ABL terminal (pin 27 of the
microcomputer (IC102)). From this terminal, the microcomputer will detect overflow of the beam current,
and will set the monitor in the power saving mode.
1.5.6.4 Power-On Indicator (LED) flickering pattern in each protector operating
If a protector is activated, the Power-On Indicator (LED) will flicker as shown below to indicate the
activated protector (to show the cause of the problem).
Table 2 Power-On Indicator (LED) flickering pattern in each protector operating

Power-On Indicator (LED) state
Protector state
Short (0.5s) lighting times Long (2s) lighting times
X-ray protector 1 1
High voltage circuit latch
2 1
detection
Data protector 3 1
Beam protector 5 1
+B short-circuit 7 1
1.5.6.5 Operating time
If "DIAGNOSIS" is selected from the menu in the factory mode, the monitor operation time will appear. 0.5
hours will be added to this value every 30 minutes.
P: Indicates the power-on time (including the operation time in the power saving mode).
K: Indicates the heater power-on time.
1.5.6.6 The DDC communication

The microcomputer carries out the DDC communication. For this communication, the microcomputer
reads out the EDID data from the EEPROM, and stores the data in the RAM. When receiving a request
from the PC, the microcomputer will output the data from pins 8 and 11.
1- 18
1.5.6.7 Microcomputer pin assignment
# PORT ASSIGN I/O FUNCTION # PORT ASSIGN I/O FUNCTION

1 H_LOCK IRQ2/P40 I H_UNLOCK detection 64 CS8 P37 O CS switching 8
USB-SPARK
2 IRQ1/P41 I/O For FLASH writing 63 CS7 P36 O CS switching 7
USB-RESET
3 INPUT SEL IRQ0/P42 O Power cut detection 62 CS6 P35 O CS switching 6
4 HSK RD/P43 O SOA output 61 CS5 P34 O CS switching 5
5 SUSPEND WR/P44 O Suspend 60 CS4 P33 O CS switching 4
6 C TIME SEL IOS/AS/P45 O 59 CS3 P32 O CS switching 3
7 OPTION EXCL/o/P46 I (available as input port) 58 CS2 P31 O CS switching 2
8 DDC_DATA SDA0/WAIT I/O DDC data 57 CS1 P30 O CS switching 1
9 FLASH_TX TxD0/P50 O PZTAT 56 HVADJ P10/PWMX0 P HVADJ
10 BEAM/SHORT RxD0/P50 I Beam protector 55 BRIGHTNESS P11/PWMX1 P Brightness
11 DDC_SCL SCL0/SCK0 I/O DDC clock 54 SW LIN2 P12/PW2 O SW LIN2
12 RESET RES I Reset 53 SW LIN1 P13/PW3 O SW LIN1
13 NMI MNI I NMI 52 PURITY_BL P14/PW4 P Corner purity BL
14 (+) 5V Vcc 51 PURITY_BR P15/PW5 P Corner purity BR
15 STBY STBY I 50 PURITY_TL P16/PW6 P Corner purity TL
16 GND GND 49 PURITY_TR P17/PW7 P Corner purity TR
17 X'TAL XTAL 48 GND Vss
18 X'TAL EXTAL 47 DEGAUSS P20/PW8 O DEGAUSS
19 MODE SW1 SW1 Mode setting 46 V_CANCEL P21/PW9 P V. magnetic field cancel output
20 MODE SW2 SW2 Mode setting 45 ROTATION P22/PW10 P Rotation

21 GND AVss 44 IIC_SDA SDA1 I/O Internal IIC data
22 KEY1 AN0/P70 A/D Key input 43 IIC_SCL SCL1 I/O Internal IIC clock
23 KEY2 AN1/P71 A/D Key input 42 P OFF P25/PW13 O POWER OFF
24 X RAY PRO AN2/P72 A/D X-ray protector 41 LIN PWM1 P26/PW14 P H. linearity
25 TEMP AN3/P73 A/D Temp. detection 40 6H P27/PW15 P 6H
26 BEAM TIME AN4/P74 A/D Time detection 39 Vcc Vcc
27 ABL/C TIME AN4/P75 A/D Heater voltage detection 38 Hsync OUT P67/HSYNCO O H. sync. output
28 EW_SENSE AN6/P76 A/D H. magnetic field detection 37 SOG IN P66/CSYNCI I SYNC ON G input
29 SN_SENSE AN7/P77 A/D V. magnetic field detection 36 HSYNC IN P65/HSYNCI I H. sync. input
30 Vcc AVcc 35 CLAMP OUT P64/CLAMPO O CLAMP OUT
31 LED HFBACK/P60 O LED output 34 HSYNC SEL P63/VFBACKI O HSYNC SEL
32 VSYNC OUT VSYNCO/P61 O V. sync. output 33 VSYNC IN V_SYNCI I V. sync. input
1- 19
1.6 Safety protection circuit and X-ray protection circuit
1.6.1 X-ray protection circuit
This circuit prevents X-ray radiation from exceeding the dangerous level due to the abnormal rise of high
voltage.
Do not modify the high voltage circuit and the safety protection circuit.
The upper limit of the high voltage value and the beam current value are determined by the X-ray radiation
upper limit curve of CRT.
In the X-ray protection circuit, the X-ray protector activation voltage depends on the beam current. The
X-ray protector, however, is normally activated at approximately 30kV (when the beam current is
approximately 1mA). D709 and C704 rectify the increase in the pulse voltage output from pin 6 of T701.
Pin 24 of IC102 detects this rectified voltage. If the detected voltage exceeds the specified value, the
SUSPEND signal output from pin 5 of IC102 will be set to 'Low', and the P-OFF signal output from pin 42
will be also set to 'Low' (power-off mode). In addition, operation of IC701 will be stopped. This condition of
the protection circuit will be retained until the power switch is turned OFF.
1.6.2 Beam current protection circuit
When the current supplied to the high voltage generating winding of FBT exceeds approx. 1.5mA, the
protection circuit functions. The detection of the beam current is executed by the voltage fall of R722
connected between T901 pin 9 and the 12V.
Resistors R723 and R724 divide the potential of this voltage. The divided voltage is then input to pin 27 of
IC102 via IC703. If the input voltage exceeds the specified value, the SUSPEND signal output from pin 5
of IC102 will be set to 'Low', and the P-OFF signal output from pin 42 will be also set to 'Low' (power-off
mode). In addition, operation of IC701 will be stopped. This condition of the protection circuit will be
retained until the power switch is turned OFF.
1.6.3 IC701 overcurrent protection circuit
The peak value of the drain current of Q701 and the both-end voltages of source resistors R708 and R709
are detected by pin 2 of IC701. If the voltage of this pin exceeds 1.2V (typ), pin 9 of IC701 will stop
outputting the drive waveform. If the voltage of IC701 pin 2 drops below 1.2V (typ), pin 9 of IC701 will
output the drive waveform again.
1.6.4 IC701 overload protection circuit
If overload occurs consecutively and the overcurrent protection circuit is activated consecutively, this
overload protection circuit will enter the latch mode to stop operation. If the voltage of IC701 pin 2 exceeds
1.0V (typ), C709 will be charged. If the voltage of IC701 pin 13 exceeds 2.5V (typ), IC701 will enter the
latch mode to stop the control operation. This condition of the protection circuit will be retained until the
power switch is turned OFF.
1.6.5 IC902 overcurrent protection circuit
IC902 is equipped with an overcurrent protection circuit. R928 detects the drain current of the incorporated
FET. If the voltage of IC902 pin 1 exceeds approximately 0.7V, this overcurrent protection circuit will be
activated.
1.6.6 Short-circuit protection circuit on secondary power side
The output line of each secondary power (+215V, +80V, +15V, +8V, -15V) is equipped with a short-circuit
detection circuit. If a secondary line is overloaded and the output voltage drops by 30 to 40% of the normal
voltage, this short-circuit protection circuit will be activated.
1.6.7 Overvoltage protection circuit
The harmonic suppression circuit (active filter circuit) and the main power circuit are respectively equipped
with an overvoltage protection circuit. If the voltage between both ends of C911 rises by 10% of the normal
voltage, or if the voltage of the main power secondary output line rises by 30 to 40% of the normal voltage,
1- 20
operations of IC901 and IC902 will be stopped.
1.7 Adjustment
1.7.1 Adjustment mode
This monitor has the following adjustment modes.

(1) User mode (Normal mode)
(2) Factory mode (Factory adjustment mode)
1.7.2 User mode (Normal mode)
This is the mode user executing the adjustment and setting. When pressing button of EXIT, (<), (>), (-),
(+) and SELECT on the front panel, the following menu picture is displayed on the screen.
The adjusted data in the user mode is memorized to EEPROM automatically.
The adjustment group can be selected with (<), (>), (-) and (+) buttons.
(+) and (-) buttons have the functions of the variable of the adjustment value.
The items can be adjusted in the user mode are as following table.
1- 21
OSM menu (User mode)
Item Adjustment
Group icon Item
icon − ＋
To decrease the
BRIGHTNESS brightness.
To increase the brightness.
CONTRAST To decrease the contrast. To increase the contrast.
To eliminate possible
DEGAUSS N/A
color shading or impurity.
Group 1 Activates the constant

CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS N/A
brightness function.
Restore to factory preset level with RESET
RESET button.
To adjust the screen
AUTO ADJUST N/A size automatically
based on input timing.
To move the image To move the image to
LEFT / RIGHT to the left. the right.
To move the image To move the image
DOWN / UP down. up.
Group 2 To narrow the width of To expand the width of

NARROW / WIDE the image on the screen. the image on the screen.
To narrow the height of To expand the height of

SHORT / TALL the image on the screen. the image on the screen.

RESET button.
COLOR TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
(9300K, 8200K, 7500K, SRGB, N/A N/A
5000K)
COLOR To decrease the To increase the color
TEMPERATURE color temperature. temperature.
For each RED To decrease the red color. To increase the red color.
color
To decrease the green
Group 3 temperature GREEN color.
To increase the green color.
BLUE To decrease the blue color. To increase the blue color.

RESET button.
IN / OUT (PIN CUSHION) Forms a pin. Forms a barrel.
LEFT / RIGHT (PIN CUSHION Distorts the screen Distorts the screen
BALANCE) leftward. rightward.
Distorts the upper Distorts the upper
TILT (PARALLELOGRAM) section leftward. section rightward.
Narrows the upper Narrows the lower
ALIGN (TRAPEZOIDAL) section. section.
To rotate the image To rotate the image
ROTATE (RASTER ROTATION) counterclockwise. clockwise.
The upper section The upper section
TOP forms a pin. forms a barrel.
Group 4
Distorts the upper Distorts the upper
TOP-BALANCE section leftward. section rightward.
The lower section Lowers the lower
BOTTOM forms a pin. section.
Distorts the lower Distorts the lower
BOTTOM-BALANCE section leftward. section rightward.
RESET button.
1- 22
Item Adjustment
Group icon Item
icon
− ＋
Reduces the Increases the m oire
MOIRE CLEAR m oire value. value.
The red moves to
The red moves to the
CONVERGENCE (HOR.) the left side of the
right side of the green.
green.
The red moves The red moves above
CONVERGENCE (VER.) below the green. the green.
Contracts the Elongates the center
LINEARITY (VER.) center area. area.
Elongates the lower
Elongates the upper
VERTICAL BALANCE section of the
section of the screen.
screen.
Group5 The green screen The green screen will
GLOVAL SYNC (TL) will be reddish. be bluish.
The green screen The green screen will
GLOBAL SYNC (TR) will be reddish. be bluish.
GLOBAL SYNC (BL) will be reddish. be bluish.
GLOBAL SYNC (BR) will be reddish. be bluish.
RESET button.
Selects the left
LANGUAGE items.
Selects the right item.
C→BR→BL→TR C→TL→TR→BL→
OSM POSITION
→TL BR
OSM TURN OFF Reduces the time. Increases the time.
Turns ON (+: SELECT
OSM LOCK OUT N/A
key)
IPM OFF MODE ON OFF
Group 6 EDGE LOCK FRONT BACK
HOT KEY ON OFF

Restores all items to
FACTORY PRESET N/A the factory preset
level.
RESET button.
DISPLAY MODE N/A N/A
MONITOR INFO N/A N/A
REFRESH NOTIFIER ON OFF
Group 7 Restore to factory preset level with RESET
Group 7 RESET button.
* Reset: Select an adjustment item and press the RESET key, then, it restores to factory preset level.
1- 23
1.7.3 Factory mode
This mod can adjust all of items, and also change the factory default adjustment data (reset data).
1.7.3.1 How to entering to Factory mode
The setting of the factory mode is executed by the following procedures.

(1) Power ON with EXIT button pressed, and confirm that the following OSM picture appears.
(3) Press (-) button once to set the data value to 255.
(4) Press (+) button to set the data value to 5.
(5) Press SELECT button to move to the factory mode.
(6) As shown below, the adjustment data (hexadecimal number) and the adjustment group of FAC1,
FAC2 and FAC3.
1.7.3.2 How to cancel Factory mode
Follow the procedure below to cancel the factory mode:

(1) Using the (>) button, select the FAC3 group, and then press the (>) button again. The following OSM
picture will appear.
(2) Press the (+) or (-) button to set the data value to '10'.
(3) Press the (SELECT) button. The factory mode will be canceled.
1.7.3.3 How to enter FACTORY-HV mode
Follow the procedure below to enter the FACTORY-HV mode:

(1) Using the (>) button, select the FAC3 group, and then press the (>) button again. The following OSM
picture will appear.
1- 24
(2) Press the (-) button to set the data value to '250'.
(3) Press the (SELECT) key to enter the FACTORY-HV mode.
(4) Press the (>) or (<) button. The FACTORY-HV mode will be canceled.
1- 25
2. Adjustment procedure
2.1 Measuring instruments

(1) Signal generator A: Astro Design VG-812 or equivalent
(2) Signal generator B: Astro Design VG-829 or equivalent
(3) DC voltmeter: 150V 0.5 Class or digital voltmeter
(4) High voltage meter: 0.5 Class that can measure 40KV
(5) Luminance meter: Minolta color analyzer CA-100 or equivalent
(6) AC voltmeter: 150V/300V 0.5 Class or equivalent
(7) Oscilloscope: Scope with band of 100MHz or more
(8) Landing measuring device: Felmo product
(9) Double scale: For width and distortion measurement
(10)Withstand voltage meter: Kikusui Model TOS8650 or equivalent
(11)Grounding conductivity measuring instrument: CLARE U.K. product
(12)Convergence meter: MINOLTA CC-100
2.2 Preparatory inspections

(1) There must be no cracks or remarkable contamination on the PWB.
(2) There must be no remarkable lifting or inclination of the parts on the PWB, and the
parts must not be touching.
(3) The connectors must be securely inserted without crimping faults.
(4) The CRT socket, anode cap and focus lead must be securely mounted.
(5) The lead wires must not be pressed against the edges of the board.
(6) The lead wires must not touch the high temperature parts such as the R-METAL, R-
CEMENT or TR with FIN.
(7) The board must not be bent, remarkably contaminated or scratched.
(8) The CRT has no scratch or chipping.
(9) Each potentiometer must turn smoothly.
(10)Always set each potentiometer to the following positions before turning the power ON.
Potentiometer default settings
PWB name IC sources Name (symbol) Default adjustment position Remarks

PWB-MAIN VR5A1 H-POSI Center
FOCUS1 Center FBT
FOCUS2 Center FBT
SCREEN Completely counterclockwise FBT
BEZEL
CRT
VR5A1
DY
FBT
PWB-MAIN
* look at inside of the monitor from upper side.
2-1
2.3 Names of each monitor part
2.3.1 Configuration of front control panel
a：Power button
b：Power indicator
c：EXIT button
d：CONTROL (Item select) buttons
e：CONTROL (Adjust) buttons
f ：SELECT S/B MODE button
g：RESET button
b a
c d e f g
Figure 1 Front control panel
2.3.2 Configuration of rear input connector (signal input)
Shrink D-SUB 15P
SIGNAL A
Figure 2 Rear input connector
2-2
2.3.3 OSM display matrix
2.3.3.1 User mode
Adjustment items Setting contents Default setting Setting classification

By timings Common
OSM group USER1
BRIGHTNESS 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 30.1% ○
CONTRAST 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 100.0% ○
DEGAUSS <+>
CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS <+> ○
OSM group USER2
AUTO-ADJUST <+> ○
LEFT/RIGHT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
DOWN/UP 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 50% ○
NARROW/WIDE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
SHORT/TALL 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
OSM group USER3
COLOR COLOR1,2,3,sRGB,5 COLOR1 ○
COLOR TEMP1,2,3,5 5000K-9300K COLOR1:9300K ○
RED (GAIN)1,2,3,5 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
GREEN (GAIN)1,2,3,5 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
BLUE (GAIN)1,2,3,5 0.0 ∼ 100.0%
OSM group USER4
IN/OUT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
LEFT/RIGHT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
TILT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
ALIGN 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
ROTATE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value ○
TOP 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
TOP BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
BOTTOM 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
BOTTOM BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
OSM group USER5
MOIRE CANCELER 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 0.0% ○
CONVERGENCE(HOR.) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(16.8∼82.7%) ○
CONVERGENCE(VER.) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(27.8∼71.7%) ○
LINEARITY(VER.) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
VERTICAL BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
GLOBAL SYNC(TL) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(33.3∼66.2%) ○
GLOBAL SYNC(TR) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(33.3∼66.2%) ○
GLOBAL SYNC(BL) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(33.3∼66.2%) ○
GLOBAL SYNC(BR) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value(33.3∼66.2%) ○
OSM group USER6

LANGUAGE ENG/DEU/FRA/ESP/ITA/JPN ENG ○
OSM POSITION <- /+> (OSM is at the center of picture) ○
OSM TURN OFF 5SEC ∼ 120SEC 45SEC ○
OSM LOCK OUT ON/OFF OFF ○
IPM OFF MODE ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE ○
EDGE LOCK FRONT/BACK BACK ○
HOT KEY OFF/ON OFF ○
FACTORY PRESET <+>
OSM group USER7
DISPLAY MODE
MONITOR INFO FE2111SB
REFRESH NOTIFIER OFF/ON OFF ○
2-3
2.3.3.2 Factory mode

By timings Common
OSM group USER1
BRIGHTNESS 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 30.1% ○
CONTRAST 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 100.0% ○
DEGAUSS <+>
CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS <+> ○
OSM group USER2
AUTO-ADJUST <+>
LEFT/RIGHT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
DOWN/UP 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 50% ○
NARROW/WIDE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
SHORT/TALL 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
OSM group USER3
COLOR --- △
COLOR TEMP1,2,3,5 --- ○
R GAIN1,2,3,5 --- ○
G GAIN1,2,3,5 --- ○
B GAIN1,2,3,5 --- ○
OSM group USER4
IN/OUT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
LEFT/RIGHT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
TILT 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
ALIGN 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
ROTATE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% Adjustment value ○
TOP 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
TOP BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
BOTTOM 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
BOTTOM BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
PCC CENTER 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
PCC SINE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
OSM group USER5
MOIRE CANCELER 0.0 ∼ 100.0% 0.0% ○
CONVERGENCE(HOR.) 16.8 ∼ 82.7% Adjustment value ○
CONVERGENCE(VER.) 27.8 ∼ 71.7% Adjustment value ○
LINEARITY(VER.) 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
VERTICAL BALANCE 0.0 ∼ 100.0% ○
GLOBAL SYNC(TL) 33.3 ∼ 66.2% Adjustment value ○
GLOBAL SYNC(TR) 33.3 ∼ 66.2% Adjustment value ○
GLOBAL SYNC(BL) 33.3 ∼ 66.2% Adjustment value ○
GLOBAL SYNC(BR) 33.3 ∼ 66.2% Adjustment value ○
OSM group USER6
LANGUAGE ENG/DEU/FRA/ESP/ITA/JPN ENG ○
OSM POSITION <- /+> (OSM is at the center of picture) ○
OSM TURN OFF 5SEC ∼ 120SEC 45SEC ○
OSM LOCK OUT --- OFF ○
IPM OFF MODE ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE ○
EDGE LOCK FRONT/BACK BACK ○
HOT KEY OFF/ON OFF ○
FACTORY PRESET <+>
OSM group USER7
DISPLAY MODE
MONITOR INFO FE2111SB
REFRESH NOTIFIER OFF/ON OFF ○
DESTINATION USA/EUR USA: for North America
EUR: for Europe
2-4
By timings Common
FACT 1
C-PURITY-DIS CPDIS 0(0FF)/1(ON) 1(ON) ○
PURITY-DIS PRDIS 0(0FF)/1(ON) 1(ON) ○
MAG-ZERO-HV HVZER PRO(EEh)
V-CANCEL V-PUR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
H-CANCEL HPR-G 000 ∼ 0FF ○
DBFV2 TOP DBF2T 000 ∼ 7F ○
DBFV2 BOTTOM DBF2B 000 ∼ 7F ○
DBFV4 TOP DBF4T 000 ∼ 7F ○
DBFV4 BOTTOM DBF4B 000 ∼ 7F ○
DBF-H-AMP HFOCS 000 ∼ 0FF ○
DBF-V-AMP VFOCS 000 ∼ 7F ○
DBF-H-PHASE HFOCD 000 ∼ 64 ○
SYNC-ON-GREEN SOG-E 0(OFF)/1(ON) 0(OFF) ○
DIRECT-KEY DIREC 0(OFF)/1(ON) 1(ON) ○
DDC-EEP-WP WPDDC 0(Unwritable)/1(Writable) 0(Unwritable) ○
H PURITY CHECK HPURC 000 ∼ 002 0
V PURITY CHECK VPURC 000 ∼ 002 0
FACT 2
YHTT YH-TT 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YHTB YH-TB 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YHJT YH-JT 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YHJB YH-JB 000 ∼ 0FF ○
XH-L XH-L 000 ∼ 0FF ○
XH-R XH-R 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQH-TL PQHTL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQH-TR PQHTR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQH-BL PQH-BL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQH-BR PQH-BR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
- S3H-TL S3HTL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3H-TR S3HTR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3H-BL S3HBL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3H-BR S3HBR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YVTT YV-TT 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YVTB YB-TB 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YVJT YV-JT 000 ∼ 0FF ○
YVJB YV-JB 000 ∼ 0FF ○
XV-L XV-L 000 ∼ 0FF ○
XV-R XV-R 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQV-TL PQVTL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQV-TR PQVTR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQV-BL PQVBL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
PQV-BR PQVBR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3V-TL S3VTL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3V-TR S3VTR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3V-BL S3VBL 000 ∼ 0FF ○
S3V-BR S3VBR 000 ∼ 0FF ○
FACT 3
R-BIAS-H R-BS1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-BIAS-H G-BS1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-BIAS-H B-BS1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
R-BIAS-M R-BS2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-BIAS-M G-BS2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-BIAS-M B-BS2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
R-BIAS-L R-BS3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-BIAS-L G-BS3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-BIAS-L B-BS3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
2-5
Adjustment items Setting contents Setting classification
By timings Common
R-GAIN-H R-GN1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-GAIN-H G-GN1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-GAIN-H B-GN1 000 ∼ 0FF ○
R-GAIN-M R-GN2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-GAIN-M G-GN2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-GAIN-M B-GN2 000 ∼ 0FF ○
R-GAIN-L R-GN3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
G-GAIN-L G-GN3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
B-GAIN-L B-GN3 000 ∼ 0FF ○
BRIGHT-CENT BTCEN 000 ∼ 0FF ○
BRIGHT-MAX BTMAX 000 ∼ 0FF ○
ABL ABLAJ 000 ∼ 0FF ○
SBM CONTRAST1 SBCN1 000 ∼ 7DC ○
SBM BRIGHT1 SBBR1 000 ∼ FFF ○
SBM CONTRAST2 SBCN2 000 ∼ 7DC ○
SBM BRIGHT2 SBBR2 000 ∼ FFF ○
FACT HV
HV-ADJ CAUTION 000∼0A8 ○
XPRO-CALIBRATION 000∼OFF ○
XPRO-TST CAUTION 000∼OFF ○
XPRO-ADJ CAUTION HVADJ+20∼OFF ○
2-6
2.4 Adjustment
2.4.1 How to select the factory adjustment (FACTORY) mode
2.4.1.1 Selecting with front panel switches

(1) Turn the power ON while holding down EXIT button.
(2) After step (1), release EXIT button after one to two seconds.
(3) Confirm that 255 is displayed for the counter of FACT DATA on OSM display.
(4) Set to 05 with (+) button.
(5) When SELECT S/B MODE button is pressed, the factory mode will be entered.
This factory adjustment mode is entered with the above steps.
*The factory adjustment mode remains valid even after the power is turned OFF.
Note that steps (3) to (4) must be carried out within ten seconds. If ten seconds are exceeded,
the mode will return to the user mode.
<Returning to the user mode from the factory mode>

(1) Display FACT DATA on OSM picture with the group selection.
(2) Set the counter value to 010 with (-) (+) buttons.
(3) When SELECT S/B MODE button is pressed, the mode will return to the user mode.
2.4.2 Adjustments before aging
Adjustment item Adjustment mode/set Imput signal/pattern

Status
Before aging The only the sync. signal of
indicator
No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
2.4.2.1 Adjusting the high voltage and high voltage protector

Status
High voltage and high The only the sync. signal of
indicator
voltage protector No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
(Timing No. 12 (106.25 kHz/85 Hz, 1600x1200) SYNC signal is only input)
(1) Turn the monitor power OFF and connect a high voltage indicator to the anode of CRT
before turning the monitor power ON.
(2) Select "FACT DATA***" on OSM and set to 250 using (-) button before pushing the SE-
LECT S/B MODE button.
(3) Select HVADJ (HV-ADJ CAUTION) on OSM to adjust the high voltage to 27.0kV±0.5kV.
(4) Select XPCAL (XPRO-CALIBRATION) on OSM and turn the screen VR all the way down
counterclockwise before adjusting the high voltage to 31.0kV±0.5kV by manipulating (+) (-
) buttons.
(5) With SELECT S/B MODE button pushed, the protector operation point is set, causing the
high voltage to return to 27.0kV±0.5kV.
(6) Rotate the screen VR so that OSM can be confirmed.
(7) Select XPROT (XPRO-TST CAUTION) on OSM by the manipulation shown above and turn
the screen VR all the way down counter-clockwise.
(8) Raise the voltage manipulating (+) button and make sure that the high-voltage protection
circuit gets activated at 31.0kV±0.5kV.
2-7
2.4.2.2 FOCUS adjustment (Rough adjustment)
(1) Set the brightness so that the raster can be confirmed with the FBT picture potentiometer
(screen VR).
(2) Adjust the focus pack "FOCUS 1, 2" so that both edges of the picture are clear.
2.4.2.3 Shock test

(1) Display the "color bar" with the signal generator A.
(2) Confirm that there is no abnormality in the image when shock is applied on the monitor.
2.4.2.4 Preadjustment before aging

(1) Change to FACTORY MODE (aging mode) in advance.
(2) Display a full white with the signal generator A.
(3) Confirm that the R, G and B channel images are output.
(4) Confirm that the picture position, picture size, PCC and balance can be controlled, and
roughly adjust.
(5) Adjustment of BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT), BTMAX (BRIGHT-MAX), BS1 (BIAS-H)
a) Input timing No. 12 (1600x1200 106.25K/85) with the signal generator (R, G and B
OFF).
b) Set each adjustment item to the following value.
BRIGHTNESS : 7F
(FACT3)
R-BS1(R-BIAS-H) : 00
G-BS1(G-BIAS-H) : 8A
B-BS1(B-BIAS-H) : 00
BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT) : 5E0
BTMAX (BRIGHT-MAX) : 800
c) Connect PWB-CRT TP (R200G lead wire) to the probe.

d) Select BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT) in FACT3, set the black level voltage of PWB-CRT TP
(R200G lead wire) to 70 +/- 0.5V with the oscilloscope (refer to the following picture).
* In use of the digital voltage meter, set it to 73 +/- 0.5V.
G-K
70±0.5V
GND
e) Set the back raster luminance to 0.5 +/- 0.3 cd/cm 2 with BRIGHTNESS adjustment.
f) Adjust the back raster color coordination to the following value with R-BS1 (R-BIAS-H)
and B-BS1 (B-BIAS-H).
x: 0.283±0.02 / y: 0.297±0.02
* Do not adjust BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT) after the adjustment of back raster color coor-
dination carried out at f) above, but it can be adjusted in main adjustment mentioned
after 2.4.3.
* BRIGHTNESS should be adjusted when the back raster is varied in adjustment of
purity and convergence.
(6) Confirm that OSM power management is OFF.
(7) Disconnect the signal and confirm that the following picture appears on OSM. Then adjust
OSM picture luminance with BRIGHTNESS adjustment, and carry out heat run for 60
minutes or more.
2-8
OWN VER
S2-OW-** 1.*.**
(Initial data file name)
2.4.2.5 Adjusting the landing (ITC/4 corner purity adjustment)

Status
landing No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
Full green
(1) Input the timing No. 12 (106. 25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) full green signal.
(2) Turn OFF the monitor power to carry out hand degaussing.
(3) Select GLOBAL SYNC (TL) on OSM.
(4) Adjust to the best condition using (-) (+) buttons. Here, make sure that the adjusted value
is within the range of OSM display value = 55h (85) to A9h (169).
(5) Carry out similar adjustment for TR/BL/BR (GLOBAL SYNC).
Note) When the substrate is replaced at the time of repair, set TL/TR/BL/BR to the values
before replacement before carrying out adjustment.
(6) Input the timing No.12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) full white signal.
2.4.3 Adjusting the picture size, position, distortion, DBF amplitude and phase
The manual adjustment methods are explained below. The adjustments are executed in the
factory adjustment (factory) mode.
Adjust the picture size to the value indicated in the list of adjustment values.(Refer to 2.5.1.10
Adjustment value list.)
Adjust the distortion to the value indicated in the picture performance inspection item. (Refer
to 2.5.1.8 Picture distortion.)
2.4.3.1 Adjusting the picture inclination

Status
Picutre inclination Factory No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz,1600x1200
indicator
Crosshatch with frame
Set OSM to ROTATE, and using (-) (+) buttons, set the raster inclination to be horizontal to
the CRT face surface.
2.4.3.2 Adjusting the back raster position

Status
Back raster position Factory No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
Only the sync. signal input
(1) Set BRIGHTNESS to 100% to show the back raster.

(2) Select LEFT/RIGHT and DOWN/UP, adjust the horizontal back raster position to the center
of the bezel using (-) (+) buttons.
At this time, the raster width should be |L1-L2| ≤ 2.0mm.
Back raster
L1 L2
2-9
2.4.3.3 Adjusting the left/right distortion, picture width, picture position (LEFT/RIGHT)
and vertical linearity (all preset)
(1) Set DOWN/UP of the user mode to 50%.
<Setting in the factory mode with the following steps>

(2) Adjust the vertical size to approx. 297mm, and the vertical position to the approximate
center.
(3) Select LINEARITY (VER.) and VERTICAL BALANCE with OSM, and adjust so that the
vertical linearity is equal at the very top of the picture, at the very bottom of the picture,
and at the center of the picture.
(4) Select SHORT/TALL and DOWN/UP with OSM, and adjust the vertical width and vertical
position to the specified values using (-) (+) buttons.
(5) Select IN/OUT, ALIGN, PCC CENTER, TOP and BOTTOM with OSM, and adjust the verti-
cal line at both side of the picture to the straight line using (-) (+) buttons.
(6) If the left and right distortions differ, select LEFT/RIGHT (PIN VAL), TILT, TOP-BALANCE
and BOTTOM-BALANCE with OSM, and adjust so that the distortions are visually bal-
anced.
(7) Select LEFT/RIGHT with OSM, and adjust the horizontal raster position to the center of the
picture using (-) (+) buttons.
(8) Select NARROW/WIDE with OSM, and adjust the horizontal raster width to the value given
in the adjustment list using using (-) (+) buttons. (Refer to 2.5.1.10 Adjustment value list.)
* Note (1) PCC SINE, LEFT/RIGHT (PIN VAL) and PCC CENTER are used only for touch
up.
Note (2) The picture position and distortion must be within the ranges given in the
picture performance inspection items. (Refer to 2.5.1.8 Picture distortion.)
2.4.3.4 Adjusting the DBF amplitude and phase

(1) Connect the oscilloscope to the lead of R7A2 (SG702 side) on PWB-MAIN and to one of
the signal outputs for the signal sources full R, G, B (VIDEO).
(2) Set OSM to the select picture of HFOCUS (DBF-H-AMP) in FACT 1, and using (-) (+)
buttons adjust the horizontal parabola wave amplitude (image area) to the value given in
the list of adjustment values. (Refer to 2.5.1.10 Adjustment value list.)
Vertical parabola wave
Measure
the center.
DBF-V-AMP
Image signal 1V
DBF-V-AMP adjustment
2 - 10
Horizontal parabola wave
4
DBF-H-AMP 1 2 3
DBF-H-PHASE
The center of the horizontal

Image signal parabola waveform and
5
center of the image signal
waveform must match.
DBF-H-AMP / PHASE adjustment
(3) Set the output of the signal generator to crosshatch (white/normal).

(4) Set OSM to the select picture of HFOCD (DBF-H-PHASE) in FACT1, and adjust the focus
balance of point 1 and point 3 in the above figure using (-) (+) buttons.
* (3) and (4) should be carried out with all preset timing.
(5) Set OSM to the select picture of DBF2T (DBFV2 TOP) in FACT1, and adjust using (-) (+)
buttons so that the focus level of point 4 and point 2 in the above figure can be balanced.
(6) Set OSM to the select pictutre of DBF2B (DBFV2 BOTTOM) in FACT1, and adjust using (-)
(+) buttons so that the focus level of point 2 and point 5 in the above figure can be bal-
anced.
* (5) and (6) should be carried out with timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200).
2.4.4 Adjusting the cut off

Status
Cut off Factory No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
2.4.4.1 Adjusting BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT), BTMAX (BRIGHT-MAX) and BS1 (BIAS-H)

<In case pre-adjustment before aging is carried out >
(1) Input timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) with the signal generator (R, G and B
OFF).
(2) Set each adjustment item to the following value.
BRIGHTNESS : 7F
(FACT3)
(3) Set the back raster luminance to 0.3 +/- 1cd/m 2 with FBT screen VR.
(4) Adjust the back raster color coordination to the value listed in the following table with R-
BS1 (R-BIAS-H) and B-BS1 (B-BIAS-H).
(5) Adjust the back raster luminance to 0.3 +/- 0.1cd/m 2 with BTCEN.
(6) If the back raster color coordination is deviated from the values listed in the following table,
repeat steps (4) and (5).
(7) Adjust the back raster luminance to 3.0 +/- 0.2cd/m 2 with BTMAX.
2 - 11
<In case pre-adjustment before aging is not carried out >
(1) Input timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) with the signal generator (R, G and B
OFF).
(2) Set each adjustment item to the following value.
BRIGHTNESS : 7F
(FACT3)
BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT) : 5E0
(3) Connect PWB-CRT TP (R200G lead wire) to the probe.

(4) Select BTCEN (BRIGHT-CENT) in FACT3, set the black level voltage of PWB-CRT TP
(R200G lead wire) to 70 +/- 0.5V with the oscilloscope (refer to the following picture).
* In use of the digital voltage meter, set it to 73 +/- 0.5V.
G-K
70±0.5V
GND
(5) Set the back raster luminance to 0.3 +/- 1cd/m 2 with FBT screen VR.
(6) Adjust the back raster color coordination to the value listed in the following table with R-
BS1 (R-BIAS-H) and B-BS1 (B-BIAS-H).
(7) Adjust the back raster luminance to 0.3 +/- 0.1cd/m 2 with BTCEN.
(8) If the back raster color coordination is deviated from the values listed in the following table,
repeat steps (6) and (7).
(9) Adjust the back raster luminance to 3.0 +/- 0.2cd/m 2 with BTMAX.
* The following table is applicable for the monitor without the back cover.
Adjustment value of BS1 (BIAS-H)
Adjustment item BS1 (BIAS-H)
Color temperature (9300K)
x 0.283±0.015
Color coordination
y 0.297±0.015
2.4.4.2 Adjusting BS2 (BIAS-M) / BS3 (BIAS-L)

(1) Set R-BS2 (R-BIAS-M), G-BS2 (G-BIAS-M) and B-BS2 (B-BIAS-M) to the value listed in the
following table.
(2) Set R-BS3 (R-BIAS-L), G-BS3 (G-BIAS-L) and B-BS3 (B-BIAS-L) to the value listed in the
following table.
As the values listed in the following table are the finite differences from the values of BS1
(BIAS-H), this adjustment should be carried out after adjustment of BS1 (BIAS-H).
Adjustment data of BS2 (BIAS-M) / BS3 (BIAS-L)

(*The following data is the finite difference from BS 1 (BIAS-H).)
Adjustment item BS2 (BIAS-M) BS3 (BIAS-L)

Color temperature (6500K) (5000K)
R-BS +3 +5
Data G-BS same value same value
B-BS -4 -8
2 - 12
2.4.5 Setting CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS circuit (Factory mode)
Note) This operation should be carried out after the adjustment of cut-off. In addition, heat-
running should be fully carried out.
2.4.5.1 Reading beam current default data

(1) Input timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) crosshatch signal with the signal generator.
(2) Select CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS and push (-) button, then it starts to read the beam
current default data.
(3) When the reading is completed, OSM standard voltage DAC (Digital Analog Converter)
data and the beam current default data of each color (R/G/B) are indicated. Then, confirm
that the data is within the following value range.
Standard voltage DAC data : 50-F0 (HEX)
Red beam current default data : 73-8C (HEX)
Green beam current default data : 73-8C (HEX)
Blue beam current default data : 73-8C (HEX)
(4) If the above data could not be within the value range specified above (3), carry out steps
(2) and (3) mentioned above once.
(5) Measure the luminance and color coordination of the back raster.
2.4.5.2 Confirming CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function

(1) Select COSTANT BRIGHTNESS. Push (+) button, and it decrements the BRIGHTNESS
data to imitate the deteriorated condition due to elapsed time, then compensation function
starts to operate.
(2) Measure the color coordination and luminance of the back raster after compensation.
Compare them to the data measured in 2.4.5.1 (5) to confirm that the differences are within
the following value range.
Color coordination of x and y : within +/- 0.020
Luminance : within +/- 0.05cd/m 2
(3) If the color coordination and Iuminance of the back raster could not be within the value
range specified in (2) above, select CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS and push RESET button,
then carry out step 2.4.5.1 (2) once.
(4) Select CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS, and push RESET button.
2.4.6 Adjusting the RGB drive signal
2.4.6.1 Adjusting GN1 (GAIN-H) (adjustment of 9300K)

Status
GN1 (GAIN-H) Factory No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
Full white
(1) Input the following adjustment timing with the signal generator.
Pattern: Full white (Input amplitude = 0.7Vp-p)
Adjustment timing: No.12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200)
(2) Select CONTRAST with OSM, and set to MAX using (+) button.
(3) Select BRIGHTNESS, and set the data to 7F using (-) (+) buttons.
(4) Output the solid color for the picture from Signal generator A, and input GREEN only.
(5) Set G-GN1 (G-GAIN-H) with OSM, and adjust the luminance of full green picture to the
specified value listed in the following table with (-) (+) buttons.
(6) Input BLUE, RED and GREEN, and select B-GN1 (B-GAIN-H), R-GN1 (R-GAIN-H) and G-
GN1 (G-GAIN-H) appropriately, then adjust each data to the specified value listed in the
following table with (-) (+) buttons.
(7) Confirm that the variation of the color coordination data of x and y is within +/- 0.015 when
CONTRAST is set to 25cd/m 2 with OSM.
2 - 13
(8) Adjust GN2 (GAIN-M) and GN3 (GAIN-L) to the specified value listed in the following table
in the same manner as GN1 (GAIN-H).
COLOR TEMPERATURE GN1 (GAIN-H) GN2 (GAIN-M) GN3 (GAIN-L) TOLERANCE

Color temperature (9300K) (6500K) (5000K)
Full green luminance 77.0 66.0 54.0 ±1.0
Full White x 0.283 0.313 0.345 ±0.005
color coordination y 0.297 0.329 0.359 ±0.005
2
Full white luminance(cd/m ) 105 or more 90 or more 75 or more
(9) Setting R/G/B MAX GAIN

Set the MAX GAIN value for the following formula to the following address (all setting
values are indicated by HEX).
Firstly hexadecimal number should be converted to decimal number to be calculated, then
the result figured out is return to hexadecimal numbers to be written into the applicable
address.
How to write into address is described below.
MAX GAIN = MAX value of R/G/B GAIN adjustment value (*1) x {1 + (MAX value of
SBCN1, 2 (*2) /FF)
Address (HEX): 89 (R-GAIN-MAX), 8a (G-GAIN-MAX), 8b (B-GAIN-MAX)
(*1): MAX value of R/G/B GAIN adjustment value is the maximum one among R-GN1, G-
GN1, B-GN1, R-GN2, G-GN2, B-GN2, R-GN3, G-GN3 and B-GN3 in OSM (FACTORY-
3) adjusted according to the procedure (1) to (8) mentioned above.
(*2): MAX value of SBCN1, 2 is the maximum one between SBCN1 and SBCN2 in OSM
(FACTORY-3).
Note) All of (MAX GAIN), (MAX value R/G/B GAIN) and (SBCN1 and SBCN2) are indi
cated by hexadecimal number (HEX), the value is to be converted to the decimal
number (DEC) first to be calculated, then, converted to the hexadecimal number (HEX).
<How to rewrite into address>

(a) Change to FACTORY MODE in advance.
(b) Set the counter of FACT DATA on OSM to 99 using (-) (+) buttons, and push SELECT
button.
(c) Press either ( ) or ( ) button, and confirm that the following picture appears.
(d) Using (-) (+) buttons rewrite the counter for every hexadecimal data to the one figured
out with the calculation mentioned above (decimal data is to be rewritten following to
hexadecimal one synchronously).
(e) Press EXIT button, then the rewritten data is to be registered.
(f) To disable this rewriting function, turn the power OFF. However, FACTORY MODE is
still alive even if the power was turned off.
NOTE) Be careful NOT to wrongly rewrite the data since this rewriting function is
available for all of the EDID data.
2 - 14
2.4.6.2 Adjusting ABL

Status
ABL Factory No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
Full white
(1) Input the following adjustment timing with the signal generator.
Pattern: Full white (input amplitude = 0.7Vp-p)
Adjustment timing: No.12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200)
(2) Select ABLAJ (ABL) with OSM, and adjust to 115cd/m 2 +/- 5.
Here, the picture size should follow 2.5.1.10 Adjustment value list.
2.4.7 Adjusting the focus
NOTE) For adjustment of focus with FOCUS VR, be sure to use ISOLATED alignment driver.
Normal or reverse display Point to align with

Adjust to FOCUS JUST at the
circled sections using FBT
FOCUS1-VR mainly and FBT
Vertical Reverse display FOCUS2-VR with well
line balancing.
(Green)
The ratio of core : Halo of the vertical lines at both
sides shouled be 1 : 1.
Adjust to FOCUS JUST at the
center of screen (circled section)
using FBT FOCUS1-VR mainly and
Normal display FBT FOCUS2-VR with well
Horizontal balancing.
line Adjust to halo condition once, then
adjust to FOCUS JUST.
* Adjust halo to a quarter of core with camera adjustment.

Halo should be a half of core maximum.
<Adjusting the static focus>

Status
Static focus No. 12:106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
H character, crosshatch
For steps (1) and (2), use the timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) H character pattern
and crosshatch pattern.
For step (3), use all preset timing H character patterns and crosshatch patterns.
(1) Display a green or white crosshatch pattern, and adjust the focus according to the proce-
dure mentioned above.
(2) If the DBF voltage is insufficient or excessive, select HFOCS (DBF-H-AMP) from OSM, and
readjust with (-) (+) buttons. Then repeat step (1), and adjust so that the following judge-
ment conditions are satisfied.
(3) For all of the other preset timings, if the DBF voltage is insufficient or excessive, select
HFOCS (DBF-H-AMP) from OSM, and readjust with (-) (+) buttons.
(4) If the focus is unbalanced at right side and left side with other preset timings.
Select HFOCD (DBF-H-PHASE) and readjust with (-) (+) buttons.
(5) If the focus is unbalanced at top and bottom with timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600 x 1200),
select DBF2T (DBFV2 TOP) and DBF2B (DBFV2 BOTTOM) and readjust with (-) (+) buttons.
2 - 15
(6) After inputting check timing No. 5 in user mode and operates AUTO-ADJUST function,
confirm the focus with "e" character pattern in reverse. If "e" character is indistinct, repeat
step (1) to readjust.
*Adjustment votlage max value:

DBF-H-AMP H width: 396mm: 430V
DBF-V-AMP V width: 297mm: 200V
The focus is judged as follows.

Timing Judgment pattern (Note 1) (Note 2)
Normal display (All preset) Crosshatch pattern
Reverse display
Resolution: 1600x1200 Judge with pattern A
Resolution: >1600x1200 Judge with pattern B
(Note 1) Pattern A: Font 7 ×9, Cell 10×11, e character
Pattern B: Font 7 ×9, Cell 10×11, H character
(Note 2) Focus judgement: Crosshatch pattern should be used for normal display judgement
The ratio of core : Halo is as follows.
Should be 1 : 0.5 or less at the center of the picture.
Should be 1 : 1.5 or less at the both sides of the picture
To judge the reverse display, do not carry out a relative evaluation with the other point on the
screen. Instead, judge whether the e (H) character can be read distinctly at that point.
Core
Halo Core
Halo
Focus pack
FOCUS1-VR
FOCUS
FOCUS2-VR
Focus attention point
2.4.8 Adjusting the convergence
2.4.8.1 Adjusting with ITC

Before adjusting the center mis-convergence and axial mis-convergence, carry out sufficient
full white aging (100cd/m 2 or more, for one hour or more). Then, adjust with the following
timing.
Timing: No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz,1600x1200) crosshatch pattern
Confirm that the following DDCP default setting is as shown in the table of 2.3.2.2 Factory
mode (OSM display matrix).
All items of OSM group USER5 and FACT2 of Factory mode
Adjust the horizontal and vertical convergence to the optimum setting with the CRT CP ring,
etc.
(Refer to following drawings.)
R or B
B or R
Vertical convergence Horizontal convergence
2 - 16
Adjusting the center misconvergence and axial misconvergence
Adjustment item name Problem Adjustment point Adjustment procedure
R B
H-STATIC Adjust to +/- 0.1mm or less
V-STATIC with CP-ASSY 4P.
Adjust so that TOP+BOTTOM

YH axial deviation are +/- 0.1mm or less with YH
volume.
Adjustment making much of

horizontal trapezoidal distortion
Adjust optimally using DY

YV axial deviation left/right shaking YV volume.
The remaining YV
misconvergence should be
adjusted with DDCP.
Adjust so that LEFT-RIGHT is

XH axial deviation +/- 0.1mm or less with XH
slider.
Only when XV (B-Bow) is +/-

0.15mm or more, adjust so
that LEFT-RIGHT is +/-
XV characteristics 0.15mm or less with the
interlock of B-Bow 4P and
CP-ASSY 4P.
Adjust so that LEFT+RIGHT

XV axial deviation is +/- 0.15mm or less with XV
differential coil.
B-Bow 4p and CP-ASSY 4p Correction Method XH Slider

DY Board
B-Bow 4p YH(a)
CP-ASSY 4p
XH Slider
CRT DY
Front TRD (Push or Pull)
YH(t)
(Side View) Rear

XV Dif. Coil: XV (t) (Viewed from neck side)
DY Board
(Viewed from top side)
Adjustmennt stick (Top of DY)
2 - 17
2.4.8.2 Adjusting DDCP
(1) Input the timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz,1600x1200) crosshatch pattern.
(2) Enter the factory mode.
(3) Adjust in the following order. (It is assumed that the center and axial misconvergence on
the previous page have already been adjusted.)
Adjustment
order Adjustment item name Problem Adjustment point Adjustment procedure
4H-COIL
1 CONVERGENCE HOR. R B Adjust to 0.05mm or less.

(Adjustment target is 0mm.)
YH-TT YH (Top)
Adjust YH (Top) to 0.05mm or
less with balance adjustment
of YH-TT and YH-JT.
2 (Adjustment target is 0mm.)
(NOTE)
YH-JT The operating amount at YH-
YH-M (Top) M(Top) when moving YH-TT
and YH-JT : YH-TT < YH-JT
YH -M (Bottom) Adjust YH (Bottom) to 0.05mm

or less with balance
YH-TB
adjustment of YH-TB and YH-
JB. (Adjustment target is
0mm.)
3
(NOTE)
The operating amount at YH-M
(Bottom) when moving YH-TB
YH-JB and YH-JB :
YH (Bottom)
YH-TB < YH-JB
XH(Left)
4 XH-L Adjust to 0.1mm or less.
XH(Right)
5 XH-R Adjust to 0.1mm or less.
2 - 18
Adjustment Adjustment item name Problem Adjustment point Adjustment procedure
order
4H-COIL
S3H(Top Left)
R B
6 S3H-TL Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
S3H(Top Right)
7 S3H-TR
Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
S3H(Bottom Left)
8 S3H-BL
S3H(Bottom Right)
9 S3H-BR
PQH (Top Left)

B
10 PQH-TL R Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
PQH (Top Right)
11 PQH-TR Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
2 - 19
Adjustment
4H-COIL
12 PQH-BL Adjust to 0.3mm or less.

R B
PQH (Bottom Left)
13 PQH-BR Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
PQH (Bottom Right)

order
4V-COIL
R
1 CONVERGENCE VER. (Adjustment target is 0mm.)
B
Adjust YV (Top) to 0.05mm or

YV (TOP) less with balance adjustment
of YV-TT and YV-JT.
YV-TT
2
YV-JT (Note) The operating amount
at YV-M (Top) when
moving YV-TT and YV-
YV-M (TOP) JT.
YV-TT<YV-JT
Adjust YV (Bottom) to 0.05mm

YV-M (BOTTOM) or less with balance
adjustment of YV-TB and YV-
JB.
YV-TB
3
YV-JB (Note) The operating amount
at YV-M (Bottom)
when moving YV-TB
and YV-JB.
YV (BOTTOM)
YV-TB<YV-JB
2 - 20
order
4V-COIL
XV(Left)
B
4 XV-L
XV(Right)
5 XV-R
B S3V(Top Left)
6 S3V-TL
R Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
S3V(Top Right)
7 S3V-TR
S3V(Bottom Left)
8 S3V-BL Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
S3V(Bottom Right)
9 S3V-BR
2 - 21
Adjustment
4V-COIL
B PQV (Top Left)
R
10 PQV-TL Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
PQV (Top Right)
11 PQV-TR Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
12 PQV-BL Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
PQV (Bottom Left)
13 PQV-BR Adjust to 0.3mm or less.
PQV (Bottom Right)
* Specify the adjustment value range of the following adjustment items in general DDCP
adjustment.
Adjustment items Adjustment value range (Factory mode))
CONVERGENCE (HOR.) 2Bh (43) - D3h (211) (OSM display value=DAC output value)
CONVERGENCE (VER.) 47h (71) - B7h (183) (OSM display value=DAC output value)
2 - 22
2.4.9 Default settings (With factory mode)

Status
Default settings Factory mode Each adjustment timing
indicator
(1) Set the default values as shown in the table (user mode) given in OSM display (Refer to
2.3.2.1 User mode).
If the setting class is an item with each timing, carry out with each adjustment timing.
(2) Return to the user mode with the front panel.
(3) Execute FACTORY PRESET to confirm that each OSM setting is as shown in the table
(user mode) given in OSM display (Refer to 2.3.2.1 User mode).
Only CONTRAST will be set to 100% when RESET button is pressed in the normal mode.
(4) How to set OSM BRIGHTNESS RESET value (30.1%) in user mode.
(a) Change to FACTORY MODE in advance.
(b) Set the counter of FACT DATA on OSM to 99 using (-) (+) buttons, and push SELECT
button.
(c) Using ( )( ) buttons to set ADDR to 0B1.
(d) Using (-) (+) buttons set DATA to 04D.
(e) Press EXIT button to record 04D set in (d) mentioned above.
(f) To disable this rewriting function, turn the power OFF (FACTORY MODE is still alive
even if the power was turned OFF).
Return to USER MODE.

Select BRIGHTNESS with OSM, and press RESET button, then the data (04D = 30.1%) set in
(d) mentioned above is called.
(For your information; when (-) and (+) buttons are pressed simultaneously, the data is set to
50%.)
(5) After setting the default values, turn the power button OFF.
2 - 23
2.5 Inspections (In normal mode)
Status
Inspections Normal mode
indicator
2.5.1 Electrical performance

Inspect the electrical performance after confirming that the contrast is set to MAX and the
bright is set to center (by pressing (-) (+) buttons simultaneously).
After inspection, carry out FACTORY PRESET operation.
2.5.1.1 Withstand voltage

There must be no abnormality when 1500VAC is applied for two seconds between both ends of
the AC input terminal and chassis, and between the DG coil terminal and chassis.
The cut-off current should be 20mA.
2.5.1.2 Grounding conductivity check

Check that the resistance value is 100ohms or less when 25A is passed between the AC input
terminal grounding GND and chassis GND.
2.5.1.3 Degaussing coil operation

Confirm that when OSM DEGAUSS is executed, the picture vibrates and then stops.
2.5.1.4 IPM OFF MODE function operation (Set the AC power input to 230V)
Confirmation timing
Timing No. 12 (106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200)
Use the full white pattern without R, G, B signals.

Select IPM OFF MODE from OSM, and set to 1:ENABLE.
(1) IPM OFF MODE ENABLE

(a) Confirm that when H and V SYNCs are removed, the system waits for approx. five
seconds, displays IPM OFF MODE for approx. three seconds, and then the picture dark
ens.
Also confirm that Power Indicator changes to orange and the power consumption is
as follows.
Power consumption 2W or less
(b) Confirm that when H and V SYNCs are input again, the high voltage is recovered, and
the picture appears in approx. five seconds.
2 - 24
2.5.1.5 Confirming the GLOBAL SYNC (CORNER-Purity) function
Confirmation timing
Timing No. 12 (106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200)
Input a (full white display), and press (-)(+) buttons to change GLOBAL SYNC (TR/TL/BR/BL).
Confirm that the color coordination around the picture changes.
2.5.1.6 Focus, picture performance

Status
Focus, Check timing No.5, "e" character reverse display
indicator
picture performance Check timing No.6, chrosshatch normal display
The picture must be evenly bright with check timing No. 5 "e" character reverse display and
check timing No. 6 chosshatch normal display.
2.5.1.7 Misconvergence
After heat running for 20 minutes or more, the mis-convergence amount in the horizontal and
vertical directions must be below the following values.
The mis-convergence amount is the value between the two colors of R, G and B separated the
most in the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) directions when a 15 vertical lines x 11 horizontal
lines crosshatch is displayed.
This adjustment should be carried out with the convergence meter MINOLTA CC-100.
Mis-convergence amount
Zone
A 0.25mm or less
B 0.35mm or less
Measurement timing (Timing No.) 12
<Zone> <Mis-convergence amount>
B
A
Y
Specified picture size
396mm x 297mm
2 - 25
2.5.1.8 Picture distortion
When the picture distortion is measured, each distortion of the preset timing must be less than
the following values.
<Picture performance inspection items> Inspect the following items for the picture distortion.
No. Item Judgement reference value Input signal

1. 4-corner section distortion
Inspect the distortion at the four corners.
• Signal, H character with frame (both normal/reverse)
x 1pitch H character
• Distortion x: (=0.3mm) with frame
x Distortion in the range of one H (both normal/
character height. reverse)
Judge with the white display G.
(Judge the distortion amount with
a fluorescent material stripe.)
2. 4-edge distortion
When S-character or seagull type high frequency distortion
is visible, check with the following method.
• Distortion x of S-character x 0.6mm Crosshatch
Left/right
distortion seagull, etc.: * Note pattern
Distortion excluding normal pin,
barrel or trapezoid.
x
• Distortion y:
y
Top/bottom High frequency distortion
distortion y 1.0mm
excluding trapezoid.
Inner distortion
3. • Distortion x: a. x 1.0mm
a. Center line (*)
b. x 1.5mm
b. Curve of other vertical line
(*) Preset No.1
(31.5kHz, 60Hz) is:
50mm
a. x 1.5mm
x x b. x 2.0mm
Vertical line X • Distortion x: Curve within
measurement method x 0.9mm
50mm range
H line Scale
Within
Per 50mm n mm Enlarged
V line
Set scale to V line
2 - 26
4. Line curve (crosshatch pattern outer contour)
x
x 1.0mm Crosshatch
y y 1.0mm pattern
x: Curve within 50mm range (horizontal)
y: Curve within 50mm range (vertical)
5. Horizontal trapezoid (top/bottom), vertical trapezoid (left/right)

Bezel
y1
y1 • y=|y1-y2|
y2 y 2.0mm
x=|x1-x2|
x 1.8mm
x1 • Control with the above
right value for each the
x2 top, bottom, left and right.
6. Top/bottom pin and barrel, left/right pin and barrel
yb
yp yb 1.3mm
yp 1.5mm
x 1.0mm
x Picture
7. Parallelogram distortion
x1
Measure the larger of x1
and x2.
x 0.8mm
x2
8. Inclination
Measure y = |y1-y2|.
y 2.0mm
y2
y1
Bezel
2 - 27
9. Distortion Must be within the following frame.*
(Note, excluding ROTATION)
y
y 2.0mm Crosshatch
x 2.0mm pattern
x x
10. Picture position Specified H width

Display picture |L1-L2| 5.0mm Full white
L3 |L3-L4| 3.0mm
L1 L2 Specified
V width
L4
Phosphors surface
2.5.1.9 Linearity
Measure the linearity with a 17 horizontal line x 13 vertical line crosshatch.
Horizontal linearity : fH=30-40kHz whole : 15% or less, adjacent : 7% or less
fH=40-60kHz whole : 12% or less, adjacent : 7% or less
fH=60-115kHz whole : 10% or less, adjacent : 7% or less
Vertical linearity : whole : 10% or less, adjacent : 7% or less
Calculation expression : (Xmax - Xmin) x 100(%)

(Xmax + Xmin)/2
* If any doubts arise about the judgment, judge with the horizontal/vertical width tolerance
of ±3mm, picture position: |L1-L2|≤3.0mm and |L3-L4|≤3.0mm.
2 - 28
2.5.1.10 Adjustment value list
The horizontal width, vertical width and DBF-H/V amplitude must be within the following ranges.
Timing Horizontal width (mm) Vertical width (mm) DBF-H amplitude (H) DBF-V amplitude (V)
No. Adj. value Adj. value Standard Adj. value Max. Adj. value Standard Adj. value Max. Adj. value
1
2 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
3
4
5 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
6
7 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
8 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
9 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
10 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
11 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
12 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
13
14
15 396±5 297±4 400±5 430 135±20 200
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Standard adjustment value: in case of determining DBF voltage

Maximum adjustment value: the value impossible to set the maximum of DBF voltage
2 - 29
2.5.1.11 Checking the functions during Composite Sync input

Status
Checking the functions during Check 2 : 35kHz / 66Hz
indicator
Composite Sync input Full white
[Composite Sync]
Timing: Check 2 (35kHz/66Hz), full white
In the normal mode, input the above timing to confirm that the operation is normal.
2.5.1.12 Confirming the reset operation
Confirmation timing
Timing No. 12 (106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200)
After varying NARROW/WIDE somewhat, press RESET button to confirm that the data returns
to the original value.
2.5.1.13 Confirming the full white luminance/color coordination

Status
Confirming the full white Factory mode No.12: 106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
luminance / color coodination Full white
Timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200), input amplitude = 0.7Vp-p, BRIGHT : 7F (50%)

Confirm that the full white luminance/color coordination is the following value.
*9300K: should be confirmed with COLOR 1.
*5000K: should be confirmed with COLOR 5.
*6500K: should be confirmed using color temperature 6500K with color temperture adjust
ment ( ).
Confirmed item 9300K 6500K 5000K
Luminance 105 or more 90 or more 77 or more
Color x 0.283±0.007 0.313±0.007 0.345±0.007

temperature y 0.297±0.007 0.329±0.007 0.359±0.007
Confirmation of OSM color temperature (9300K)

x=0.283±0.04 Y=0.297±0.05
*Confirmation should be carried out at white section on OSM picture.
2.5.1.14 Confirming CONVERGENCE compensation function

Confirm that CONVERGENCE changes by varying CONVERGENCE (HOR.) and CONVER-
GENCE (VER.).
2.5.1.15 Confirming ROTATION compensation function

Confirm that the picture rorates by changing ROTATE.
2.5.1.16 Luminance/color coordination uniformity

Status
Lluminance/color No.12: 106.25kHz / 85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
coordination uniformity
2 - 30
The luminance ratio between the center and periphery must be 80% or more with timing No. 12
(106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200) COLOR 1.
The color coordination difference between the center and periphery must be ∆x, y < ±0.012
with COLOR 1.
2.5.1.17 Confirming the color tracking

Status
Confirming Factory mode No.12 : 106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200
indicator
color tracking BRIGHTNESS : 7F (50%)
Confirm with the timing No. 12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200), BRIGHTNESS : 7F (50%) and
COLOR1 (9300K) in factory mode.
Measure the color coordination at the center of the picture using a full white pattern (input
amplitude = 0.7Vp-p).
Confirm that the color coordination change is within the ±0.015 range when the CONTRAST is
set to 25cd/m 2 with OSM.
2.5.1.18 CRT installation position

CRT installation position tolerance Within ±3mm in vertical direction Within ±2.5mm in horizontal direction
Inclination: Within ±2.5mm at bezel reference
2.5.1.19 Confirming SB MODE operation

Timing No.12 (106.25kHz/85Hz, 1600x1200)
Input amplitude = 0.7Vp-p (white window)
The following items should be confirmed with CONTRAST: MAX and BRIGHTNESS: 50%.
SB MODE Confirmation item 9300K

W-Window luminance 150 or more
x 0.283±0.015
SB-MODE2 W-Window
color coordination y 0.297±0.015
Back raster luminance Approx. 0.8cd/m2
* Confirm that the color is not saturated with the white window picture during SB MODE2
operating.
* Confirm the following items during SB MODE2 operating.
(1) Compensation of :
Confirm that A and B of the following test pattern become similar black color.
Confirm that C and D of the following test pattern become similar white color.
(2) Compensation of outline:
Confirm that the overshoot (ringing) appears on the left edge of C of the following test
pattern.
2 - 31
Confirmation of γ compensation
A B C D
Confirmation of outline compensation
2.5.1.20 Confirming AUTO-ADJUST operation

(Timing No. 22 (114kHz/85Hz, 1600X1280))
(1) Select AUTO ADJUST with OSM in user mode, and press (+) button.
(2) Confirm that AUTO ADJUST function operates and the crosshatch frame should be within
phosphor area.
Phosphor area
Image area
Crosshatch frame
2.5.1.21 Others
(1) When any button is pressed, the changes must be smooth, and there must be no abnor-
malities such as noise.
(2) Synchronization must not flow when the power button is turned ON and OFF.
(3) Confirm that Power Indicator is lit.
2 - 32
2.6 DDC function, check of asset management
This writing operation should be carried out with the service tool (refer to the followings for
detail of service tool).
The version of the service tool software used is as follows.
Service tool S/W folder name: SVT312NM210
Service tool S/W version: Ver3.12-2.1-0
Be sure to read “Read me first” first in using the service tool.
For concrete use, refer to the service tool manual attached to the service tool.
Lower 5 digits of S/N → converted to hex. Numbers → registered in ascending order

Upper 3 digits of S/N → 0 (according to VESA standard)
(Ex.) 512002978 → 00000BA2 → Models having Models having

NO ASSET function ASSET function
MPU side Dedicated EEPROM side Data (H)

Address (H) Address (H)
78C 0C A2
78D 0D 0B
78E 0E 00
78F 0F 00
[ASCII conversion]
Using the barcode system read the serial numbers (9 digits) assigned at NMV (Nagasaki), then establish the serial
number through the following conversion.
S/N → converted to ASCII code → registered (to Monitor Descriptor #4) in descending order
(ex.) 512A02978
↓
35 31 32 41 30 32 39 37 38
↓
Models having Models having
NO ASSET function ASSET function
MPU side Dedicated EEPROM side Data (H)

Address (H) Address (H)
E81 71 35
E82 72 31
E83 73 32
E84 74 41
E85 75 30
E86 76 32
E87 77 39
E88 78 37
E89 79 38
E8A 7A 0A → shows the end of S/N data*
E8B 7B 20 → shows blank*
E8C 7C 20 → shows blank*
E8D 7D 20 → shows blank*
*Fixed data (set according to the number of digits of S/N)
2 - 33
2.6.1 DDC write data contents
The contents of DDC write data must be as follows.
EDID DATA DUMP HEX Established Timings: Detailed Timing (block #1): ---Preferred Timing Mode---
00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 720x400 @ 70 Hz Pixel Clock: 229.50 MHz
38 A3 DA 61 SN SN SN SN 720x400 @ 88 Hz Horizontal Active: 1600 pixels
WW YY 01 03 0C 28 1E 78 640x480 @ 60 Hz Horizontal Blanking: 560 pixels
EB 9C 68 A0 57 4A 9B 26 640x480 @ 67 Hz Vertical Active: 1200 lines
12 48 4C FF EF 80 31 59 640x480 @ 72 Hz Vertical Blanking: 50 lines
45 59 61 59 71 4F 81 99 640x480 @ 75 Hz (Horizontal Frequency: 106.25 kHz)
A9 4F C1 4F D1 4F A6 59 800x600 @ 56 Hz (Vertical Frequency: 85.0 Hz)
40 30 62 B0 32 40 40 C0 800x600 @ 60 Hz Horizontal Sync Offset: 64 pixels
13 00 8C 29 11 00 00 1E 800x600 @ 72 Hz Horizontal Sync Width: 192 pixels
00 00 00 FD 00 32 A0 1E 800x600 @ 75 Hz Vertical Sync Offset: 1 lines
73 21 00 0A 20 20 20 20 832x624 @ 75 Hz Vertical Sync Width: 3 lines
20 20 00 00 00 FC 00 4E 1024x768 @ 60 Hz Horizontal Border: 0 pixels
45 43 20 46 45 32 31 31 1024x768 @ 70 Hz Vertical Border: 0 lines
31 53 42 0A 00 00 00 FF 1024x768 @ 75 Hz Horizontal Image Size: 396 mm
00 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 1152x870 @ 75 Hz Vertical Image Size: 297 mm
S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 00 CS 1280x1024 @ 75 Hz Interlaced: NO
Image: Normal Display
SN: Serial number Standard Timing #1: Sync: Digital Separate
WW: Week of Manufacture Horizontal Active Pixels: 640 Bit 1: ON
YY: Year of Manufacture Aspect Ratio: 4:3 Bit 2: ON
S2: ASCII Serial Number (480 active lines)
CS: Check Sum Refresh Rate: 85 Hz Monitor Range Limits (block #2):
Minimum Vertical Rate: 50 Hz
-- EDID DATA DUMP TEXT -- Standard Timing #2: Maximum Vertical Rate: 160 Hz
Manufacturer Code: NEC Horizontal Active Pixels: 800 Minimum Horizontal Rate: 30 kHz
Product Code (HEX): 61DA Aspect Ratio: 4:3 Maximum Horizontal Rate: 115 kHz
Product Code (DEC): 25050 (600 active lines) Maximum Pixel Clock: 330 MHz
(Microsoft INF ID: NEC61DA) Refresh Rate: 85 Hz GTF Data: 00 0a 20 20 20 20 20 20
Serial Number (HEX): SN
Week of Manuf: WW Standard Timing #3: Monitor Name (block #3):
Year of Manuf: YY Horizontal Active Pixels: 1024 NEC FE2111SB
Aspect Ratio: 4:3
EDID Version: 1 (768 active lines) Monitor Serial Number (block #4): S2
EDID Revision: 3 Refresh Rate: 85 Hz
Extension Flag: 0 SN: Serial number
Standard Timing #4: WW: Week of Manufacture
Video: Horizontal Active Pixels: 1152 YY: Year of Manufacture
Input Singal: ANALOG Aspect Ratio: 4:3 S2: ASCII Serial Number
Setup: NO (864 active lines)
Sync on Green: NO Refresh Rate: 75 Hz EDID EDITOR V1.45 (010514) Copyright (C)
Composite Sync: YES Mitsubishi Electric 1995-2000
Separate Sync: YES Standard Timing #5:
V Sync Serration: NO Horizontal Active Pixels: 1280
V Signal Level: Aspect Ratio: 5:4
0.700V/0.300V (1V p-p) (1024 active lines)
Refresh Rate: 85 Hz
Max Image Size H: 40 cm
Max Image Size V: 30 cm Standard Timing #6:
DPMS Stand By: YES Horizontal Active Pixels: 1600
DPMS Suspend: YES Aspect Ratio: 4:3
DPMS Active Off: YES (1200 active lines)
GTF Support: YES Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
Standard Default Color Space: NO
Preferred Timing Mode: YES Standard Timing #7:
Display Type: RGB Color Horizontal Active Pixels: 1792
Aspect Ratio: 4:3
Color: (1344 active lines)
Gamma: 2.20 Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
Red x: 0.627
Red y: 0.341 Standard Timing #8:
Green x: 0.292 Horizontal Active Pixels: 1920
Green y: 0.605 Aspect Ratio: 4:3
Blue x: 0.149 (1440 active lines)
Blue y: 0.072 Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
White x: 0.283
White y: 0.297
2 - 34
2.6.2 Self-diagnosis shipment setting
The shipment settings for self-diagnosis data area (region) are given below.
ADR Shipment Setting (H) LABEL NAME

0x08C to 0x08F 0x00 Heater operating time
0x0B6 to 0x0B9 0x00 Operating time
0x0C0 0x00 High voltage error rate
0x0C1 0x00 High voltage suspension rate
0x0C2 0x00 Short circuit rate
0x0C3 0x00 High voltage data error rate
0x0C4 0x00 Deflection suspension rate
0x0C5 0x00 Heater error rate
0x0C6 0x00 ABL error
2.7 Default inspection
2.7.1 Default setting of switches

Confirm that the following switch is set as follows.
(1) Power switch: OFF
2.7.2 Default setting of OSM

Confirm that each OSM setting is as shown in OSM display (section 2.3.3) table (user mode/
factory mode).
If the setting class is an item for each timing, carry out for each adjustment timing.
* Only CONTRAST will be set to MAX (100%) when RESET button is pressed in the normal
mode.
2.7.3 Checking the labels

Confirm that the "SERVICEMAN WARNING", "rating label", "manufacturing date stamp", "SE-
RIAL NO. label", etc., are attached to the specified position, and have been checked.
2.7.4 Packaging
(1) There must be no remarkable contamination, tearing or scratches, etc.
(2) The model name must be accurately displayed.
(3) The SERIAL NO. must be attached. (Must be the same No. as the set.)
(4) The package must be accurately sealed.
2 - 35
2.8 Degaussing with handy-demagnetizer
2.8.1 General precautions

(1) Carry this procedure out with the monitor power ON.
(2) When degaussing with handy-demagnetizer, the demagnetizer power must be turned ON
and OFF at a position at least 1m away from CRT tube.
(3) Use a bar type demagnetizer instead of a ring type.
Carefully and slowly (1m/3 sec.) demagnetize the CRT tube and bezel side surface.
When separating the degaussing coil at the end, separate as slow as possible with the
following procedure.
If separated quickly, stripes could remain at the picture corners.
2.8.2 How to hold and use the handy-demagnetizer

(1) Approach the demagnetizer as carefully and slowly (approx. 1m/3 sec.) as possible, and
move around the bezel side periphery two to three times.
(2) Next, gradually (approx. 1m/3 sec.) move to the CRT tube side, and move around the CRT
tube four to five times with the following procedure.
(3) Finally, leave the CRT tube as slowly (approx. 1m/3 sec.) as possible, and turn the handy-
demagnetizer unit switch OFF at a position 1 to 1.5m away.
(NOTE): The monitor should be degaussed as whichever following conditions.

(1) Degauss by handy demagnetizer in off condition.
(2) Degauss by handy demagnetizer in power management condition.
(3) Degauss by handy demagnetizer with monitor set degauss operation.
Looking from side of set
SW
1m or more ON / OFF
※Slowly (approx. 1m/3 sec.) pull away from center of tube.
<Holding the handy - demagnetizer>
Face the handy - demagnetizer Do not hold the handy -

so that the longitudinal direction demagnetizer so that the
is vertical in respect to the CRT. longitudinal direction is parallel in
respect to the CRT.
Separate at least
2cm away from tube.
CRT CRT
2.9 Caution
Do not input the user timing before factory adjustments.
(The automatic tracking of the FOCUS could be adversely affected.)
2 - 36
2.10 Timing chart
[H-SYNC]
Tsh
Th
Tbh Tdh Tfh
[VIDEO]
Video signal level
Set Up nsignal level
[V-SYNC] Tsv
Tv
Tbv Tdv Tfv
[VIDEO]
※Refer to after the next page for the preset timing details.
2 - 37
2.11
NO Fh Clock Th Tsh Tfh Tbh Tdh Fv Tv Tsv Tfv Tbv Tdv Hs Vs VIDEO set up Serra- Remarks
(kHz) (MHz) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (Hz) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) level level tion
(dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) (line) (line) (line) (line) (line) (V) (V)
Check 35 28.571 3.500 1.891 4.000 19.180 66.70 15.000 0.086 1.485 2.000 11.428 S/G 0.7 - - Check 1
1
Check 35 28.571 3.500 1.891 4.000 19.180 66.70 15.000 0.086 1.485 2.000 11.428 Com 0.7 - 1H Check 2
2 posite
Check 106.250 229.500 9.412 0.837 0.279 1.325 6.972 85.000 11.765 0.028 0.009 0.433 11.294 + - 0.7 - - Check 4
Adjustment timing
4 (1600*1200)85Hz
Check 106.250 220.72 9.41 0.87 0.09 1.20 7.25 85.000 11.765 0.028 0.009 0.433 11.294 - - 0.7 - - Check5
5 106kHz85Hz, Horizontal 77%
Check 106.250 236.02 9.41 0.87 0.38 1.38 6.78 85.000 11.765 0.028 0.009 0.433 11.294 - + 0.7 - - Check6
6 106kHz85Hz, Horizontal 72%
A 30 33.333 4.000 0.833 2.500 26.000 70.10 14.268 0.064 1.176 1.906 11.122 + - 0.7 - -
2 - 38
NO Fh Clock Th Tsh Tfh Tbh Tdh Utili- H re- Fv Tv Tsv Tfv Tbv Tdv V re- Hs Vs VIDEO set up Serra- Remarks
(µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) zation trace (Hz) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) trace level level tion
(kHz) (MHz) (dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) s+f+b (line) (line) (line) (line) (line) (V) (V)
1 31.470 28.322 31.777 3.813 0.635 1.907 25.422 80.00 6.356 70.090 14.268 0.064 0.381 1.112 12.711 1.557 - + 0.7 - - ODS(720*400)70Hz
(800) (96) (16) (48) (640) (449) (2) (12) (35) (400)
2 31.469 25.175 31.778 3.813 0.636 1.907 25.422 80.00 6.356 59.940 16.683 0.064 0.318 1.048 15.253 1.112 - - 0.7 - - VGA(640*480)60Hz
○1
(800) (96) (16) (48) (640) (525) (2) (10) (33) (480)
3 37.500 31.500 26.667 2.032 0.508 3.810 20.317 76.19 6.350 75.000 13.333 0.080 0.027 0.427 12.800 0.506 - - 0.7 - - VESA(640*480)75Hz
(840) (64) (16) (120) (640) (500) (3) (1) (16) (480)
4 43.269 36.000 23.111 1.556 1.556 2.222 17.778 76.92 5.334 85.008 11.764 0.069 0.023 0.579 11.093 0.647 - - 0.7 - - VESA(640*480)85Hz
(832) (56) (56) (80) (640) (509) (3) (1) (25) (480)
5 46.875 49.500 21.333 1.616 0.323 3.232 16.162 75.76 5.171 75.000 13.333 0.064 0.021 0.448 12.800 0.512 + + 0.7 - - VESA(800*600)75Hz
○2
(1056) (80) (16) (160) (800) (625) (3) (1) (21) (600)
6 53.674 56.250 18.631 1.138 0.569 2.702 14.222 76.34 4.409 85.061 11.756 0.056 0.019 0.503 11.179 0.559 + + 0.7 - VESA(800*600)85Hz
(1048) (64) (32) (152) (800) (631) (3) (1) (27) (600)
7 60.023 78.750 16.660 1.219 0.203 2.235 13.003 78.05 3.657 75.029 13.328 0.050 0.017 0.466 12.795 0.516 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1024*768)75Hz
○3
(1312) (96) (16) (176) (1024) (800) (3) (1) (28) (768)
8 68.677 94.500 14.561 1.016 0.508 2.201 10.836 74.42 3.725 84.997 11.765 0.044 0.015 0.524 11.183 0.568 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1024*768)85Hz
○4
(1376) (96) (48) (208) (1024) (808) (3) (1) (36) (768)
9 79.976 135.000 12.504 1.067 0.119 1.837 9.481 75.82 3.023 75.025 13.329 0.038 0.013 0.475 12.804 0.513 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1280*1024)75Hz
○5
(1688) (144) (16) (248) (1280) (1066) (3) (1) (38) (1024)
10 91.146 157.500 10.971 1.016 0.406 1.422 8.127 74.08 2.844 85.027 11.761 0.033 0.011 0.483 11.235 0.516 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1280*1024)85Hz
○6
(1728) (160) (64) (224) (1280) (1072) (3) (1) (44) (1024)
11 93.750 202.500 10.667 0.948 0.316 1.501 7.901 74.07 2.765 75.000 13.333 0.032 0.011 0.491 12.800 0.523 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1600*1200)75Hz
○7
(2160) (192) (64) (304) (1600) (1250) (3) (1) (46) (1200)
12 106.250 229.500 9.412 0.837 0.279 1.325 6.972 74.08 2.441 85.000 11.765 0.028 0.009 0.433 11.294 0.461 + + 0.7 - - VESA(1600*1200)85Hz
○8
(2160) (192) (64) (304) (1600) (1250) (3) (1) (46) (1200)
13 106.270 261.00 9.41 0.828 0.368 1.349 6.866 72.96 2.545 74.997 13.334 0.028 0.009 0.649 12.647 0.677 - + 0.7 - - VESA(1792*1344)75Hz
(2456) (216) (96) (352) (1792) (1417) (3) (1) (69) (1344)
14 112.500 288.000 8.889 0.778 0.444 1.222 6.444 72.49 2.444 75.000 13.333 0.027 0.009 0.924 12.373 0.951 - + 0.7 - - ESA(1856*1392)75Hz
(2560) (224) (128) (352) (1856) (1500) (3) (1) (104) (1392)
15 112.500 297.000 8.889 0.754 0.485 1.185 6.4654 72.73 2.424 75.000 13.333 0.027 0.009 0.498 12.800 0.525 - + 0.7 - - VESA(1920*1440)75Hz
2 - 39
○9
(1640) (224) (144) (352) (1920) (1500) (3) (1) (56) (1440)
16 35.00 30.240 28.571 2.116 2.116 3.175 21.164 74.08 7.407 66.67 15.000 0.086 0.086 1.114 13.714 1.2 - - 0.7 - - APPLE13(640*480)
(864) (64) (64) (96) (640) (525) (3) (3) (39) (480)
17 49.710 57.270 20.115 1.118 0.559 3.910 14.528 72.22 5.587 74.530 13.417 0.060 0.020 0.785 12.552 0.845 - - 0.7 - - APPLE16(832*624)
(1152) (64) (32) (224) (832) (667) (3) (1) (39) (624)
18 60.240 80.000 16.600 1.200 0.400 2.200 12.800 77.11 3.800 74.930 13.346 0.050 0.049 0.498 12.749 0.548 - - 0.7 - - APPLE19(1024*768)
(1328) (96) (32) (176) (1024) (804) (3) (3) (30) (768)
19 68.680 100.000 14.560 1.280 0.320 1.440 11.520 79.12 3.040 75.060 13.322 0.044 0.043 0.568 12.667 0.612 - - 0.7 - - APPLE21(1152*870)
(1456) (128) (32) (144) (1152) (915) (3) (3) (39) (870)
20 100.200 219.638 9.980 0.801 0.546 1.348 7.285 73.00 2.695 75.000 13.333 0.03 0.01 0.519 12.774 0.549 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1600*1280)75Hz
(2192) (176) (120) (296) (1600) (1336) (3) (1) (52) (1280)
21 107.200 234.982 9.328 0.749 0.511 1.260 6.809 73.00 2.520 80.000 12.5 0.028 0.009 0.522 11.94 0.55 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1600*1280)80Hz
(2192) (176) (120) (296) (1600) (1340) (3) (1) (56) (1280)
22 114.240 252.242 8.754 0.698 0.507 1.205 6.343 72.46 2.410 85.000 11.765 0.026 0.009 0.525 11.204 0.551 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1600*1280)85Hz
(2208) (176) (128) (304) (1600) (1344) (3) (1) (60) (1280)
23 105.675 261.229 9.463 0.766 0.521 1.286 6.891 72.82 2.573 75.000 13.333 0.028 0.009 0.52 12.775 0.548 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1800*1350)75Hz
(2472) (200) (136) (336) (1800) (1409) (3) (1) (55) (1350)
24 113.040 279.435 8.846 0.716 0.487 1.202 6.442 72.82 2.405 80.000 12.5 0.027 0.009 0.522 11.943 0.549 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1800*1350)80Hz
(2472) (200) (136) (336) (1800) (1413) (3) (1) (59) (1350)
25 120.455 299.667 8.303 0.667 0.481 1.148 6.007 72.35 2.296 85.000 11.765 0.025 0.008 0.523 11.208 0.548 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1800*1350)85Hz
(2488) (200) (144) (344) (1800) (1417) (3) (1) (63) (1350)
26 112.725 278.656 8.871 0.718 0.488 1.206 6.460 72.82 2.412 75.000 13.333 0.027 0.009 0.523 12.774 0.55 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1800*1440)75Hz
(2472) (200) (136) (336) (1800) (1503) (3) (1) (63) (1440)
27 120.560 299.953 8.295 0.667 0.480 1.147 6.001 72.34 2.294 80.000 2.5 0.025 0.008 0.523 11.944 0.548 - - 0.7 - - GTF(1800*1440)80Hz
(2488) (200) (144) (344) (1800) (1507) (3) (1) (63) (1440)
28 80.530 105.656 12.418 1.060 0.303 1.363 9.692 78.05 2.726 100.000 10.0 0.037 0.012 0.410 9.537 0.463 - - 0.7 - - ELSA(1024*768)100Hz
(1312) (112) (32) (144) (1024) (805) (3) (1) (33) (768)
29 137.020 388.041 7.298 0.577 0.433 1.010 5.278 72.18 2.020 85.000 11.765 0.022 0.007 0.525 11.210 0.555 - - 0.7 - - GTF(2048*1536)85Hz
(2832) (224) (168) (392) (2048) (1612) (3) (1) (72) (1536)
Mark : Factory adjustment. The number after the mark is the preset number.
Mark : Factory adjustment [Though they are presets, it does not apply to the specification of the picture distortion. The sync. signals are reference to the above. (It is possible to reset with the above timings.))
Mark : Initial data [So long as initial data, the sync. signals are reference to Hs: + and Vs: -. However, it is necessary to adjust only the NARROW/WIDE, LEFT/RIGHT, DBF-H-AMP and DBF-H-PHASE in factory mode.
The numbers after the marks are the number of preset.
3. TROUBLE SHOOTING
This chapter for troubleshooting is useful if any normal conditions cannot be secured even after the
confirmation of “Troubleshooting” presented in the User’s Manual and the completion of “Chapter 2. Adjustment
procedures” presented in this Service Manual.
The equipment units related to the possible cause of “Picture bounces or a wavy patterns is present in the picture
“ described in “Troubleshooting” presented in the User’s Manual include the electrical equipment such as portable
telephones, etc., which may generate electromagnetic waves. Therefore, troubleshooting actions should be taken
after turning off the portable telephones, etc., and such electrical equipment that may generate electromagnetic waves,
or in a place distant from such equipment.
Contents
Page
3.1 No Raster Generated ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
3.2 Abnormal Picture --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3.2.1 Raster Brightness Failure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3.2.2 Image Color Failure or Contrast Failure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
3.2.3 Sync Failure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
3.2.3.1 Horizontal Sync Unstable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
3.2.3.2 Vertical Sync Unstable -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-6
3.2.4 Screen Size and Screen Position Failure --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-7
3.2.4.1 Horizontal Size Failure -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-7
3.2.4.2 Horizontal Position Failure --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-8
3.2.4.3 Vertical Size and Position Failure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-8
3.2.5 Linearity Failure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
3.2.5.1 Horizontal Linearity Failure --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
3.2.5.2 Vertical Linearity Failure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
3.2.6 Distortion Compensation Circuit Failure -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
3.2.6.1 IN/OUT (pincushion), ALIGN (trapezoidal) and TOP/BOTTOM (corner correction) Failure --- 3-11
3.2.6.2 LEFT/RIGHT (pincushion balance), TILT (parallelogram), and TOP BALANCE/BOTTOM
BALANCE (corner correction) Failure ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
3.2.6.3 ROTATE (raster rotation) Failure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
3.2.7 Focus Failure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-12
3.3 Functional Errors -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
3.3.1 OSM Failure -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
3.3.2 Power Management Functional Operation Error ---------------------------------------------------------------- 3-15
3.3.3 Plug & Play (DDC2B) Operation Error ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-16
3.3.4 Degaussing Functional Operation Error --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-16
3.3.5 Key Operation Error ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-17
3.4 Circuit Errors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-18
3.4.1 Power Circuit Failure --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-18
3.4.2 Horizontal Oscillation / Deflection Circuit Failure --------------------------------------------------------------- 3-19
3.4.3 Vertical Oscillation / Deflection Circuit Failure ------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-20
3.4.4 HV Circuit Failure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-21
3.4.5 Video Circuit Failure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-22
3.4.6 Static Convergence Compensation Circuit Failure ------------------------------------------------------------- 3-24
3.4.7 Corner Purity Compensation Circuit Failure --------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-25
3.4.8 MPU Operation Error -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-26
3.4.9 Self-Diagnostic Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-27
3-1
3.1 No Raster Generated
Check the LED (Power-On Indicator).
When the LED blinks in ORANGE→Check for “3.4.9 Self-Diagnostic Functions”.
The LED is lit in Check the HS and VS lines. Measure the voltage between Pins 6 (HS)
ORANGE and 5 (VS) of CN103 on the MAIN PWB.
Horizontal period (HS)

Vertical period (VS)
NG Expected failure point

1) CN103, CN212 on VIDEO PWB or FFC cable
2) IC216 on the VIDEO PWB, (HS) (VS) line, or
peripheral circuits
3) Signal cable
No LED is lighting. OK
Expected failure point
The LED is lit in GREEN. IC102, IC105 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
Check the Pin 39 of IC102 in 5V line.
NG
Check the 5.15V line (C971+ electrode on the POWER PWB).
OK The power circuits (See Item 3.4.1)

OK
CN9A1 on the MAIN PWB, cable or peripheral circuits

IC102, IC100 or peripheral circuits
Check high-voltage operation. This judgement should be based on the sound generated when the power
switch is turned on or in terms of electrostatic charges.
NG Check the AFC line. Check Pin 10 of CN601 on the MAIN PWB and Pin 8 of IC701.

Horizontal oscillation/deflection circuits (See Item 3.4.2)
OK
OK
The high-voltage circuits (See Item 3.4.4)
Next page
3-2
CONTINUE
OK
Is the high voltage maintained at approx. 27kV?

1) IC701, Q701 or peripheral circuit
2) T701 (FBT), C726, R720, or peripheral circuit
OK
Check the R/G/B video output. Measure the R/G/B video output at Pins R, G and B of CRT socket.
Normal Normal
35Vp-p 65 to 75Vdc
Video circuit is (See Item 3.4.5) GND

OK
Check the heater voltage. Measure the (heater) voltage at Pin 7 of CN202 on the CRT PWB.

CN202, CRT socket, the CRT or peripheral circuit is
OK
Check the screen voltage. Measure the voltage of CN201 on the CRT PWB.
Usually, the screen voltage is 600 to 800.

T701 (FBT), CRT socket or screen lead
OK

CRT socket or the CRT
3-3
3.2 Abnormal Picture
3.2.1 Raster Brightness Failure
Check the screen voltage. Measure the voltage at CN201 on the CRT PWB.
Usually the screen voltage is 600 to 800V

T701 (FBT), the CRT socket, or screen leads are failure.
OK

The video circuit is failure. (See Item 3.4.5)
3.2.2. Image Color Failure or Contrast Failure
Check the video signal input. Measure the voltage at Pins 1(R), 2(G) and 3(B) of CN215 on the VIDEO PWB.
Usually, the video input signal is maintained at 0.7Vp-p.
NG
OK
Signal cable

The video circuit (See Item 3.4.5)
3-4
3.2.3 Sync Failure
3.2.3.1 Horizontal Sync Unstable
Check the horizontal sync signal. Check the waveform at Pin 36 of IC102 on the MAIN Horizontal
PWB (Approx. 5Vp-p). period
NG Check the horizontal sync signal. Check the (H-SYNC) waveform at Pin 1 of
CN103 on the MAIN PWB. (Approx. 5Vp-p)
Horizontal
period
OK Expected failure point
IC102 on MAIN PWB or peripheral
circuits
NG
Check the horizontal sync signal. Check the (H-SYNC) waveform at Pin 14 of CN212 on the VIDEO
PWB (Approx 5Vp-p)
Horizontal
period

CN103 and FFC cable
NG

Signal cable, IC216 or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the horizontal sync signal or Hsync-out at Pin 38 of IC102.

IC102, IC105, or peripheral circuits
OK

The horizontal oscillation circuit (See Item 3.4.2)
3-5
3.2.3.2 Vertical Sync Unstable
Check the vertical sync signal. Check the (V-SYNC) waveform at Pin 33 of IC102 on the
MAIN PWB. (Approx. 5Vp-p)
NG
Check the vertical sync signal. Check the (V-SYNC) waveform at Pin 5 of CN103
on the MAIN PWB (Approx. 5Vp-p).
Vertical
period
IC102 on MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
NG
Check the vertical sync signal. Check the (V-SYNC) waveform at Pin 15 of CN212 on the VIDEO
PWB. (Approx. 5Vp-p)
Vertical
period

CN103 or FFC cable
NG

Signal cable, IC216, or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the vertical sync. or Vsync-out at Pin 32 of IC100.

Signal cable, IC102, IC105 or peripheral circuits
OK

The vertical oscillation circuit is failure. (See Item 3.4.3)
3-6
3.2.4 Screen Size and Screen Position Failure
3.2.4.1 Horizontal Size Failure
Check the voltage at Pin 9 of IC5C0. Examine the duty factor of the voltage waveform observed at Pin 9 of IC5C0 on the
MAIN PWB and confirm whether it is changed by the adjustment of horizontal size.

IC5C0 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the waveform at the gate of Q5F1. Measure the waveform at the gate of Q5F1 on the MAIN PWB.
(Approx. 10Vp-p)
Horizontal
period

Q5F0, Q5F1, Q550 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
OK

T550 or the horizontal deflection circuit (See Item 3.4.2)
3-7
3.2.4.2 Horizontal Position Failure
(1)Video
Check the H_POSI line. Confirm that the phase of the voltage waveform at Pin 11 of CN601 on the MAIN PWB
changes when the horizontal position is adjusted with OSM.

Q501, Q502, Q503 on the MAIN PWB peripheral circuits
NG

IC601 on the DEFL-SUB PWB or peripheral circuits
(2) Horizontal raster centering (VR5A1) failure
Check the power source voltage for centering. Check voltage between C5A1 and C5A2 on the MAIN PWB. Usually, this
voltage is maintained at 5±1V.

L5A1, VR5A1, Q5A1, Q5A2 on the MAIN PWB, or peripheral circuits
NG

T550, D5A1 or D5A2
3.2.4.3 Vertical Size and Position Failure
Check the +15 and -15V lines. Measure voltage at Pin 1 (-15V) and Pin 6 (+15V) of IC401 on the MAIN PWB.

1) IC401
2) The power circuit, D964 or D965 on the power circuit block
OK
Confirm that the voltage amplitude changes within the range of approx. 2.0 to 3.0 Vp-p
Check the voltage at Pin 15 of CN600.
at Pin 15 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB when the vertical size is control with OSM.
Check the voltage at Pin 16 of CN600.
Confirm that the voltage amplitude changes within the range of approx. 3.3 to 3.7V at
Pin 16 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB when the vertical position control with OSM.

IC401 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
NG

IC601 on the DEFL-SUB PWB, or peripheral circuits
3-8
3.2.5 Linearity Failure
3.2.5.1 Horizontal Linearity Failure
Check the horizontal frequency band selector. Check voltage at Pins 57-64 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB.
Preset Fh CS8 CS7 CS6 CS5 CS4 CS3 CS2 CS1

No. [kHz] Pin 64 Pin 63 Pin 62 Pin 61 Pin 60 Pin 59 Pin 58 Pin 57
Q562 Q561 Q566 Q565 Q568 Q567 Q563 Q564
1 31.5 H L L L L L L L
2 46 L L L H L H L H
3 60 L H L L H L H H
4 69 H L H L L H H H
5 80 L L H H L H H H
6 91 H L H L H H H H
7 93 L H H L H H H H
8 106 H L L H H H H H
9 112 L L H H H H H H
CS switching FET Q561 to Q568 are H: Off, L: ON

OK

●Relation of Character S capacitor changeover
Q561- Q568, C564- C568, C576-C578 or C580 on the MAIN PWB or
peripheral circuits
●Relation of linearity coil control

Q560, L561, IC101 or peripheral circuits
3-9
3.2.5.2 Vertical Linearity Failure
Check how the voltage waveform at Pin 15 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB changes to the
Check Pin 15 of CN600.
shape of Character C when up and down balance control is carried out for OSM linearity.
Check how the voltage waveform at Pin 15 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB changes to the
shape of Character S when vertical balance control is carried out for OSM linearity.

IC601 on the DEFL-SUB or peripheral circuits
OK
Check Pins 3 and 8 of CN601. Check voltage between SW-VLIN1 and SW-VLIN2.
Fv [Hz] V-Lin-SW1 V-Lin-SW2

50 - L L
73 - H L
90 - L H
125 - H H

OK

IC401 on the MAIN PWB, IC601, Q603, Q604, IC603 on the DEFL-SUB PWB or peripheral circuits
3-10
3.2.6 Distortion Compensation Circuit Failure
3.2.6.1 IN/OUT (pincushion), ALIGN (trapezoidal) and TOP/BOTTOM (corner correction) Failure
Check the voltage at Pin 12 of CN600. Check the output waveform at Pin 12 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB.
Confirm that the waveform changes to parabola form when IN/OUT is selected by the OSM.
Confirm that the waveform changes to saw-tooth form when ALIGN is selected by the OSM.

OK IC601 on the DEFL_SUB PWB or peripheral circuits
Check the waveform at Pin 9 of IC5C0. Check the output waveform at Pin 9 of IC5C0 on the MAIN PWB.

IC5C0 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the waveform at the gate of Q5F1. Examine the duty factor of the voltage waveform observed at the gate of Q5F1 on
the MAIN PWB and confirm whether it is changed by the adjustment of OSM.

Q5F0, Q5F1, Q550 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
OK

T550 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits for deflection output
3.2.6.2 LEFT/RIGHT (pincushion balance), TILT (parallelogram), and TOP BALANCE/BOTTOM

BALANCE (corner correction) Failure
Check the voltage at Pin 11 of CN601. Examine the voltage waveform observed at Pin 11 of CN601 on the MAIN
PWB and confirm whether its phase is changed by the adjustment of OSM.

OK

Q501, Q502, Q503, Q504 and T501 on the MAIN PWB, or peripheral circuits
3.2.6.3 ROTATE (raster rotation) Failure

Check voltage at Pin 45 of IC102 of the MAIN PWB. Control the ROTATE with OSM and confirm whether it changes within
the range of 0 to 5V DC at Pin 45 of IC102.

IC102 or peripheral circuits
OK
Control the ROTATE with OSM and confirm whether it changes

Check voltage at Pin 1 of IC804.
within the range of 0 to 15V DC at Pin 1 of IC804.

OK

CN802 or rotation coil
3-11
3.2.7 Focus Failure
Does the focus become optimal in the center of the screen when
the focus VR of the FBT is adjusted?
Measure the high voltage. Usually it is maintained at 27±0.5KV.

NG Check the high voltage (HV).
Check the screen voltage. Measure the screen voltage at CN201 on the CRT PWB. Usually,
it is maintained at 600 to 800V.

T701 (FBT), CRT socket or screen lead
OK

The focus leads; T701, CRT socket or CRT
OK
Check the dynamic focus waveform at R7A2 on the MAIN PWB.

Check the dynamic focus waveform.
Vertical dynamic focus waveform oscillation voltage is approx. 200Vp-p (VGA480).
Horizontal dynamic focus waveform oscillation voltage is approx. 500Vp-p (VGA480).
(Note: The measurement condition should be as follows.
Resist pressure: 1000V
Capacity: 2pF
100:1 probe should be used for the measurement.)

OK
T701 (FBT) or CRT

The horizontal and vertical waveforms are inadequate.
T7A1 is failure.
The horizontal waveform The vertical waveform is inadequate.

is inadequate.
Check voltage waveform at Pin 4 of CN600.

OK
Check the voltage waveform at the base of Q7A1.

IC6A2 or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the voltage waveform at the emitter of Q7A1.

Q7A1, R7A3-R7A6 or D7A1
OK

Next page
T7A1
3-12
CONTINUE
The horizontal waveform is inadequate.
Check the voltage waveform at Pin 6 of CN600.

IC601
OK
Check the voltage waveform at the case of Q7B5.

IC6A2 or peripheral circuits

Q7B1-Q7B5 or T7A1
3-13
3.3 Functional Errors
3.3.1 OSM Failure
Note: See “3.2 Abnormal picture” if a screen is not available even though a video signal input is entered.
Check the OSM signal output. Measure the waveform at Pins 16-19 of IC212 on the VIDEO PWB while the
SELECT button is pressed. (Approx. 5Vp-p)
Horizontal period Horizontal period

Pin 16 Pins 17,18, 19
IC211, R2D0-R2D2 or R2F6 on the VIDEO PWB
NG
Check the horizontal sync input of IC212. Measure the waveform at Pin 5 of IC212 on
the VIDEO PWB. (Approx. 5Vp-p)
Horizontal period
R2D5 on the VIDEO PWB, or AFC line
OK
Check the vertical sync input of IC212. Measure the waveform at Pin 14 of IC212 on
Vertical period
IC6A1, Pin 32 of IC102
OK
Check the OSM control line (I2C). Measure the waveform at Pin 7 and 8 of IC212 on

IC212 on the VIDEO PWB
NG
Check the user control IC on the MAIN PWB. Measure the voltage at Pins 22 and 23 of user control IC102 on the MAIN PWB.

IC102 on the MAIN PWB

SW101-SW107 on the MAIN PWB, R10A-R10G, R10K or R10L
3-14
3.3.2 Power Management Functional Operation Error
First of all, disconnect the signal cables from the signal source.
(If a signal input is removed, the high voltage (HV) falles and the LED turns to ORANGE.)
Check +215V output voltage (between GND and + electrode of C961 on the POWER PWB) and confirm
whether the voltage falls approx. 0V.
The voltage falls.

Check the LED color.
Green Expected failure point

IC102, Q100 of MAIN PWB, Q966，Q967 on the
POWER PWB
Unlit Expected failure point

IC102，Q100， on the MAIN PWB, R110 or
LED101
+215V is maintained.
Check whether the power save function is turned OFF at the OSM.
State of ON setting State of OFF setting
Reset to ON and check +215V output voltage.
+215V is maintained. The voltage falls to approx. 0V.
Check the output voltage at Pins 5 and 42 of IC102. Output from IC102 in power save mode is LOW: Approx. 0V.
(HIGH in the ON mode: Approx. 5V)

HIGH：Approx. 5V
IC102

LOW: Approx.0V
Q962, PC903, Q903, Q902 on the POWER PWB and peripheral circuits
3-15
3.3.3 Plug & Play (DDC2B) Operation Error
Check the SCL line. Check the waveform at Pin 6 of IC218 on the VIDEO PWB.
(Approx. 5Vp-p)
NG
Check the voltage at Pin 11 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB.
OK Approx. 0V Expected failure point

D2C6 on the VIDEO PWB
Approx. 5V
DDC1 communication is maintained.

IC218, D2C6 on the VIDEO PWB or signal cable
3.3.4 Degaussing Functional Operation Error
Check the connections of CN904 on the POWER PWB.
NG
Make checking with CN904 connected.
OK
Check the degaussing control line. Confirm that the potential at Pin 47 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB turns the HIGH
level for about 6 seconds when manual degaussing is carried out with OSM.


The degaussing coil or TH902, RL901, D950, R954
3-16
3.3.5 Key Operation Error
Check voltages with operation keys. Confirm that the voltage at Pin 22 and 23 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB are
as specified in the table below when the operation key is pressed.
Voltage at Pins 22 and 23 of IC102 during key operation
Pin No./Terminal name Pin 23/KEY1 Pin 22/KEY2
EXIT (SW101) ON 5V 3.65V
3 (SW102) ON 3.65V 5V
4 (SW103) ON 5V 1.6V
- (SW104) ON 5V 2.38V
+ (SW105) ON 1.69V 5V
SEL (SW106) ON 5V 0V
RESET (SW107) ON 0V 5V

SW101-SW107, R10A-R10G, R10K, R10L or peripheral circuits
OK
MPU operation error (See Item 3.4.8)
3-17
3.4. Circuit Errors
3.4.1 Power Circuit Failure
Check +5.15V output voltage. Confirm that the voltage is maintained at approx. +5.15V between the C971
+ electrode and GND.
NG Remove the load of +5.15V line and check the output voltage of +5.15V.
OK
OK
Check other circuits.
NG
Confirm the voltage is maintained at approx. +390V between + and -

electrode of C911.
NG The voltage is 2 times as AC input voltage.
OK
Confirm that the voltage is maintained at approx. +18V between + and – electrode of C931.

IC903, D932, PC902, D971, IC922, ZD971
OK
Confirm that the voltage is about approx. +18V at Pin 8 of IC901.

NG IC901and peripheral circuits
Voltage is 0V.
Confirm the voltage at Pin 7 of CN952 is +5V.

F902, D901, Q901, Q901, NG Expected failure point
IC902, IC903, D961, D963 MPU operation (See Item 3.4.8)
OK
D964, D965, D967 or/and D971

Q902, Q903, PC903 or Q962
After checking above parts. After checking above parts.
Disconnect the lead connector of CN951 and confirm the output voltage at +215V, +80V, +15V, +8V and
-15V.
*Notice: When reconnecting, confirm that each power voltage has discharged electricity.
OK Check other circuits on the +215V, +80V,

NG +15V +8V and –15V line.

IC921 and peripheral circuits, PC901, IC902, D961, D963, D964, D965,
D967 or IC923
3-18
3.4.2 Horizontal Oscillation /Deflection Circuit Failure
(Check “3.1 No Raster Generated” and “3.2.3.1 Horizontal Sync Unstable” before this item)
Check the 215V line. Check the voltage at Pin 1 of CN9A0 on the MAIN PWB.
NG Check the 215V line again after jumper in Pin 1 of CN9A0 line has been removed.
*Notice: When reconnecting CN9A0, confirm that Pin 1 has discharged electricity.
OK
NG Q5F0, Q5F1, IC5C0 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits

Switching power circuit (See Item3.4.1)
Check horizontal drive pulse. Measure the drive pulse voltage at the gate of Q504 on the MAIN
PWB, and confirm that there is a rectangular output of 10Vp-p.
OK Measure the drain voltage at Q504 on the MAIN PWB, and

Check the drive pulse.
confirm that there is a rectangular output of 40 Vp-p.
NG NG Expected failure point
OK Q504, D501 on MAIN PWB or peripheral circuit
Check the waveform at the Measure the voltage waveform at the base of Q550 on
base of Q550. the MAIN PWB, and confirm that there is a rectangular
output of about 10Vp-p.

Q550, T501, D502, D550 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
OK
Check the drain waveform at Q5F1. Check the drain voltage waveform of Q5F1 on the MAIN PWB,
and confirm that there is a waveform output as shown below.
Approx.
215V
Horizontal duration
Horizontal period

Q5F0, Q5F1, IC5C0 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
Check the range of horizontal oscillation. Confirm that the voltage waveform of Pin 11 of CN601 on the MAIN
PWB is approx. 1Vp-p.

Q501, Q502, Q503 on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuits
NG

3-19
3.4.3 Vertical Oscillation / Deflection Circuit Failure
(Check “3.2.3.2 Vertical Sync Unstable” before checking of this item)
Check the +15V/-15V line. Check the voltage at Pins 1 and 6 on the MAIN PWB.

Power circuit (See Item 3.4.1)
OK
Check the saw-tooth waveform at Pin 5 of IC401 on the MAIN PWB. (Approx. 3Vp-p)
NG
Check the saw-tooth waveform at Pin 7 of IC401 on the MAIN PWB.

NG
Check the vertical control input. Check the saw-tooth waveform at Pin 15 of CN600 on the MAIN PWB.

OK IC601, IC401 or peripheral circuits

IC401, vertical deflection yoke or peripheral circuits
3-20
3.4.4 High Voltage (HV)Circuit Failure
(Check “3.1 No Raster Generated” before this item)
Check the HV. Check the anode voltage of CRT. Usually, this high voltage is
maintained at about 25kV.
Check the 80V line. Check the voltage at L701 on the MAIN PWB.

1) Q701, T701 (FBT) or peripheral circuits
2) Video circuit (See Item 3.4.5)
OK 3) The switching power circuit (See Item 3.4.1)
Check the 12V line. Check the voltage at Pin 10 of IC701 on the MAIN PWB.

1) IC701 on the MAIN PWB or 12V line
2) The video circuit (See Item 3.4.5)
OK
Check the AFC pulses. Check the voltage at Pin 8 of IC701 on the MAIN PWB.

The horizontal oscillation/ deflection circuits (See Item3.4.2)
OK
Check the HV drive pulses. Check the voltage waveform at the emitter Q702 on the MAIN PWB.

Q701, IC701, T701 (FBT) on the MAIN PWB or peripheral circuit
3-21
3.4.5 Video Circuit Failure
(Check “3.2.2 Image Color Failure or Contrast Failure” before this item)
Check the R, G, B video outputs. Measure the waveforms at R200R, R200G, and
R200B on the CRT PWB in the full white pattern.
NG Measure the voltage between GND and Pin 6 of IC210 on the

Check the 80V line.
VIDEO PWB.

1) CN211, IC210 or peripheral circuits
2) Power circuit (See Item 3.4.1)
OK
OK
Check the output waveform of output IC. Measure the waveform at Pins 1, 3 and 5 of IC210 on the
VIDEO PWB. (Approx. 35Vp-p)

OK
Anyone of R210R/G/B on the VIDEO PWB, L200R/G/B, R200R/G/B
on the CRT PWB or the CRT socket
NG
Check the 12V line Measure the voltage between GND and Pin 2 of CN211.

IC211, IC212 or 12V-regulator circuit of the power circuit
OK
Measure the waveforms at Pins 8, 9 and 11 of

Check the input waveform of the output IC.
IC210 on the VIDEO PWB. (Approx. 2.5Vp-p)

NG
Measure the potential at Pin 1,3 and 6 on the VIDEO

Check the input waveform of the pre-AMP.
PWB. (Approx. 0.7Vp-p)

OK
Measure the waveform at Pin 14 of IC211 on the

Check the blanking signal.
VIDEO PWB. Confirm that the blanking waveform is
maintained at approx. 5Vp-p.

OK IC601 on the DEFL_SUB PWB or CN212
Measure the potential at Pin 13 of IC211 on the

Check the clamp waveform. VIDEO PWB, and confirm that clamp waveform is
maintained at approx. 5Vp-p.

OK IC102 on the MAIN PWB, or CN212
To CONTINUE 1 To CONTINUE 2
on the Next page on the Next page
3-22
CONTINUE 1 CONTINUE 2
Check the output waveform of pre-AMP. Measure the waveform at R/G/B output Pins 25, 27
and 29 of IC211 on the VIDEO PWB.

OK
L211R/G/B, R211R/G/B
BLACK LEVEL
Check the R, G, B video outputs. Measure the voltage waveform at R200R/G/B on the CRT PWB,
and confirm whether BLACK LEVEL voltage is maintained at
approx. 60-90V.
NG
Check the 215V line. Measure the voltage between GND and + electrode of C260.
OK
CN211 or 215V line of power circuit
OK
Check the voltage of C210R/G/B on the VIDEO PWB. Confirm the voltage is approx. 60-100V.
NG
Confirm the voltage at the base of R250R/G/B is approx. 6V.

OK OK R261, D264, R260 or peripheral circuits
Expected failure point Expected failure point

L200R/G/B or L201R/G/B Q250R/G/B or Q251R/G/B
Check the HV operation. Confirm whether the HV is 27±0.5KV.

The HV circuit (See Item 3.4.4)
OK
Check the heater voltage. Measure the voltage at both terminals of C203H on the CRT PWB.
Usually, the voltage is approx. 6.3V.

1) CN211
OK 2) The switching power circuit (See Item 3.4.1)
Check the screen control of FBT. Confirm the voltage of R205S on the CRT PWB is approx. 600-800V.
NG (too low) Expected failure point

T701 on the MAIN PWB or CRT socket on the CRT PWB

CRT
3-23
3.4.6 Static Convergence Compensation Circuit Failure
OK
Adjust the static convergence by OSM control. Good
NG
Confirm that the voltage (DC level) at Pins 3 (H-STA) and 4 (V-STA) of IC8A1 on the MAIN PWB
is variable within the range of 0 to 5V by OSM control.

IC6A2 or IC6A3
OK
(H-STA) Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 1 of IC8A1 is variable by OSM control.
(V-STA) Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 6 of IC8A1 is variable by OSM control.

IC8A1，R8A2 or R8B7
OK

(H-STA) The horizontal static convergence coil of Pins 1 and 2 of CN8A1
(V-STA) The vertical static convergence coil at Pins 3 and 4 of CN8A1
Replace the DY (deflection yoke) if the horizontal or vertical static convergence coil has been
found to be failure.
3-24
3.4.7 Corner Purity Compensation Circuit Failure
Adjust the corner purity by OSM control.

OK
Good
NG
Confirm that the voltage at Pins 49 (TR), 50 (TL), 51 (BR) and 52 (BL)
of IC102 on the MAIN PWB are variable by OSM control.

IC102
OK
(TR): Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 8 of IC803 is variable by OSM control.
(TL): Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 2 of IC803 is variable by OSM control.
(BR): Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 8 of IC801 is variable by OSM control.
(TL): Confirm that the output voltage at Pin 2 of IC801 is variable by OSM control.

IC801 or IC803
OK
1) (TR): The corner purity coil of Pin 2 of CN801

2) (TL): The corner purity coil of Pin 4 of CN801
3) (BR): The corner purity coil of Pin 6 of CN801
4) (BL): The corner purity coil of Pin 8 of CN801
3-25
3.4.8 MPU Operation Error
Check the 5V line. Check the voltage at Pin 3 of IC100 on the MAIN PWB.

The power circuit (See Item 3.4.1)
OK
Check the reset voltage. Confirm that the voltage at Pin 12 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB is
maintained at approx. 5V.

IC100 on the MAIN PWB or C100
OK
Check the waveform at Pins 17 and 18 on the MAIN PWB. Confirm that a sinusoidal waveform of approx. 3
to 5Vp-p is generated at a frequency of 20MHz.

X100 on the MAIN PWB or IC102
OK
Check the sync. signal. Confirm that there are horizontal sync (5Vp-p) input to Pin 36 and
vertical sync. (5Vp-p) input to Pin 33 of IC102 on the MAIN PWB.

Check sync. failure. (See Item 3.2.3)
OK

3-26
3.4.9 Self-Diagnostic Functions
This model is provided with the functions that a circuit error is detected by the MPU and this error is indicated by
the LED blink frequency.
When the protector is in operation, the LED is made to blink as shown below in order to indicate the factor of
protector operation.
LED Blinking Patterns for Each Protector Operation (List of Protector Indicators)
LED condition
Protector condition
Short (0.5s) lighting frequency Long (2s) lighting frequency
HV data error 3 1
HV latch (fall) 2 1
Beam protector 5 1
Secondary power short 7
X-lay protector 1 1
(1) How to count the LED lighting frequency [Example: HV data error (3 times)]
Lit
Unlit
2 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
Once Twice 3 times
(Frequency: Lighting 3 times)
(2) Diagnostic mode and error circuit

3 times --- HV data error ------------------------- Power OFF/ON and data recovery
(HV adjustment value is destroyed or IC104 is failure).
2 times --- HV latch (falls) ----------------------- Check Item 3.4.4
5 times --- Beam protector ---------------------- Check Item 3.4.4
6 times --- Secondary power short ------------ Check Item 3.4.1
3-27
4. Wave form
1. POWER
2. CONTROL (MAIN)
3. DEFL (MAIN)
4. DEFL-SUB & COIL-DRIVE (MAIN)
5. VIDEO
※3 Q901(D)
※2 IC901(7)/Q901(G)
(Vpp=16V) (Vpp=376V) ※4 IC902(3)/T901(2)
(Vpp=688V)
392V
16V
720V
16V
32V
12V
（DEGAUSS動作時､5V）
全波整流
390V
※1
※3
0V
※1 D901(1)
(Vpp=290V) 16V ※4
318V ※2
0V
16V
15V 12V
※5 6V
※5 IC903(3)/T902(3)
(Vpp=444V)
472V
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
28V POWER
※5 IC102(45) IC102(46)/(49)∼(52)も同じ波形
(Vpp=5V)
5V
※6 IC102(55)
ROTATION動作にて帯域幅変化 (Vpp=5V)
5V
※IC102(57：CS1)∼(64：CS8)
の出力電圧
"1"→0V
"0"→5V
詳細は添付資料"CS切替表"参照
5V BRIGHT動作にて帯域幅変化
5V
5V
0V
5V
5V
4.5V
5V
※10
※6
5V
5V
（DEGAUSS動作時､5V）
5V
5V
0V
5V
0V ※5
5V
5V （P-SAVE動作時､0V）
5V
3V ※9
2.8V ※8
4.4V 5V
（ABL可変で"1.2∼4.8V"変動） ※4
0V ※7
0V ※3
5V
5V
※1 ※2
IC102(22)/(23)→SW動作にて電圧変化
詳細は下記"SW割り当て"参照
※1 IC102(32) ※2 IC102(33) ※3 I C 1 0 2 ( 3 6 ) ※4 I C 1 0 2 ( 3 8 ) ※7 IC102(37) ※8 IC102(40) ※9 IC102(41) ※10 IC102(56)

IC102(22：KEY1)/(23：KEY2)の各SWの割り当て
(Vpp=5V)
(Vpp=5V)
(Vpp=5V)
0.8V (Vpp=5V) FE2111SB/RDF223H
(Vpp=5V) (Vpp=5V)
KEY1→SW103(3.7V) KEY2→SW102(3.7V) 5V 5V 5V (Vpp=1.02V) 5V 5V (Vpp=5V) 5V SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
→SW103(1.3V) →SW105(1.7V) 5V
→SW104(2.6V) →SW107(0V) MAIN (CONTROL)
→SW106(0V)
-0.22V
Q550(C)
H-SIZE可変で振幅変化
(00)→
IC401(2) 832/0V(Vpp=832V)
V-SIZE可変で振幅変化 (FF)→
(00)→36/-6.4V(Vpp=42.4V) ※3 1.2/0KV(Vpp=1.2KV)
(FF)→43/-10V(Vpp=53V)
※2
※1
-15V
※4
215V
215V
Q561∼Q568(G)
CS ON(1) →0V
CS OFF(0)→15V
※詳細は添付資料"CS切替表"参照
※6 ※5
※11 T 7 0 1 ( 1 )
※11
(Vpp=284V)
286V
2V
※12
※12 T 7 0 1 ( 6 )
※8 0V
※13
(Vpp=38V)
25V
-13V
※7
T7A1(3)
H-AMP可変で振幅変化
(00)→1.58/-
1.28V(Vpp=32V) ABL動作で"1.2∼5V"変動
(FF)→44/-24V(Vpp=684V) SBM時は電圧上がる
※9
※10 ※6 I C 5 C 0 ( 9 )
(Vpp=9.7V)
10V
T7A1(8)/Q7A1(C)
H-AMP可変で振幅変化
(00)→84/78V(Vpp=6V)
(FF)→110/34V(Vpp=76V)
V-AMP可変で振幅変化 0.3V
(01)→107/44V(Vpp=63V)
(7F)→324/254V(Vpp=70V)
H-SIZE可変で帯域幅変化
(+)で縮まる
(-)で広がる
※4 Q5F1(D)/T550(5)
※13 T701 (12)
(Vpp=214V) ※10 T7A1(8)/Q7A1(C)
214V
※5 IC5C0(8) ※7 IC701(8) ※ 8 Q701(G) ※ 9 T7A1(3)
※1 I C 4 0 1 ( 2 ) ※2 Q504(D)/T501(4) ※3 Q550(C)/T550(8)
(Vpp=1.5V)
(Vpp=5.4V) (Vpp=11.2V) (Vpp=58V)
(Vpp=40V) 4.4V
46V (Vpp=56V)
24V 1.1KV
(Vpp=1.1KV)
2.3V
36V
FE2111SB/RDF223H
10.4V
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MAIN (DEFL)
-0.8V
-16V
-10V H-SIZE可変で帯域幅変化 0.8V

(+)で広がる -22V
(-)で縮まる
-1V
※1 I C 6 A 2 ( 1 )
※2 IC6A2(2)/(3) ※3IC6A2(5)/(6)
※ 4 IC6A2(7)
(Vpp=4.2V) (Vpp=0.6V) (Vpp=0.35V)
6.3V (Vpp=6.3V)
6.4V ※12 IC8A1(1)
1.6V
(Vpp=5.7V)
1.65V
2.4V
1V 1.3V
2.2V
※12
V-AMP可変で電圧変化
H-AMP可変で電圧変化
※5 IC6A1(10)/CN601(10) V-SIZE可変で電圧変化
-3.3V
00→1.6/1.3V(Vpp=0.3V)
(Vpp=5.4V) FF→1.6/0.9V(Vpp=0.7)
※13
5.4V
※6 IC6A1(11)/IC6A1(12)
※13 IC8A1(6)
(Vpp=5V) (Vpp=5.2V)
2.8V
5V
5V
-2.4V
(P-SAVE動作時､0V) V-SIZE可変で電圧変化
P-OFF
00→1.9/1.2V(Vpp=0.7V)
FF→2.2/0.9V(Vpp=1.3V)
※1 ※2 ※3 ※4
※ 1 0 CN601(1) ※11 CN600(15)
※ 9 CN600(1)
(Vpp=5.6V) (Vpp=1V)
(Vpp=3.4V)
4.8V
2.1V
3.4V
IC801①/②
CP-BL可変及び自動補正
にて電圧変動(-14∼+14V) -0.8V 1.1V
(+)側電圧上昇
(-)側電圧下降
V-SIZE可変で帯域幅変化
(+)で広がる
※7 IC6A1(13)
(-)で縮まる
IC801⑧/⑨
(Vpp=6V)
CP-BR可変及び自動補正
にて電圧変動(-14∼+14V) 5.2V
(+)側電圧下降
※7
(-)側電圧上昇
※6
V-CONV可変で
電圧変化
（1.4V∼1.7v）
※5
-0.8V
IC803①/②
※9
CP-TL可変及び自動補正
※10 にて電圧変動(-14∼+14V)
(+)側電圧上昇
1.8V (-)側電圧下降
5V
IC803⑧/⑨
CP-TR可変及び自動補正
にて電圧変動(-14∼+14V)
(+)側電圧上昇
(-)側電圧下降
H-CONV可変で
※8 電圧変化
※ 8 CN601(11) (1.4V∼1.8v)
(Vpp=3.4V)
3.4V IC804①/②
※11
ROTATION可変にて電圧変動
(-14∼+14V)
(+)側電圧下降
(-)側電圧上昇
5V
IC804⑧/⑨
V-CANCEL可変にて電圧変動
(-14∼+14V)
(+)側電圧下降
(-)側電圧上昇
（H/V-SIZE可変で電圧変化）
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MAIN (DEFL-SUB&COIL-DRIVE)
IC211
GAI
Black Level:1.2V
GAI
GND SUPER BRIGHT MODE OFF :2.6Vp-p(typ)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON:3.2Vp-p(typ)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON:3.2Vp-p(typ)
IC210
GAIN
DAC (R/G/B-BIAS) SUPER BRIGHT MODE OFF :36Vp-p(typ)
Voltage Range:1.5V - 5.5V SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON:44Vp-p(typ)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON:44Vp-p(typ)
Black Level:67V
GAI
GND
CN210
DAC
Voltage Range:0V - 5V
Voltage Range:0V - 5V BTCN(BRIGHTNESS

CENTER)
R/G/B-BIAS
Black Level
GND
No Voltage Description Resistor:1/8W CHIP R/G/B-BIAS

Black Level Voltage Range:Approx. 58V - 83V
BTCN(BRIGHTNESS CENTER)
Not used:( ) Black Level Voltage Range:Approx. 53V - 86V
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
VIDEO
5. Schematic diagram
1. POWER
2. CONTROL (MAIN)
3. DEFL (MAIN)
4. DEFL-SUB & COIL-DRIVE (MAIN)
5. DEFL-SUB
6. VIDEO
7. CRT
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
POWER
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MAIN (CONTROL)
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MAIN (DEFL)
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
MAIN (DEFL-SUB&COIL-DRIVE)
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
DEFL-SUB
CN210 (#1,#3,#5)
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
VIDEO
FE2111SB/RDF223H
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CRT
6. Removal Instruction Sheet of Bezel and Back cover
1. Introduction
Please prepare jig for removal.
• Please use as a jig what turned up about 20~30 mm
of tapes for crack prevention and stuck them on the
tip of a steel board with approx. a thickness of 0.5~
0.8 mm a width of 15mm, and a length of 150 mm.
(As the example, we used ruler made from steel as
shown in photograph.)
2. Structure Details of Bezel and Back Cover

"a" Bezel
"a"
"a"
"a"
"a"
Back Cover
hook <3 places>

"a"
Double sided tape
"a"
<2 places>
"a"
"b"
"a"
"a"
"a"
"b"
"a"
Insertion hole for hook

<left and right 2 places>
hook <"b" 2 places>
Insertion pin <"a" 12 places>

Screw
6-1
3. Removal Instruction for Bezel
(1) A jig is inserted in the center of the Bezel upper part, and it pushes out.
(2) The insertion pin of the four upper parts and two double-sided tapes are removed pulling the
upper part of Bezel slowly.
Double sided tape
Insertion pin
(3) Two insertion pin right and left each of a side part, and lower four insertion pins and two
hooks are also pulled slowly, and removed Bezel.
Insertion pin hook
6-2
4. Removal Instruction for Back Cover
(1) The screws of the two places of the lower parts of the Back Cover are removed.
(2) Two hooks of the front lower part of Back Cover is pressed down, and the lower part of Back
Cover is removed.
A
The A section is pushed pressing down

hook of this portion.
(Right and left are simultaneously)
Hook
(3) Hooks are removed by considering the penetration hole (three places) of the front upper part
of Back Cover as a mark, inserting a jig from the direction of an end. and pushing in a jig
downward.
Penetration hole
Penetration hole
<3 places>
Screw
6-3
(4) If one hook part place of an end is removed, the others are depressed with a jig to remove
hooks simultaneously and also Back Cover is pulled back to remove.
6-4
OUTER-BEZEL
INNER-BEZEL
HOLDER-TOP
INSULATOR-TOP
SHIELD-TOP
CRT
EMS-TB
EMS-S
FE2111SB
SHIELD-LEFT
Exploded view
COIL-SET
EMS-S
EMS-TB
BACK-COVER-UNIT
PLATE-SHIELDING
(REAR)
PWB-MAIN
PWB-CRT
PWB-POWER
PLATE-SHIELDING
PLATE-SHIELDING (CONNECTOR)
BRACKET (POWER) (POWER)
CHASSIS-BASE
PWB-VIDEO
NOISE-FILTER
TILT-STAND-UNIT PLATE-SHIELDING
(VIDEO)
REAR-PANEL
FE2111SB
PACKING-BAG Packing view
AC-POWER-CODE
SIGNAL-CABLE
CUSHION
CUSHION ACCESSORY
FRONT
CUSHION
CUSHION
CARTON-TAPE
PACKING-CASE
FRONT
FRONT
SERIAL NUMBER INFORMATION
Refer to the serial number information shown below.
Ex.) Rating label
Model name: FE2111SB/FE2111SB-BK

Model NO.: C22BW701
Serial No. Manufactured

********
201000001
Manufactured Year: 0 to 9
(Last digit)
Manufactured Month: 01 to 12
Control Code: 0 to 9 or A to Z
(It is possible to use fixed no. for same destination
if model name is same.)
Running No.: 00001 to 99999

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
55cm/51cmV (22"/20"V) HIGH RESOLUTION

DIGITAL CONTROL AUTO-TRACKING
COLOR DISPLAY MONITOR
MODEL NAME : MultiSync FE2111SB

MultiSync FE2111SB-BK
MODEL NUMBER: C22BW701
DATE: June 26, 2002
NEC-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VISUAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION
DOCUMENT No VSP-C483
1/
REVISE
2/ VSP-C0483
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Foreword
1.1 General Description (Quick Reference)
1.2 Regulations
2. CRT Specifications
3. Electric Specifications
3.1 Deflections
3.2 Signal Input
3.3 Video performance
3.4 Power Supply
3.5 Power Saving
3.6 Degaussing
4. Functions
4.1 Front Controls
4.2 OSD (On Screen Display) Functions
4.3 Back Panel
4.4 Connector Pin Assignment
4.5 DDC (Display Data Channel) Functions
4.6 Preset Timing
5. Display Quality
5.1 Test Conditions
5.2 Display size
5.3 Luminance
5.4 Color
5.5 Distortion
5.6 Linearity
5.7 Misconvergence
5.8 Focus
5.9 Raster Regulation
6. Mechanical Specifications
6.1 Cabinet, Tilt / Swivel Base
6.2 Rating Label
6.3 Carton Box
6.4 Weight
6.5 Accessories
3/ VSP-C0483
7. Environmental Conditions
7.1 Temperature, Relative Humidity
7.2 Vibration Test (with carton box)
7.3 Drop Test (with carton box)
Appendix 1 Preset Timing Chart

Appendix 2 EDID data for VESA DDC
Fig.1 Outline
Fig.2 Bezel Logo
Fig.3-1 Rating Label (US/EU)
Fig.3-2 Rating Label (China)
Fig.4 Carton Box
Fig.5-1 Printing Specification of Carton Box(US:White)
Fig.5-2 Printing Specification of Carton Box(US:Black)
Fig.5-3 Printing Specification of Carton Box(EU:White)
Fig.5-4 Printing Specification of Carton Box(China)
Fig.6 Packing Style
Fig.7-1 AC Power Cord (for North America)
Fig.7-2 AC Power Cord (for EU)
Fig.7-3 AC Power Cord (for China)
Fig.8 Signal Cable (SC - B110)
*Design and specifications are subject to change without any notice
4/ VSP-C0483
1. Foreword
1.1 General Description(Quick Reference)
NO TYPE NMVISUAL STANDARD REMARKS
Size 55cm / 51cmV ( 22" / 20"V) Diamondtron U2
Grill Spacing(PhosphorSpacing) 0.24mm (0.25mm) Aperture Grille
Phosphor Type B22 (EBU)
1 CRT
Face-plate G-WARAS
Electron Gun Type U-NX-DBF
Face-plate Transmission 38.4 %(Including face-plate coating)
Horizontal Freq. 30k - 115kHz
2 SCANNING
Vertical Freq. 50 - 160Hz
Analog 0.7Vp-p
Video Sync. Composite Sync. TTL Nega
3 SIGNAL INPUT Separate Sync. TTL Posi / Nega
Termination Video 75 ohm to Ground
(Impedance) Sync. 2.2k ohm to Ground
4 VIDEO Maximum supported pixel clock 300MHz
Display Resolution 1920x1440@76Hz(Maximum Resolution) Addressable
1600x1200@85Hz(Recommended Resolution)
Display size Horizontal 396mm
Vertical 297mm
SCREEN
Misconvergence Center: 0.25 mm, Corner: 0.35 mm
5 CHARACTERISTICS
100cd/m2 at 9300K
Brightness (Full White)
(Back Raster Luminance: Approx. 0.3cd/m2)
SB Mode Super Bright Mode1: Picture (With Gamma)
(Super Bright Mode) Super Bright Mode 2 : Movie (With Gamma
And Sharpness)
Power Button, EXIT Button, Control Select
Buttons, Control Buttons (Function Adjust),
Select Button (Sub: SB Mode), Reset Button
Brightness, Contrast, Degauss,
Constant Brightness, Auto adjust, Left/Right,
Down/Up, Narrow/Wide, Short/Tall,
Color Control, In/Out, Left/Right, Tilt, Align,
CONTROL Rotate, Corner Correction (Top, Top-Balance,
6
(User Controls) Bottom, Bottom -Balance), Moire Canceller,
Front OSD Convergence (Horizontal, Vertical),
Linearity (Vertical, Vertical-Balance),
Global sync (Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Right), Language, Osm Position,
Osm Turn Off, Osm lock Out, IPM, Edge Lock,
Hot key, Factory preset, Display Mode,
Monitor Info, Refresh Notifier
Power Input 3P IEC Plug Auto-select
7 CONNECTOR
Signal Input Dsub-15P
Operating range AC100 - 120V / 220 - 240V, 50 / 60 Hz
8 POWER SUPPLY 125W 1.25A@100-120VAC 0.6A@220-240VAC
Power consumption (typical.)
Power Save: <=2W
ENVIRONMENTAL Operating temperature 5 - 35degrees C
9
CONDITION Relative humidity 10 - 90% (without condensation)
10 WEIGHT Approx. 29.6kg (65.3Ibs)
11 CABINET With Tilt / Swivel stand NM Visual standard
Safety UL / C-UL, TÜV-GS, CCC (For only china model), GOST-R
FCC-B, DOC-B, EN55022-B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
EMC
EN61000-3-3, VCCI-B, CCC (For only China model), GOST-R
X – Ray DHHS, RöV, HWC
12 REGULATION
VLF / ELF MPR-II, MPR-III, TCO’91
Power Management Energy Star, GEEA LABEL
Ergonomics TÜV-GS, TÜV-Ergo
Miscellaneous TCO’99, TCO’95, CE Marking, JPHG
Plug & Play DDC2B
Digital Dynamic Convergence
13 OTHERS
Communication Asset Management
Others DDC/CI
5/ VSP-C0483
1.2 Regulations
REGULATIONS
MODEL NAME Power
SAFETY EMC X-RAY ELF/VLF Ergonomics Miscellaneous
Management
UL FCC-B DHHS MPR-II Energy Star TÜV-GS TCO'99
C-UL DOC-B HWC MPR-III GEEA LABEL TÜV-Ergo (FE2111SB)
TÜV-GS EN55022-B RöV TCO’91
CCC EN55024 TCO'95
FE2111SB GOST-R EN61000-3-2 (FE2111SB-BK)
/ FE2111SB-BK EN61000-3-3
(C22BW701) VCCI–B CE Marking
JPHG JPHG
CCC
GOST-R
UL UL1950 3rd Edition

C-UL CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO.950: 1995
TÜV-GS EN60950: 1992 & AD1/AD2/AD3/AD4/AD11 & EK1-ITB 2000
FCC 47 CFR Part15 Subpart B, Class B
DOC Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003 Issue 3, Class B
DHHS 21CFR Chapter I Subchapter J
HWC Radiation Emitting Devices Regulations Chapter 1370
RöV RöV Vom 8.1. 1987
MPR-II MPR 1990:8
MPR-III prEN 50279
TCO'99 TCO'99 Certification
Requirements for environmental labeling of personal computers
TCO'95 TCO'95 Certification
Requirements for environmental labeling of personal computers
CE-Marking EN60950: 1992 & AD1/AD2/AD3/AD4/AD11
EN55022: 1998 Class B
EN55024: 1998
EN61000-3-2: 1995 & AD1/AD2
EN61000-3-3: 1995
Energy Star International Energy Star office Equipment Program
VCCI Guide to membership of Voluntary Control Council for Interference
By data Processing Equipment and Electronic Office Machines, Class B.
JPHG (Japan Power Harmonics Guidelines)
Guidelines for the suppression of Harmonics in Appliances and General - Use
Equipment
GEEA LABEL Award Criteria for the Energy Label: 2002
TÜV-Ergo prEN 50279
ISO 9241-3:1992
ISO 9241-7:1998
ISO 9241-8:1997
CCC (For only China model)
China Compulsory Certification
GB4943-1995
GB9254-1998
GOST-R Russian Safety Certification
6/ VSP-C0483
2. CRT Specifications
CRT model no. M51LVT42X
Type Diamondtron U2 (Aperture Grille)
55cm / 51cm Diagonal View able Image
Size
(22" /20" Diagonal View able Image)
Grille Spacing 0.24mm
Phosphor Spacing 0.25mm
Deflection Angle 90 degree
Phosphor Type B22 (Medium short persistence)
Electron Gun Type U-NX- DBF
Face-plate Transmission Approx. 38.4% (Include Face-plate coating)
G-WARAS Coating
Face-plate
(Anti-reflection, Anti-glare and Anti-static)
Screen Phosphor Area 406.1 x 304.6 mm
Face-plate Curvature H: R= 50000 mm, V: R= 80000 mm
R: X=0.627,Y=0.341
Phosphor Color
G: X=0.292,Y=0.605 (Typical)
Coordinate
B: X=0.149,Y=0.072
7/ VSP-C0483
3. Electric Specifications
3.1Deflections
Scanning Frequency 30 - 115kHz
Back Porch >=1.1 µsec
Horizontal
Blanking >= 2.0 µsec
H-sync Width >= 0.6 µsec
Scanning frequency 50 - 160Hz
V-sync + V-back Porch >= 400 µsec
Vertical V-sync Width 3H <= Vs <= 10H---over 50kHz (fh)
2H <= Vs <= 10H---up to 50kHz (fh)
V-Total Line >= 256H + V-sync Width
(*) Full screen adjustment may not be available for the timing which
Tdh / Th < 72% - Over 100kHz (fh)
Tdh / Th < 74% - Up to 100kHz (fh)
Tdh: Horizontal Display Time
Th: Horizontal Scanning Time
3.2 Signal Input

Video Input Signal R.G.B analog
External composite sync. , Negative TTL
Sync. Input Signal
External HD/VD separate sync. TTL (N or P)
Video Input Impedance 75ohm to ground
Sync. Input Impedance 2.2kohm to ground
Video signal: 0.7V p-p + 10% / - 5%
Signal Level
Separate H/V-sync. : TTL level (>2.5Vp-p)
3.3 Video Performance

Maximum supported pixel clock 300MHz
Pulse Rise and Fall time 5.5nsec(typical.) 10 to 90% at 35Vp-p
*The rise and fall time of the input video signal is 2.0nsec or less.
*The pulse rise or fall time is determined using the formula
Ta = Tm2 - (Ts2 + Tp2 + Tsc2)
Where: Ta = Amplifier rise / fall time

Tm = Measured rise / fall time
Ts = Input signal rise / fall time
Tp = Probe effect on rise / fall time = 2.2 x Rl x Cp
Rl = Amplifier output resistance (ohm)
Cp = Total probe capacitance (F)
Tsc = Scope rise / fall time = 0.35 / Scope bandwidth (MHz)
8/ VSP-C0483
3.4 Power Supply
Input Voltage 100 - 120 / 220 - 240 VAC +/- 10%
Frequency 50/60Hz +/- 3Hz
Power Consumption (typical.) 125W 1.25A@100-120VAC 0.6A@220-240VAC
AC leakage current <= 3.5mA

Inrush current <=70A 0-peak at 240VAC on cold starting
3.5 Power Saving

Power Recovery LED
H-sync V-sync Video
Consumption Time Indicator
Power Saving OFF On On Active 125W Green
Off On Blank
Power Saving ON On Off Blank <= 2W Approx.5 sec Orange
Off Off Blank
3.6 Degaussing
Auto Degaussing The monitor have an automatic degaussing function which activates
when the unit is turned on.
Manual Degaussing This activates degaussing at the user's discretion after the unit is
Operating
*The Monitor requires minimum 15 minutes after last degauss operation for full
degauss capability
9/ VSP-C0483
4.Functions
4.1 Front Controls
a: POWER SWITCH
b: POWER-ON INDICATOR
c: EXIT BUTTON
d: CONTROL (ITEM) SELECT BUTTONS
e: CONTROL (FUNCTION ADJUST) BUTTONS
f: SELECT (SB MODE) BUTTON
g: RESET BUTTON
4.2 OSD (On Screen Display) Function

OSD1 Group Default Ver. BAR Adjusted
BRIGHTNESS BAR 30.10% Linearity VERTICAL
BAR Adjusted
CONTRAST BAR 100.00% BALANCE
DEGAUSS SELECT - TOP LEFT BAR Adjusted
CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS SELECT - TOP RIGHT BAR Adjusted
Default GLOBAL BOTTOM
OSD2 Group SYNC LEFT BAR Adjusted
AUTO ADJUST SELECT - BOTTOM BAR Adjusted
LEFT / RIGHT BAR Adjusted RIGHT
DOWN / UP BAR Adjusted OSD6 Group Default
NARROW / WIDE BAR Adjusted ENG/DEU
SHORT / TALL BAR Adjusted LANGUAGE FRA/ESP ENG
OSD3 Group Default ITA/JPN
1:9300K CENTER
2:8200K TOP LEFT
COLOR CONTROL 3:7500K 1:9300K OSM POSITION TOP RIGHT CENTER
sRGB BOTTOM LEFT
5:5000K BOTTOM RIGHT
COLOR TEMPERATURE 5000K - 9300K 9300K 5-120 45
OSM TURN OFF
R/G/B GAIN CONTROL BAR Adjusted SECONDS SECONDS
OSD4 Group Default OSM LOCK OUT - -
IN / OUT BAR Adjusted 1:ENABLE
IPM OFF MODE 1:ENABLE
LEFT / RIGHT BAR Adjusted 2:DISABLE
ALIGN BAR Adjusted 1:FRONT
EDGE LOCK 2:BACK
TILT BAR Adjusted 2:BACK
ROTATE BAR Adjusted 1:ON
HOT KEY 2:OFF
TOP BAR Adjusted 2:OFF
TOP- FACTORY PRESET PRESS + -
BAR Adjusted
Corner BALANCE OSD7 Group Default
Correction BOTTOM BAR Adjusted Preset Information
BTM- Horizontal Frequency
BAR Adjusted DISPLAY MODE
BALANCE Vertical Frequency
OSD5 Group Default POLARITY
MOIRE CANCELER BAR 0.00% Model
INFORMATION
Hor. BAR Adjusted Serial Number
Convergence
Ver. BAR Adjusted REFRESH NOTIFIER ON/OFF OFF
10 / VSP-C0483
4.3 Back Panel
a : AC POWER CONNECTOR (3P IEC Plug)
b : SIGNAL INPUT CONNECTOR (Dsub-15P)
4.4 Connector Pin Assignment

1) Signal Input Connector (Dsub-15P)
Pin Signal
1 Red-video
2 Green-video
3 Blue-video
4 Gnd
5 DDC Gnd
5 1
6 Red Gnd
7 Green Gnd
8 Blue Gnd 10 8
9 +5VDC(from Computer)
15 11
10 Sync Gnd
11 Gnd
12 Serial data
13 H-sync or Composite sync Rear Panel
14 V-sync (V-clock)
15 Serial clock
4.5 DDC (Display Data Channel) Functions

VESA DDC2B.
See Appendix2 for EDID data.
VESA DDC/CI
4.6 Preset Timing

Factory-preset: 9 see Appendix 1 for detail timing parameters.
User-preset: 16
Preset Timing Discrimination

Horizontal Frequency >=1kHz
Vertical Frequency >=1Hz
Sync Signal Polarity H or V-sync signal polarity is different.
*The monitor is able to discriminate input signals

by at least one of above parameters
11 / VSP-C0483
5. Display Quality
5.1 Test Conditions
AC Voltage 120VAC 60Hz or 230VAC 50Hz
Video Signal 1600 x 1200 (106kHz, 85Hz) 0.7Vp-p
Warm Up More than 30 min. with full white picture
Temperature 20 - 25 degree C
Relative Humidity 40 - 80%
Magnetic Field BH=0, BV=0.040mT
Contrast maximum and Brightness center position
Contrast & Brightness
(Back Raster Luminance: Approx. 0.3cd/m2)
Color Temperature Color-1: 9300K + 8 M.P.C.D.
Display Size 396 x 297mm
Ambient light 200 +/- 50 lx
Luminance Meter Minolta CA100 or Equivalent
*Unless specified, the monitor is set at the factory default setting.
5.2 Display size

All preset timing Width: 396mm, Height: 297mm
5.3 Luminance
Full White: >=100cd/m2 (at Color No.1)
(Brightness center position)
Window: 80x80mm (at Color No.1)
Luminance at CRT center (Brightness: Factory default setting)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE OFF: 100cd/m2 (Typical)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 ON: 150cd/m2 (Typical)
SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2 ON: 170cd/m2 (Typical)
Luminance Variation Delta Luminance / Center Luminance: <=20%
Approx. 0.3 cd/m2 (Brightness center position)
Back Raster Luminance Approx. 0 cd/m2 (Factory default setting)
Raster must not visible at minimum Brightness control
5.4 Color
Color-1: 9300K + 8 M.P.C.D.
X=0.283 +/-0.015
Y=0.297 +/-0.015
Color-2: 8200K
(X=0.290, Y=0.313)
Color-3: 7500K
Color Temperature
(X=0.300, Y=0.315)
sRGB: 6500K (Luminance: 80 +20/-10 cd/m2)
(X=0.313, Y=0.329)
Color-5: 5000K + 8 M.P.C.D.
X=0.345 +/- 0.015
Y=0.359 +/- 0.015
<= 0.015: in either the X or Y shift
White Uniformity
between the center and peripheral area
Contrast Control: +/-0.020 from 25cd/m2 to Maximum
Color Tracking
at center Brightness position
12 / VSP-C0483
5.5 Distortion
Distortion
H: <= 2.5mm, V: <= 2.5mm
Except rotation and centering
*With Green-Crosshatch applied.

*The overall distortion is defined as the total of all image distortion
excluding rotation and display centering.
<=2.5 mm
Picture
<=2.5mm
<=2.5mm <=2.5mm
5.6 Linearity
H: <=15%(30-40k), <=12%(40-60k), <=10%(60-115k) adjacent: <= 7%
Linearity
V: <=10% adjacent: <= 7%
*At preset timings
*With Green-Crosshatch (17 lines horizontally by 13 lines vertically) applied.
*The formula used to calculate linearity is
Xmax – Xmin Ymax – Ymin

×100% ×100%
(Xmax + Xmin)/2 (Ymax + Ymin)/2
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16
Y1
X1=X2=X3= --- =X16
Y2
Y3
Y1=Y2=Y3= --- =Y12
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
13 / VSP-C0483
5.7 Misconvergence
Area A: <= 0.25 mm within the 297mm diameter circle
Misconvergence
Area B: <= 0.35 mm within 396mm x 297mm
*With White-Crosshatch applied.

*Zone A is a circular area with 297mm diameter at the center.
*Zone B is a rectangular area (396mm x 297mm) outside of the zone A.
*Use worst-case horizontal/vertical misconvergence between any two primary colors.
Area B
Area A
Y
5.8 Focus
Displaying 7 x 9 pixel "e" with white single pixel
<=1600x1200 85Hz Strokes, the entire screen shall be readable with clearly
discernible characters at normal viewing distance.
Displaying 7 x 9 pixel "H" with white single pixel
>1600x1200 85Hz Strokes, the entire screen shall be readable with clearly
discernible characters at normal viewing distance.
5.9 Raster Regulation

Rater Size Regulation <= 0.5% of the horizontal or vertical picture size
*The picture size change is less than adjusted value in either the horizontal
or vertical direction over 30% to 100% luminance range and 90 - 132VAC
or 198 - 264VAC Input respectively.
14 / VSP-C0483
6. Mechanical Specifications
6.1 Cabinet, Tilt / Swivel Base
Cabinet: PC+ABS (Flame Class 5V)
Molded material
Tilt /Swivel Base: ABS (Flame Class HB)
Cabinet color See Fig.1
Bezel Logo See Fig.2
Right & Left: -90degree to +90degree
Tilt & Swivel
Up & Down: 10degree to –5 degree
495mm(W) x 484.5mm(H) x 471mm(D)
Dimension 19.5"(W) x 19.1"(H) x 18.5"(D)
(Include Tilt /Swivel Base, see Fig.1)
6.2 Rating Label

North America See Fig.3-1
Europe See Fig.3-1
China See Fig.3-2
6.3 Carton Box

Kraft liner and trifaced corrugated board
Paper Material
(Double wall)
North America (White) See Fig.5-1
North America (Black) See Fig.5-2
Carton Box Print
Europe (White) See Fig.5-3
China See Fig.5-4
Dimension See Fig.4
Packing Contents See Fig.6
6.4 Weight
Net Approx. 29.6 kg (65.3 lbs)
Gross Approx. 35.0 kg (77.2 lbs)
6.5 Accessories
North America See Fig.7-1
AC Power Cord Europe See Fig.7-2
China See Fig.7-3
Signal Cable SC-B110: see Fig.8
3 Languages
North America
(English, German, French)
11 Languages (English, Czech, German, Greek,
Spain, French,
User's Guide
Europe Italian, Dutch, Polish, Russia,
Turkish)
Attached CD-ROM
China Chinese
15 / VSP-C0483
7. Environmental Conditions
7.1 Temperature, Relative Humidity
Operating Storage and shipment
Temperature 5 – 35 degree C -20 - 60 degree C
10 - 90% 10 - 90%
Relative Humidity
Without condensation Without condensation
7.2 Vibration Test (with carton box)

1) Random Vibration
Test Axis 3 axis
Search Frequency 5 - 200Hz
Acceleration 0 - 14.406m/s2rms
Dwelling Time 30 minutes x 3 axis
Mounting Fixed firmly on the vibration table
7.3 Drop Test (with carton box)
A
B
2
D
Front
4
1
5 3 F
The inside unit shall be withstand without any damage by following procedure.
Drop to the hard wooden board from the position of the following heights.
After finish the drop test of edges (3 position) and also corners (2 position),
tester has to change to new cushion. However for the carton box,
tester must not change to the new box and use the damaged box continuously.
Position Height
Edge 1,2,3 46.0cm(18inch)
Corner 4,5 46.0cm(18inch)
Other Surfaces A, B, C, D 46.0cm(18inch)
Top Surface E 46.0cm(18inch)
Bottom Surface F 46.0cm(18inch)
16 / VSP-C0483
Appendix 1 Preset Timing Chart
[H-SYNC]
[VIDEO] Tsh
Th
Tdh Tfh
Tbh
[V-SYNC]
[VIDEO] Tsv
Tv
Tbv Tdv Tfv
Th Tsh Tfh Tbh Tdh Tv Tsv Tfv Tbv Tdv

NO Clock Fh Fv
(µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (µSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) (mSEC) Hs Vs REMARKS
. (MHz) (KHz) (Hz)
(dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) (dot) (line) (line) (line) (line) (line)
31.778 3.813 0.636 1.907 25.422 16.683 0.064 0.318 1.048 15.253 VESA
1 25.175 - - 31.469 59.940
(800) (96) (16) (48) (640) (525) (2) (10) (33) (480) 640*480 / 60Hz
21.333 1.616 0.323 3.232 16.162 13.333 0.064 0.021 0.448 12.800 VESA
2 49.500 + + 46.875 75.000
(1056) (80) (16) (160) (800) (625) (3) (1) (21) (600) 800*600 / 75Hz
16.660 1.219 0.203 2.235 13.003 13.328 0.050 0.017 0.466 12.795 VESA
3 78.750 + + 60.023 75.029
(1312) (96) (16) (176) (1024) (800) (3) (1) (28) (768) 1024*768 / 75Hz
14.561 1.016 0.508 2.201 10.836 11.765 0.044 0.015 0.524 11.183 VESA
4 94.500 + + 68.677 84.997
(1376) (96) (48) (208) (1024) (808) (3) (1) (36) (768) 1024*768 / 85Hz
12.504 1.067 0.119 1.837 9.481 13.329 0.038 0.013 0.475 12.804 VESA
5 135.000 + + 79.976 75.025
(1688) (144) (16) (248) (1280) (1066) (3) (1) (38) (1024) 1280*1024 / 75Hz
10.971 1.016 0.406 1.422 8.127 11.761 0.033 0.011 0.483 11.235 VESA
6 157.500 + + 91.146 85.027
(1728) (160) (64) (224) (1280) (1072) (3) (1) (44) (1024) 1280*1024 / 85Hz
10.667 0.948 0.316 1.501 7.901 13.333 0.032 0.011 0.491 12.800 VESA
7 202.500 + + 93.750 75.000
(2160) (192) (64) (304) (1600) (1250) (3) (1) (46) (1200) 1600*1200 / 75Hz
9.412 0.837 0.279 1.325 6.972 11.765 0.028 0.009 0.433 11.294 VESA
8 229.500 + + 106.250 85.000
(2160) (192) (64) (304) (1600) (1250) (3) (1) (46) (1200) 1600*1200 / 85Hz
8.889 0.754 0.485 1.185 6.465 13.333 0.027 0.009 0.498 12.800 VESA
9 297.000 - + 112.500 75.000
(1640) (224) (144) (352) (1920) (1500) (3) (1) (56) (1440) 1920*1440 / 75Hz
17 / VSP-C0483
Appendix 2 EDID data for VESA DDC
EDID DATA DUMP HEX Established Timings: Detailed Timing (block #1):
00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 720x400 @ 70 Hz ---Preferred Timing Mode---
38 A3 DA 61 SN SN SN SN 720x400 @ 88 Hz Pixel Clock: 229.50 MHz
WW YY 01 03 0C 28 1E 78 640x480 @ 60 Hz Horizontal Active: 1600 pixels
EB 9C 68 A0 57 4A 9B 26 640x480 @ 67 Hz Horizontal Blanking: 560 pixels
12 48 4C FF EF 80 31 59 640x480 @ 72 Hz Vertical Active: 1200 lines
45 59 61 59 71 4F 81 99 640x480 @ 75 Hz Vertical Blanking: 50 lines
A9 4F C1 4F D1 4F A6 59 800x600 @ 56 Hz (Horizontal Frequency: 106.25 kHz)
40 30 62 B0 32 40 40 C0 800x600 @ 60 Hz (Vertical Frequency: 85.0 Hz)
13 00 8C 29 11 00 00 1E 800x600 @ 72 Hz Horizontal Sync Offset: 64 pixels
00 00 00 FD 00 32 A0 1E 800x600 @ 75 Hz Horizontal Sync Width: 192 pixels
73 21 00 0A 20 20 20 20 832x624 @ 75 Hz Vertical Sync Offset: 1 lines
20 20 00 00 00 FC 00 4E 1024x768 @ 60 Hz Vertical Sync Width: 3 lines
45 43 20 46 45 32 31 31 1024x768 @ 70 Hz Horizontal Border: 0 pixels
31 53 42 0A 00 00 00 FF 1024x768 @ 75 Hz Vertical Border: 0 lines
00 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 1152x870 @ 75 Hz Horizontal Image Size: 396 mm
S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 00 CS 1280x1024 @ 75 Hz Vertical Image Size: 297 mm
Interlaced: NO
SN: Serial number Standard Timing #1: Image: Normal Display
WW: Week of Manufacture Horizontal Active Pixels: 640 Sync: Digital Separate
YY: Year of Manufacture Aspect Ratio: 4:3 Bit 1: ON
S2: ASCII Serial Number (480 active lines) Bit 2: ON
CS: Check Sum Refresh Rate: 85 Hz
Monitor Range Limits (block #2):
-- EDID DATA DUMP TEXT -- Standard Timing #2: Minimum Vertical Rate: 50 Hz
Manufacturer Code: NEC Horizontal Active Pixels: 800 Maximum Vertical Rate: 160 Hz
Product Code (HEX): 61DA Aspect Ratio: 4:3 Minimum Horizontal Rate: 30 kHz
Product Code (DEC): 25050 (600 active lines) Maximum Horizontal Rate: 115 kHz
(Microsoft INF ID: NEC61DA) Refresh Rate: 85 Hz Maximum Pixel Clock: 330 MHz
Serial Number (HEX): SN GTF Data: 00 0a 20 20 20 20 20 20
Week of Manuf: WW Standard Timing #3:
Year of Manuf: YY Horizontal Active Pixels: 1024 Monitor Name (block #3):
Aspect Ratio: 4:3 NEC FE2111SB
EDID Version: 1 (768 active lines)
EDID Revision: 3 Refresh Rate: 85 Hz Monitor Serial Number (block #4): S2
Extension Flag: 0
Standard Timing #4: SN: Serial number
Video: Horizontal Active Pixels: 1152 WW: Week of Manufacture
Input Signal: ANALOG Aspect Ratio: 4:3 YY: Year of Manufacture
Setup: NO (864 active lines) S2: ASCII Serial Number
Sync on Green: NO Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
Composite Sync: YES EDID EDITOR V1.45 (010514) Copyright
Separate Sync: YES Standard Timing #5: (C) Mitsubishi Electric 1995-2000
V Sync Serration: NO Horizontal Active Pixels: 1280
V Signal Level: Aspect Ratio: 5:4
0.700V/0.300V (1V p-p) (1024 active lines)
Refresh Rate: 85 Hz
Max Image Size H: 40 cm
Max Image Size V: 30 cm Standard Timing #6:
DPMS Stand By: YES Horizontal Active Pixels: 1600
DPMS Suspend: YES Aspect Ratio: 4:3
DPMS Active Off: YES (1200 active lines)
GTF Support: YES Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
Standard Default Color Space: NO
Preferred Timing Mode: YES Standard Timing #7:
Display Type: RGB Color Horizontal Active Pixels: 1792
Aspect Ratio: 4:3
Color: (1344 active lines)
Gamma: 2.20 Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
Red x: 0.627
Red y: 0.341 Standard Timing #8:
Green x: 0.292 Horizontal Active Pixels: 1920
Green y: 0.605 Aspect Ratio: 4:3
Blue x: 0.149 (1440 active lines)
Blue y: 0.072 Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
White x: 0.283
White y: 0.297
18 / VSP-C0483
CABINET COLOR
COLOR Ver. MODEL NAME Front Other
North
White Ver. C22BW701-AN Aluminum Silver Light Gray TILT / SWIVEL BASE
America Swivel Angle : +90° ~ -90°
(NMD-A)
Black Ver. C22BW701-ANBK Dark Roof Gray Dark Roof Gray Tilt Angle : +10° ~ -5°
EUROPE White Ver.

(NMD-E)
C22BW701-BN Aluminum Silver Light Gray WEIGHT
APPROX 29.6kg
CHINA White Ver. C22BW701-CN Aluminum Silver Light Gray
(AP)
289
495 471
(85)
406
304.5
1.5
412
484.5
260
206
15.3
55.4
37
35.3
35.5
180
25 395.3 50.2
Power botton
AC POWER CONNECTOR SIGNAL INPUT CONNECTOR (DB9-15P)
230 Power indicater
330
134.5
Fig. 1 OUTLINE VSP-C0483

2 41.5
6
6
1 26.7
21.5
Cabinet Color 1 2 3 4
2
COLOR Ver. Front Other Silk Print color
North White Aluminum Silver Light Gray Real Gray Silver
America
(NMD-A) Black Dark Roof Gray Dark Roof Gray Real Gray Silver
EUROPE
(NMD-E) White Aluminum Silver Light Gray Real Gray Silver
Australia
(AP) White Aluminum Silver Light Gray Real Gray Silver
Fig. 2 BEZEL LOGO VSP-C0483

White Ver.•••C22BW701-AN & C22BW701-BN LABE SIZE •••• (W) 139.5mm X (H) 44.5mm
(North America) (Europe) COLOR OF BACKGROUND •••• Gray
COLOR OF LETTERING ••••• Black
Black Ver.•••C22BW701-ANBK
(North America)
Fig.3 - 1 RATING LABEL (North America / Europe) VSP-C0483

LABE SIZE •••• (W) 139.5mm X (H) 44.5mm
COLOR OF BACKGROUND •••• Gray
COLOR OF LETTERING ••••• Black
White Ver.•••C22BW701-CM
T.B.D
Fig.3 - 2 RATING LABEL (China) VSP-C0483

617 595 617 595
(outer flap) (inner flap) (outer flap) (inner flap)
311
627
311
<REAR> <FRONT>
Handle hole
80x30
D
H FRONT
Printing process. : FLEXO-PRINTING
Outer dimension. : W:620 x H:630 x D:600 (mm)
W Number of piles. : Max. 6 piles. 2
Bursting strength. : 275LBS / inch
Material. : Kraft color linerboard and trifaced corrugated board.
(Double wall)
Printing color : Black
Fig.4 CARTON BOX

VSP-C0483
5
Fig.5-1 PRINTING SPECIFICATION OF CARTON BOX

(North America:White Ver.) VSP-C0483
5

(North America:Black Ver.) VSP-C0483
(Europe:White Ver.) VSP-C0483
T.B.D
Fig.5-4 PRINTING SPECIFICATION OF CARTON BOX (China)
VSP-C0483
NOTE 1
USER'S GUIE NOTE 1: AC POWER CORD
AC POWER CORD (1) North America : see Fig.7-1
(Eurpe: attached CD-ROM)
(2) Eurpe : see Fig.7-2
(3) China : see Fig.7-3
SIGNAL CABLE
SEAL STYLE
TOP CUSHION
CARTON-TAPE
(TOP & BOTTOM)
MONITOR JOINT
STAPLE (STEEL)
PACKING BAG
BOTTOM CUSHION
CARTON BOX
FRONT
HOTMELT-BOND
(INSIDE FLAP)
Fig.6 PACKING STYLE VSP-C0483

<SPECIFICATION>
1.CABLE:Cross - section Area-----AWG18X3C
2.JACKET:PVC
3.ABILITY PVC JACKET : LIGHT GRAY PVC INSULATION ( WHITE )
(1) VOLTAGE : AC 125V
(2) AMPERAGE : AC 10A
(3) TEMPERATURE : 60°C
4.REGULATORY APPROVALS:UL, CSA

PVC INSULATION ( GREEN / YELLOW) PVC INSULATION ( BLACK )
CONSTRUCTION
About 1800mm
Fig. 7 - 1 AC POWER CORD (For North America ) VSP-C0483

<SPECIFICATION>
1.CABLE : Cross - section Area----1.0mm2 X3C
2.JACKET : PVC
3.ABILITY PVC JACKET : LIGHT GRAY PVC INSULATION ( BLUE )
(2) AMPERAGE :AC 10A
(3) TEMPERATURE :70°C
4.REGULATORY APPROVALS:VDE,KEMA-MEUK,SEMKO,NEMKO,DEMKO,
FIMKO,SEV,ÖVE,IEMMEQU,CEBEC,IEC227 PVC INSULATION PVC INSULATION ( BROWN )
( GREEN/YELLOW )
CONSTRUCTION
About 2500mm
Fig. 7 - 2 AC POWER CORD ( For EU ) VSP-C0483

<SPECIFICATION>
2
1.CABLE : Cross - section Area---1.0mm X3C
2.JACKET : PVC (LIGHT GRAY)
3.ABILITY
(2) AMPERAGE : AC 10A
(3) TEMPERATURE : 60°C
4.REGULATORY APPROVALS : GB5023.5,GB2099.1,GB1002,ZBK32003
1830±50
NTC
PLUG CONNECTOR
250V/10A 250V/10A
Fig. 7 - 3 AC POWER CORD ( For China ) VSP-C0483

Vinyl band
Packing
(230)
<SPECIFICATION>
1. JACKET:PVC (Color......Light gray) TAPE
2. ABILITY
(1)VOLTAGE:30V
(2)TEMPERATURE:80 C° Vinyl bag specifications
•Material:Polyethylene (PE)
•Thickness:0.06mm
•Dimension:100X300mm
The undermentioned content is printed in Black.
NEC-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VISUAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION S C - B 1 1 0
1800 +100
0 SCREW
SCREW
No.4-40 UNC
No.4-40 UNC
D/M WIRING LIST P/C
SIGNAL
1 1 Red - video
6 6 Red Gnd
Green - video or
2 2 Composite sync with Green video
7 7 Green Gnd
Color....Light gray 3 3 Blue - video
8 8 Blue Gnd
4 4 Gnd
13 13 H - sync or Composite sync
10 10 Sync Gnd
12 12 Serial data
Pre -Mold Material:PE 5
Over-Mold Material:PVC 5 DDC Gnd
Color......Royal Blue (Pantone 661C) 9 9
11 11 Gnd
14 14 V - sync (V-clock)
15 15 Serial clock
Fig. 8 SIGNAL CABLE VSP-C0483

MultiSync FE2111SB
User’s Manual
UÏivatelská pfiíruãka
Bedienerhandbuch
Οδηγίες Χρήσης
Manual del usuario
Manuel Utilisateur
Manuale utente
Gebruikershandleiding
Podrćznik u˝ytkownika
Руководство пользователя
Kullan∂c∂ Klavuzu
01_cover.p65 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement
DOC: This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
C-UL: Bears the C-UL Mark and is in compliance with Canadian Safety Regulations according to CSA C22.2 #950.
FCC Information
1. Use the attached specified cables with the MultiSync FE2111SB colour monitor so as not to interfere with radio and television
reception.
(1) Please use the supplied power cable or equivalent to ensure FCC compliance.
(2) Shielded video type signal cable.
Use of other cables and adapters may cause interference with radio and television reception.
2. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
If necessary, the user should contact the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user
may find the following booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission, helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve Radio-
TV Interference Problems.” This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402, Stock No.
004-000-00345-4.
No user serviceable parts inside. Do not attempt to modify this equipment. If modified, your authority to operate this equipment might
be voided by FCC.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered trademark. All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, NEC-Mitsubishi Electric Visual Systems Corporation has determined that this product meets the
ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any product or service.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners.
01_cover.p65 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

01_cover.p65 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am
Index
Warning ....................................... English-1 Avvertenza .................................. Italiano-1
Caution ........................................ English-1 Attenzione ................................... Italiano-1
Contents ...................................... English-1 Contenuto ................................... Italiano-1
Quick Start .................................. English-1 Guida rapida ............................... Italiano-1
Controls ....................................... English-2 Comandi ...................................... Italiano-2
Declaration .................................. English-3 Dichiarazione del Costruttore ...... Italiano-3
Varování ....................................... âesky-1 Waarschuwing ...................... Nederlands-1

Upozornûní ................................... âesky-1 Let op! .................................. Nederlands-1
Obsah .......................................... âesky-1 Inhoud .................................. Nederlands-1
Rychl˘ start .................................. âesky-1 Snel aan de slag .................. Nederlands-1
Ovládací prvky ............................. âesky-2 Besturingselementen ........... Nederlands-2
Prohlá‰ení v˘robce ...................... âesky-3 Kennisgeving van
de fabrikant ........................... Nederlands-3
Warnung ................................... Deutsch-1
Vorsicht ..................................... Deutsch-1 Ostrze˝enIe ................................... Polski-1
Inhalt der Verpackung ............... Deutsch-1 Uwaga ........................................... Polski-1
Kurzanleitung ............................ Deutsch-1 ZawartoÊç opakowania ................. Polski-1
Bedienelemente ........................ Deutsch-2 Pod∏àczenie monitora ................... Polski-1
Erklärung des Herstellers ......... Deutsch-3 Przyciski ........................................ Polski-2
OÊwiadczenie Wytwórcy ............... Polski-3
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ................. Ελληνικά-1
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ ............................. Ελληνικά-1 ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ .............. Русский-1
Περιεχµενα ......................... Ελληνικά-1 ВНИМАНИЕ ............................. Русский-1
Γρήγορη Εκκίνηση ............... Ελληνικά-1 Содержимое ............................ Русский-1
Πλήκτρα ελέγχου ................. Ελληνικά-2 Краткое руководство по
∆ήλωση του началу работы ......................... Русский-1
Κατασκευαστή ...................... Ελληνικά-3 Органы управления ................. Русский-2
Заявление изготовителя ........ Русский-3
Advertencia ............................... Español-1
Peligro ....................................... Español-1 D∑KKAT ....................................... Türkçe-1
Contenido .................................. Español-1 UYARI ......................................... Türkçe-1
Inicio rápido ............................... Español-1 ∑çindekiler .................................... Türkçe-1
Controles ................................... Español-2 H∂zl∂ Baµlama .............................. Türkçe-1
Declaraciones del fabricante ..... Español-3 Kontroller ..................................... Türkçe-2
Üreticinin Bildirimi ....................... Türkçe-3
Avertissement ........................... Français-1
Attention .................................... Français-1
Contenu .................................... Français-1
Mise en marche rapide ............. Français-1
Commandes .............................. Français-2
Déclaration du constructeur ...... Français-3
01_cover.p65 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

WARNING CAUTION
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK • DO NOT OPEN
English
UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ALSO, DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S
POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD RECEPTACLE OR CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
OTHER OUTLETS UNLESS THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED. REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
REFRAIN FROM OPENING THE CABINET AS THERE ARE HIGH
VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED This symbol warns user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may
SERVICE PERSONNEL. have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included. Therefore,
it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
Contents
Your new MultiSync FE2111SB monitor box* should contain the
following:
• MultiSync FE2111SB Monitor with tilt/swivel base
• Power cord
• Video Signal Cable (VGA - VGA)
• User’s Manual
• Sales Office List
User’s Manual • CD-ROM:
Includes complete User’s Manual in PDF format and Windows
related files (INF file and colour profile). To see the complete
CD-ROM User’s Manual, Acrobat Reader 4.0 must be installed at your PC.
* Remember to save your original box and packing material to

Sales transport or ship the monitor.
Office List Power Cord Video Signal Cable
(VGA –VGA)
Quick Start
To attach the MultiSync FE2111SB monitor to your system, follow
these instructions:
1. Turn off the power to your computer.
2. If necessary, install the display card into your system. For more
information, refer to the display card manual.
3. For the PC: Connect one end of the signal cable to the
connector of the display card in your system (Figure A.1).
Tighten all screws.
For the Mac: Connect the MultiSync Macintosh cable adapter
Mac Adapter (not included) to the computer (Figure B.1).
(not included) Attach one end of the signal cable to the Macintosh cable
adapter (Figure B.1).
Figure A.1 Figure B.1
NOTE: Some Macintosh systems do not require a Macintosh
cable adapter.
Power Outlet 4. Connect the other end of signal cable connector on the back of
the monitor.
NOTE: Incorrect cable connections may result in irregular
operation, damage display quality/components of CRT monitor.
5. The Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP INF file for your MultiSync
monitor can be found on the CD-ROM, delivered with the
monitor.
Power Cord 6. Connect one end of the power cord to the AC inlet on the back of
the monitor and the other end to the power outlet (Figure C.1).
7. Turn on the monitor (Figure D.1).
Figure C.1 8. Turn on the Computer.

NOTE: If you have any problems, please refer to the
Troubleshooting section of this User’s Manual.
Power Button
Power Indicator
Figure D.1
English-1
01_English 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Controls
OSM (On-Screen Manager) control buttons on the front of the monitor Colour Control/Colour Control System
function as follows: Colour presets 1 through 5 selects the desired colour setting. The bar is
Main Menu Sub-Menu replaced by the colour setting choice from 1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5. Each colour
EXIT Exits the OSM menu. Exits to the OSM controls setting is adjusted at the factory to the stated Kelvin. If a setting is
main menu. adjusted, the name of the setting will change from Kelvin to Custom.
NOTE: Deactivates the OSM menu and activates the OSM menu when the OSM NOTE: sRGB does not allow you to adjust each colour.
is turned off.
Red, Green, Blue: Colour Control System decreases or increases the
CONTROL / Moves the highlighted area Moves the highlighted monitor’s red, green or blue colour guns depending upon which is
left/right to select one of the area left/right to select selected. The change in colour will appear on screen and the direction
sub-menu. one of the controls. (decrease or increase) will be shown by the bars.
NOTE: When the OSM menu is off, it acts as a Hot key for Brightness. sRGB Mode: sRGB mode provides the suitable colour managed picture
CONTROL -/+ Has no function. Moves the bar in the – or image. You can not change Red, Green and Blue colours individually.
+ direction to decrease or NOTE: In this mode Colour Control, Brightness and Contrast are not
increase the adjustment. adjustable.
NOTE: Deactivates the OSM menu and to adjust Contrast with Hot key set “ON”
SELECT/SB MODE Enters sub-menu. Has no function. Geometry Controls
When the OSM is off, it will act as the SuperBright (SB) Geometry Controls Menu
function key. User can select between SB MODE OFF, SB The Geometry controls allow you to adjust the curvature or angle of the
MODE1, and SB MODE2. The first time this key is
sides of your display.
pressed, the current SB Mode is indicated. Within a 3
second window, if this key is selected again, the SB In/Out (pincushion): Decreases or increases the curvature of the sides
MODE will change to the next SB MODE. For example, either inward or outward.
the current mode is SB MODE OFF, the key is pressed
Left/Right (pincushion balance): Decreases or increases the
twice within a 3 second time frame, the SB MODE will
change to SB MODE1 and so on. The colour temperature curvature of the sides either to the left or right.
at each SB Mode is adjusted by appropriate colour Tilt (parallelogram): Decreases or increases the tilt of the sides either
control except for the sRGB mode whose colour setting to the left or right.
cannot be adjusted. When the unit is turned off, it will
reset to SB off mode. Align (trapezoidal): Decreases or increases the bottom of the screen
to be the same as the top.
Super Bright Mode OFF: for text based images (normal
use) Rotate (raster rotation): Rotates the entire display clockwise or
Super Bright Mode-1 ON: for images counterclockwise.
Super bright Mode-2 ON: for moving image such as
Corner Correction: Allows you to adjust the geometry of the corners of
DVD movies
your display – Top, Top Balance, Bottom or Bottom Balance.
RESET Resets all the controls Resets the highlighted
within the highlighted menu control to the factory
to the factory setting. setting. Tools 1
Moiré Canceler: Moiré is a wavy pattern which can sometimes appear
NOTE: When RESET is pressed in the main and sub-menu, a warning window
will appear allowing you to select the reset function.
on the screen. The pattern is repetitive and superimposed as rippled
images. When running certain applications, the wavy pattern is more
evident than in others. To reduce moiré, adjust the level by using -/
Brightness/Contrast Controls +control buttons.
Brightness: Adjusts the overall image and background screen Basic Convergence: Aligns all three colours (R,G,B) to form a single
brightness. colour (white). The purpose of this control is to ensure that a white line
Contrast: Adjusts the image brightness in relation to the background. drawn on the screen is as crisp and clear as possible.
Degauss: Eliminates the build-up of stray magnetic fields which alter • Use the CONVERGENCE (HOR.) to adjust the alignment of the
the correct scan of the electron beams and affect the purity of the white lines in the left/right direction.
screen colours, focus, and convergence. When activated, your screen • Use the CONVERGENCE (VER.) to adjust the alignment of the
image will jump and waver a bit as the screen is demagnetised. white lines in the up/down direction.
NOTE: Please allow a minimum of 20 minutes to elapse between uses Linearity: This selection allows you to adjust the spacing of the area on
of the Degauss function. the screen. The purpose of this control is to ensure that a one-inch
Constant Brightness: Sustains the brightness and screen colour circle is a true one-inch circle wherever it is on the screen. The best way
levels consistently over the normal life of the monitor. to determine the vertical linearity is as follows:
The Constant Brightness function requires a 30 minute warm-up of • Draw equally spaced horizontal lines using a drawing application
the monitor before the feature is fully functional. that has a ruler.
• Use the Vertical Balance control to adjust the lines near the top and
bottom of your screen.
Size and Position Controls
AutoAdjust: Automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical size and • Use the LINEARITY (VER.) to adjust the spacing between the lines
position settings for applicable timings. near the centre and top of your screen.
NOTE: AutoAdjust is unavailable with no image signal or narrow size of GlobalSync Control: Eliminates picture impurities that may result from
image signal input. the earth’s magnetic field. While in the sub-menus (GLOBALSYNC, TOP
LEFT, TOP RIGHT, BOTTOM LEFT or BOTTOM RIGHT), use the –/+
Left/Right: Moves the image horizontally (left or right).
control buttons to fine tune the GlobalSync corrections.
Down/Up: Moves the image vertically (up or down).
NOTE: NEC recommends that you perform GlobalSync correction while
Narrow/Wide: Decreases or increases the horizontal size of the image. running a typical application such as a spreadsheet or text document.
Short/Tall: Decreases or increases the vertical size of the image.
English-2
01_English 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Tools 2
Language: OSM controls menus are available in six languages.
English
OSM Position: You can choose where you would like the OSM controls
menu to appear on your screen. Selecting OSM Position allows you to
manually adjust the OSM controls menu left, right, up or down.
OSM Turn Off: The OSM controls menu will stay on as long as it is in
use. In the OSM Turn Off sub-menu, you can select how long the
monitor waits after the last touch of a button for the OSM controls
menu to disappear. The preset choice is in 5 seconds step between 5–
120 seconds.
OSM Lock Out: This control completely locks out access to all OSM
controls functions except Brightness and Contrast. When attempting to
activate OSM controls while in the lock out mode, a screen will appear
indicating that OSM controls are locked out. To activate the OSM Lock
Out function, press SELECT, then press + and hold down
simultaneously. To deactivate the OSM Lock Out, press SELECT, then
press + and hold down simultaneously.
IPM System Off Mode:
Enable: The IPM System works normally and all stages of energy
savings are utilised.
Disable: The Off Mode of the IPM System is not used.
NOTE: For standard systems and graphics boards, keep the factory
setting at ENABLE.
NOTE: Don’t keep the MultiSync monitor on when ‘No Signal’ is
applied. This could cause image burn in on the screen due to the ‘No
Signal’ message being displayed.
EdgeLock Control: Operating your monitor at a non-standard timing
may cause images to appear darker than normal or have colour
distortion. Use of the EdgeLock control will adjust images to their
normal state.
Hot Key: This selection allows you to use / as brightness control
and –/+ as contrast control.
Factory Preset: Selecting Factory Preset allows you a reset most
OSM control settings back to the factory settings. A warning statement
will appear to confirm that you do want to reset ALL settings. Individual
settings can be reset by highlighting the control to be reset and
pressing the RESET button.
Information
Display Mode: Indicates the current mode and frequency setting of the
monitor.
Monitor Info: Indicates the model and serial numbers of your monitor.
Refresh Notifier: A message will advise you if the refresh rate of the
signal being applied to the monitor by the computer is too low. For
further information, please refer to your display card or system manual.
Declaration of the Manufacturer

We hereby certify that the colour monitor
MultiSync FE2111SB is in compliance with
Council Directive 73/23/EEC:
– EN 60950
Council Directive 89/336/EEC:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
and marked with
NEC-Mitsubishi Electric Visual

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-0023, JAPAN
English-3
01_English 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Recommended use
CORRECT PLACEMENT AND
Safety Precautions and Maintenance
ADJUSTMENT OF THE MONITOR
FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE, CAN REDUCE EYE, SHOULDER AND
PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING NECK FATIGUE. CHECK THE
WHEN SETTING UP AND USING FOLLOWING WHEN YOU POSITION
THE MULTISYNC FE2111SB THE MONITOR:
COLOUR MONITOR:
• DO NOT OPEN THE MONITOR. There are no user serviceable • Adjust the monitor height so
parts inside and opening or removing covers may expose you to that the top of the screen is
dangerous shock hazards or other risks. Refer all servicing to at or slightly below eye level.
qualified service personnel. Your eyes should look
• Do not spill any liquids into the cabinet or use your monitor near slightly downward when
water. viewing the middle of the
• Do not insert objects of any kind into the cabinet slots, as they may screen.
touch dangerous voltage points,which can be harmful or fatal or • Position your monitor no
may cause electric shock,fire or equipment failure. closer than 40 cm and no
• Do not place any heavy objects on the power cord. Damage to the further away than 70 cm
cord may cause shock or fire. from your eyes. The optimal
distance is 60 cm.
• Do not place this product on a sloping or unstable cart, stand or
table, as the monitor may fall, causing serious damage to the • Rest your eyes periodically
monitor. by focusing on an object at least 6 m away. Blink often.
• Keep the monitor away from high capacity transformers, electric • Position the monitor at a 90° angle to windows and other light
motors and other devices such as external speakers or fans, which sources to minimise glare and reflections. Adjust the monitor tilt
may create strong magnetic fields. so that ceiling lights do not reflect on your screen.
• If possible, position the monitor so that it is facing the east to • If reflected light makes it hard for you to see your screen, use
minimise the effects of the earth’s magnetic field. an anti-glare filter.
• Changing the direction of the monitor while it is powered on may • Clean your monitor
cause image discolouration. To correct this, turn the monitor off for A special coating is provided on the glass (CRT) surface of this
20 minutes before powering it back on. monitor to reduce a reflection and static electricity on the glass
• When operating the MultiSync FE2111SB with its AC 100-120/220- surface.
240V worldwide power supply, use a power supply cord that Due to the delicate coating on the glass surface, use a lint-free,
matches the power supply voltage of the AC power outlet being nonabrasive cloth (cotton or equivalent) and a non-alcohol,
used. The power supply cord you use must have been approved by neutral, nonabrasive cleaning solution to minimise dust. If the
and comply with the safety standards of your country. (Type screen requires more than a light cleaning, apply water or
H05VV-F 3G 0.7 mm2 should be used in Europe) soften neutral detergent with much water directly to a soft cloth
• In UK, use a BS-approved power cord with molded plug having a and use it upon wringing water, to clean the glass surface.
black (5A) fuse installed for use with this monitor. If a power cord is CAUTION: The following agents will cause damage to the CRT
not supplied with this monitor, please contact your supplier. when cleaning the glass surface: Benzene, thinner, acid/
alkaline detergent, alcohol detergent, detergent with abrasive
Immediately unplug your monitor from the wall outlet and refer
powder, detergent with antistatic agent, detergent for cleaning.
servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged. • Adjust the monitor’s brightness and contrast controls to
enhance readability.
• If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the monitor.
• Use a document holder placed close to the screen.
• If the monitor has been exposed to rain or water.
• Position whatever you are looking at most of the time (the
• If the monitor has been dropped or the cabinet damaged. screen or reference material) directly in front of you to minimise
• If the monitor does not operate normally by following operating turning your head while you are typing.
instructions. • Get regular eye checkups.
• Allow adequate ventilation around the monitor so that
Ergonomics
heat can properly dissipate. Do not block ventilated
openings or place the monitor near a radiator or other To realise the maximum ergonomics benefits,we recommend the
heat sources. Do not put anything on top of monitor. following:
CAUTION
• The power cable connector is the primary means of • Adjust the Brightness until the background raster disappears
detaching the system from the power supply. The • Do not position the Contrast control to its maximum setting
monitor should be installed close to a power outlet • Use the preset Size and Position controls with standard signals
which is easily accessible.
• Use the preset Colour Setting and Sides Left/Right controls
• Handle with care when transporting. Save packaging
• Use non-interlaced signals with a vertical refresh rate between
for transporting.
75-160Hz
• Do not use primary colour blue on a dark background, as it is
difficult to see and may produce eye fatigue due to insufficient
contrast
English-4
01_English 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

VAROVÁNÍ UPOZORNùNÍ
CHRA≈TE ZA¤ÍZENÍ P¤ED DE·TùM A VLHKEM. ZABRÁNÍTE TAK RIZIKO ÚRAZU ELEKTRICK¯M PROUDEM • NEOTVÍRAT
NEBEZPEâÍ POÎÁRU NEBO ÚRAZU ELEKTRICK¯M PROUDEM.
POLARIZOVANOU ZÁSTRâKU JEDNOTKY NEPOUÎÍVEJTE VE UPOZORNùNÍ: RIZIKO ÚRAZU ELEKTRICK¯M PROUDEM. NEOTEVÍREJTE
SPOJENÍ SE ZÁSUVKOU PRODLUÎOVACÍ ·≈ÒRY NEBO JIN¯MI KRYT A NEODSTRA≈UJTE ZADNÍ âÁST. ZA¤ÍZENÍ NEOBSAHUJE ÎÁDNÉ
ZÁSUVKAMI, POKUD KOLÍKY NELZE ZCELA ZASUNOUT. SOUâÁSTI. KTERÉ BY MOHL UÎIVATEL OPRAVIT. P¤ENECHEJTE
OPRAVU KVALIFIKOVANÉMU SERVISNÍMU PERSONÁLU.
UVNIT¤ ZA¤ÍZENÍ SE NACHÁZÍ VYSOKONAPùËOVÉ KOMPONENTY,
PROTO SK¤Í≈ NEOTEVÍREJTE. SERVIS SVù¤TE KVALIFIKOVANÉ Tento symbol upozorÀuje uÏivatele na neizolované napûtí v rámci
OSOBù. jednotky, jehoÏ intenzita mÛÏe b˘t dostateãnû vysoká, aby zpÛsobila
úraz elektrick˘m proudem. Jak˘koli kontakt s libovoln˘m dílem uvnitfi
âesky
jednotky je proto nebezpeãn˘.
Tento symbol upozorÀuje uÏivatele na dÛleÏitou literaturu t˘kající
provozu a údrÏby jednotky dodanou spoleãnû s tímto zafiízením.
Chcete-li pfiedejít problémÛm, doporuãujeme peãlivé proãtení
pfiíslu‰n˘ch materiálÛ.
Obsah
Krabice* s monitorem MultiSync FE2111SB obsahuje následující
poloÏky:
• monitor MultiSync FE2111SB s naklápûcím a otoãn˘m podstavcem,
• napájecí ‰ÀÛra,
• kabel pro videosignál (VGA-VGA),
• uÏivatelská pfiíruãka,
• Sales Office List,
uÏivatelská pfiíruãka • CD-ROM:
CD-ROM obsahuje kompletní uÏivatelskou pfiíruãku ve formátu
PDF a soubory pro systém Windows (soubor INF a barevn˘ profil).
CD-ROM Pro zobrazení kompletní uÏivatelské pfiíruãky musíte mít na poãítaãi
nainstalovanou aplikaci Acrobat Reader 4.0.
Sales * PÛvodní krabici a balicí materiál uschovejte pro pfiípadnou pfiepravu

Office List napájecí ‰ÀÛra kabel pro videosignál nebo odeslání monitoru.
(VGA-VGA)
Rychl˘ start
Pfiipojení monitoru MultiSync FE2111SB k systému proveìte
následovnû:
1. Vypnûte poãítaã.
2. Je-li tfieba, nainstalujte do systému grafickou kartu. Více informací
naleznete v pfiíruãce grafické karty.
3. PC: Pfiipojte jeden konec signálního kabelu ke konektoru grafické
karty poãítaãe (obr. A.1). Dotáhnûte v‰echny ‰rouby.
Macintosh: Pfiipojte kabelov˘ adaptér (není souãástí dodávky)
Adaptér Mac monitoru MultiSync pro Macintosh do poãítaãe (obr. B.1). Pfiipojte
(není souãástí jeden konec signálního kabelu k adaptéru kabelu Macintosh
v˘bavy) (obr. B.1).
Obrázek A.1 Obrázek B.1 POZNÁMKA: U nûkter˘ch poãítaãÛ Macintosh není nutné
pouÏívat tento kabelov˘ adaptér.
4. Pfiipojte konektor na druhém konci signálového kabelu do zadní
Elektrická zásuvka ãásti monitoru.
POZNÁMKA: Nesprávné zapojení kabelÛ mÛÏe mít za následek
‰patnou funkãnost, po‰kození kvality zobrazení nebo souãástí
obrazovky.
5. Soubor INF systému Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP pro monitor
MultiSync se nachází na disku CD-ROM, kter˘ je souãástí
Napájecí dodávky.
‰ÀÛra 6. Pfiipojte jeden konec napájecí ‰ÀÛry do napájecího konektoru na
zadní stranû monitoru a druh˘ konec do zásuvky ve zdi (obr. C.1).
7. Zapnûte monitor (obr. D.1).
Obrázek C.1 8. Zapnûte poãítaã.

POZNÁMKA: Vyskytnou-li se potíÏe, proãtûte si kapitolu ¤e‰ení
potíÏí dále v této pfiíruãce.
Tlaãítko napájení
Indikátor napájení
Obrázek D.1
âesky-1
02_Czech 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Ovládací prvky
Ovládací tlaãítka OSM (On-Screen Manager) na pfiední stranû monitoru Nastavení barev a systém nastavení barev
mají následující funkce: Pfiedvolby nastavení barev 1 aÏ 5 slouÏí k nastavení poÏadovan˘ch
Hlavní nabídka Dílãí nabídka barev. Místo li‰ty se objeví ‰kála pro nastavení barev s hodnotami 1, 2, 3,
EXIT Ukonãí nabídku OSM. V˘stup do hlavní nabídky sRGB, 5. Pfii v˘robû je kaÏdému barevnému nastavení pfiifiazena hodnota
ovládacích prvkÛ OSM. ve stupních Kelvina. Pfii úpravû nastavení se místo oznaãení Kelvin objeví
POZNÁMKA: Ukonãuje nabídku OSM, a aktivuje nabídku OSM, pokud je OSM “Custom” (Vlastní).
vypnuto. POZNÁMKA: Nastavení sRGB neumoÏÀuje upravení barev.
CONTROL / Posunuje vyznaãenou Posunuje vyznaãenou Red, Green, Blue (âervená, zelená, modrá): Systém správy barev
plochu vlevo nebo vpravo a plochu vlevo nebo vpravo
sniÏuje nebo zvy‰uje intenzitu ãervené, zelené a modré na monitoru. Na
zvolí nûkterou z dílãích a zvolí nûkter˘ z
nabídek. ovládacích prvkÛ.
obrazovce se objeví zmûna barvy a na li‰tách je vidût smûr zmen‰ení
nebo zvût‰ení intenzity barev.
POZNÁMKA: Je-li nabídka OSM vypnuta, slouÏí k rychlému nastavení jasu.
sRGB Mode (ReÏim sRGB): ReÏim sRGB zaji‰Èuje obraz s vhodn˘m
CONTROL -/+ Bez funkce. Posunuje pruh smûrem nastavením barev. âervenou, zelenou a modrou barvu nelze mûnit
udávan˘m tlaãítky – nebo +, samostatnû.
a tak sniÏuje nebo zvy‰uje
hodnotu nastavení. POZNÁMKA: V tomto reÏimu není moÏné upravit nastavení barev, jas
ani kontrast.
POZNÁMKA: Deaktivuje nabídku OSM a – pokud je zapnuta rychlé volba –
upravuje kontrast.
SELECT/SB MODE Vstoupí do podnabídky. Bez funkce. Prvky pro ovládání geometrie
Není-li OSM aktivní, ovládá funkci SuperBright (SB).
Nabídka pro ovládání geometrie
UÏivatelé si mohou zvolit mezi moÏnostmi SB MODE OFF, Ovladaãe Geometry (Geometrie) umoÏÀují nastavení zaoblení nebo
SB MODE1 a SB MODE2. Pfii prvním stisknutí tohoto zkosení boãních stran zobrazení.
tlaãítka se pouze zobrazí aktuální reÏim SB. Pokud bûhem
tfií sekund stisknete toto tlaãítko znovu, reÏim SB se zmûní
In/Out (pincushion) (dovnitfi a ven, zakfiivení): Zmen‰uje nebo zvût‰uje
na následující reÏim SB. Pokud je napfiíklad aktivní reÏim zakfiivení zobrazení smûrem dovnitfi nebo ven.
SB MODE OFF (SB vypnuto) a stisknete tlaãítko dvakrát Left/Right (pincushion balance) (vlevo nebo vpravo, vyváÏení
bûhem tfií sekund, reÏim SB se zmûní na SB MODE1. zakfiivení): Vychyluje postranní zaoblení doleva nebo doprava.
Teplota barev je v jednotliv˘ch reÏimech SB upravena o
vhodnou hodnotu, s v˘jimkou reÏimu sRGB, jehoÏ Tilt (parallelogram) (Naklonûní, zkosení): Zmen‰uje nebo zvût‰uje
nastavení barev nelze upravit. Pokud zafiízení vypnete, sklon stran doleva nebo doprava.
reÏim SB se nastaví na hodnotu vypnuto.
Align (trapezoidal) (Vyrovnání stran, lichobûÏníkové): Vyrovnává
Super Bright Mode OFF: pro textov˘ obsah (normální délku spodní strany obrazovky vzhledem k horní ãásti.
pouÏívání),
Super Bright Mode-1 ON: pro obrázky,
Rotate (raster rotation) (Natoãit, natoãení rastru): Natoãí celou
Super Bright Mode-2 ON: pro pohybliv˘ obraz, napfiíklad obrazovku ve smûru, nebo proti smûru hodinov˘ch ruãiãek.
filmy na DVD. Corner Correction (Sefiízení rohÛ): UmoÏÀuje nastavit geometrii rohÛ
RESET Oznaãená nabídka bude Obnoví pÛvodní v˘robní obrazu – Top (Nahofie), Top Balance (Korekce horní ãásti), Bottom (Dole)
vrácena do pÛvodního nastavení zvoleného nebo Bottom Balance (Korekce dolní ãásti).
nastavení od v˘robce. ovladaãe.
POZNÁMKA: Stisknete-li RESET v hlavní nebo dílãí nabídce, objeví se dialog s Nástroje 1
varováním, kter˘ umoÏní zvolit funkci “reset”. Moiré Canceler (Zru‰ení moaré): Moaré je vlnit˘ obrazec, kter˘ se
nûkdy objevuje na obrazovce. Obrazec se opakuje a pfiekr˘vá obraz jako
vlnky. V nûkter˘ch aplikacích je vlnit˘ vzorec zfietelnûj‰í. Pro sníÏení
Prvky pro ovládání jasu a kontrastu
moaré nastavte úroveÀ pomocí ovládacích prvkÛ –/+.
Brightness (Jas): Nastavuje celkovou svûtlost a jas pozadí obrazovky.
Basic Convergence (Základní konvergence): Srovná v‰echny tfii barvy
Contrast (Kontrast): Nastavuje jas obrazu vzhledem k pozadí.
(RGB) tak, aby vytvofiily jedinou barvu (bílou). Tento ovládací prvek slouÏí
Degauss (Demagnetizace): ZabraÀuje tvofiení náhodn˘ch k tomu, aby bílá ãára vykreslená na obrazovce byla maximálnû zfietelná a
magnetick˘ch polí, která ru‰í správné snímání elektronov˘ch paprskÛ a ostrá.
mají ‰patn˘ vliv na ãistotu barev, ostrost a konvergenci. Pfii aktivaci této • Ovládací prvek CONVERGENCE (HOR.) pouÏijte pro srovnání bíl˘ch
funkce zaãne obraz skákat a vlnit se, protoÏe obrazovka se ãar smûrem doleva a doprava.
demagnetizuje.
• Ovládací prvek CONVERGENCE (VER.) pouÏijte pro srovnání bíl˘ch
POZNÁMKA: Funkci demagnetizace pouÏívejte s minimálním ãasov˘m ãar smûrem nahoru a dolÛ.
odstupem 20 minut.
Linearity (Linearita): Volba linearity umoÏÀuje nastavení velikosti plochy
Constant Brightness (Stál˘ jas): UdrÏuje úroveÀ jasu a barev na na obrazovce. Úãelem této funkce je porovnání, zda je kruh o prÛmûru
obrazovce konzistentní po celou dobu Ïivotnosti monitoru. 2,5 cm skuteãnû kruhem o prÛmûru 2,5 cm v kterékoliv ãásti obrazovky.
Funkce Constant Brightness je plnû funkãní aÏ po 30 minutách od Nejlep‰í zpÛsob urãení vertikální linearity je následující:
zapnutí monitoru.
• V grafické aplikaci vyuÏívající pravítko nakreslete vodorovné linky se
stejnomûrn˘m prokladem.
Prvky pro ovládání velikosti a polohy • Pomocí ovladaãe Vertical Balance (Vertikální vyrovnání) vyrovnejte
AutoAdjust (Automatické sefiízení): Automaticky nastaví vodorovnou a linky v horní a dolní ãásti obrazovky.
svislou velikost a polohu obrazu pro pfiíslu‰né ãasování. • Pomocí ovladaãe LINEARITY (VER.) (Vertikální linearita) upravte
POZNÁMKA: Funkci AutoAdjust nelze pouÏít bez obrazového signálu rozestupy mezi linkami ve stfiedu a horní ãásti obrazovky.
nebo s pfiíli‰ úzk˘m signálem.
GlobalSync Control (Ovladaã GlobalSync): Eliminuje vady obrazu,
Left/Right (Vlevo a vpravo): Posune obraz vodorovnû (vlevo nebo které mohou b˘t zpÛsobeny magnetick˘m polem Zemû. Nacházíte-li se v
vpravo). dílãích nabídkách (GLOBALSYNC, TOP LEFT, TOP RIGHT, BOTTOM
Down/Up (Nahoru a dolÛ): Posune obraz svisle (dolÛ nebo nahoru). LEFT nebo BOTTOM RIGHT), pouÏijte ovládací prvky –/+ pro jemné
doladûní korekcí GlobalSync.
Narrow/Wide (ZúÏit nebo roz‰ífiit): Vodorovné zmen‰ení nebo zvût‰ení
velikosti obrazu. POZNÁMKA: Spoleãnost NEC doporuãuje, aby se sefiízení GlobalSync
provedlo se spu‰tûnou bûÏnou aplikací, jako je tabulkov˘ nebo textov˘
Short/Tall (Zmen‰it nebo zvût‰it v˘‰ku): Zmen‰ení nebo zvût‰ení
procesor.
svislého rozmûru obrazu.
âesky-2
02_Czech 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Nástroje 2
Language (Jazyk): Nabídky ovládacích prvkÛ OSM jsou k dispozici v
sedmi jazycích.
OSM Position (Poloha OSM): Je moÏné zvolit poÏadovanou pozici
nabídky ovládacích prvkÛ OSM na obrazovce. V˘bûrem OSM Position
(Poloha OSM) mÛÏete manuálnû nastavovat polohu nabídky ovládacích
prvkÛ OSM doleva, doprava, nahoru a dolÛ.
OSM Turn Off (Vypnutí OSM): Nabídka ovládacích prvkÛ OSM zÛstane
zobrazena, dokud se pouÏívá. V dílãí nabídce OSM Turn Off (Vypnutí
âesky
OSM) lze nastavit prodlevu monitoru pro vypnutí nabídky ovládání OSM
od posledního stisknutí tlaãítka. Hodnotu lze nastavit v rozmezí 5–100
sekund v krocích po 5 sekundách.
OSM Lock Out (Uzamãení OSM): ZnemoÏÀuje pfiístupu ke v‰em
funkcím OSM, kromû jasu a kontrastu. Pfii pokusu o aktivaci ovládání
OSM v reÏimu uzamãení se na obrazovce objeví sdûlení, Ïe funkce OSM
jsou uzamãeny. K uzamãení funkcí OSM stisknûte a podrÏte tlaãítko
SELECT a souãasnû stisknûte +. K odemãení OSM stisknûte a podrÏte
tlaãítko SELECT a souãasnû stisknûte +.
IPM System Off Mode (ReÏim vypínání IPM):
Enable (Aktivovat): Systém IPM je aktivní a pouÏívají se v‰echny úrovnû
úspory energie.
Disable (Deaktivovat): ReÏim OFF (Vypnuto) se u systému IPM
nepouÏívá.
POZNÁMKA: U standardních systémÛ a grafick˘ch karet nastavení
ENABLE od v˘robce nemûÀte.
POZNÁMKA: Pokud pouÏíváte hlá‰ení “No signal”, nenechávejte
monitor MultiSync zapnut˘. Zobrazené hlá‰ení “No Signal” by mohlo
zpÛsobit vypálení obrazu na obrazovku.
EdgeLock Control (Kontrola mezních hodnot): Pokud monitor budete
pouÏívat s nestandardním obnovovacím kmitoãtem, obraz mÛÏe b˘t
tmav‰í neÏ obvykle nebo mÛÏe dojít ke zkreslení barev. Funkci
EdgeLock pouÏijte k úpravû nastavení na normální stav.
Hot Key (Rychlá volba): Tato volba vám umoÏní pouÏít tlaãítko /
jako ovladaã jasu a tlaãítko –/+ jako ovladaã kontrastu.
Factory Preset (Nastavení od v˘robce): Volba Factory Preset
umoÏÀuje vrátit vût‰inu nastavení ovládacích prvkÛ OSM na hodnoty
nastavené od v˘robce. Objeví se dotaz s upozornûním, zda se chcete
vrátit k pÛvodnímu nastavení v‰ech funkcí (ALL). Hodnotu jednotliv˘ch
nastavení lze vrátit oznaãením odpovídajícího ovládacího prvku a
stisknutím tlaãítka RESET.
Informace
Display Mode (ReÏim zobrazení): Zobrazí aktuální nastavení reÏimu a
frekvence monitoru.
Monitor Info (Informace o monitoru): Zobrazí model monitoru a jeho
sériové ãíslo.
Refresh Notifier (Upozornûní na obnovovací frekvenci): Je-li
obnovovací frekvence signálu monitoru pfiíli‰ nízká, objeví se na
obrazovce zpráva. Dal‰í informace najdete v pfiíruãce ke grafické kartû
nebo v pfiíruãce systému.
Prohlá‰ení v˘robce
Tímto prohla‰ujeme, Ïe barevn˘ monitor MultiSync
FE2111SB je v souladu se
smûrnicemi 73/23/EEC:
– EN 60950
smûrnicemi 89/336/EEC:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
a opatfien oznaãením

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
âesky-3
02_Czech 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Provozní pokyny
SPRÁVN¯M UMÍSTùNÍM A
Bezpeãnostní opatfiení a údrÏba
NASTAVENÍM MONITORU MÒÎETE
CHCETE-LI DOSÁHNOUT OPTIMÁLNÍ P¤EDEJÍT ÚNAVù OâÍ, BOLESTEM
FUNKCE BAREVNÉHO MONITORU RAMEN A ·ÍJE. P¤I UMÍSËOVÁNÍ
MULTISYNC FE2111SB, POSTUPUJTE P¤I MONITORU POSTUPUJTE PODLE
INSTALACI A NASTAVOVÁNÍ PODLE NÁSLEDUJÍCÍCH POKYNÒ:
NÁSLEDUJÍCÍCH POKYNÒ:
• MONITOR NEOTVÍREJTE. Uvnitfi monitoru nejsou Ïádné souãásti, • Umístûte monitor do takové
které by mohl uÏivatel sám opravit. Pfii otvírání nebo odstraÀování v˘‰ky, abyste horní ãást
krytÛ se vystavujete nebezpeãí úrazu elektrick˘m proudem a jin˘m obrazovky mûli mírnû pod
rizikÛm. Ve‰keré zásahy tohoto druhu pfienechejte odborníkÛm. úrovní oãí. Pohled na stfied
• Dbejte, aby se do monitoru nedostaly tekutiny, a nepouÏívejte ho v obrazovky by mûl smûfiovat
blízkosti vody. mírnû dolÛ.
• Do otvorÛ nezasouvejte Ïádné pfiedmûty. Mohly by se dotknout • Doporuãená minimální
nebezpeãn˘ch ãástí pod napûtím, coÏ mÛÏe zpÛsobit úraz vzdálenost monitoru od oãí
elektrick˘m proudem, poÏár nebo selhání zafiízení. je 40 cm, maximální 70 cm.
• Na napájecí ‰ÀÛru nepokládejte Ïádné tûÏké pfiedmûty. Po‰kození Optimální vzdálenost je
izolace mÛÏe zpÛsobit úraz elektrick˘m proudem nebo poÏár. 60 cm.
• NeumísÈujte v˘robek na ‰ikmé ani nestabilní vozíky, stojany nebo • Pfii práci zamûfiujte zrak
stoly; monitor se mÛÏe pádem váÏnû po‰kodit. pravidelnû na nûjak˘
pfiedmût vzdálen˘ nejménû 6 m. âasto mrkejte.
• NeumísÈujte monitor do blízkosti vysokokapacitních transformátorÛ,
elektromotorÛ a jin˘ch zafiízení, jako jsou externí reproduktory nebo • Umístûte monitor v úhlu asi 90° k oknu a jin˘m svûteln˘m
ventilátory, které vytváfií silné magnetické pole. zdrojÛm tak, aby se neodráÏely na obrazovce. Monitor sklopte
tak, aby se na obrazovce neodráÏela stropní svûtla.
• Umístûte monitor pokud moÏno obrazovkou k v˘chodu.
Minimalizujete tak pÛsobení zemského magnetického pole. • JestliÏe se nelze odrazu svûtla na obrazovce vyhnout, pouÏívejte
filtr jako stínidlo.
• Otáãením zapnutého monitoru mÛÏe dojít k posuvu barev. Potom je
tfieba monitor alespoÀ na 20 minut vypnout. • Monitor ãistûte.
• SB
PouÏíváte-li pro provoz monitoru MultiSync FE2111 obvyklé napûtí Sklo obrazovky je o‰etfieno speciálním nátûrem, kter˘ omezuje
100–120 nebo 220–240 V, pouÏijte také odpovídající napájecí ‰ÀÛru odrazy a statickou elektfiinu na povrchu skla.
vyhovující napûtí zásuvky stfiídavého proudu. Napájecí ‰ÀÛra musí KvÛli jemnému nátûru na povrchu skla pouÏijte bavlnûnou nebo
b˘t schválena a musí vyhovovat bezpeãnostním pfiedpisÛm platn˘m podobnou látku, která nepou‰tí vlákna a neodfie nátûr.
v pfiíslu‰né zemi. (V Evropû se musí pouÏít typ H05VV-F 3G 0,7 K odstranûní prachu pouÏijte neutrální roztok neobsahující
mm2.) alkohol, kter˘ nezpÛsobí odfiení. VyÏaduje-li obrazovka
• Ve Spojeném království se smí pouÏívat k tomuto monitoru jen dÛkladnûj‰í vyãi‰tûní, namoãte mûkkou látku do vody nebo
schválená ‰ÀÛra BS se zalitou zástrãkou a s ãernou pojistkou (5A). neutrálního ãisticího prostfiedku zfiedûného vût‰ím mnoÏstvím
Není-li napájecí ‰ÀÛra pfiibalena, spojte se prosím s dodavatelem. vody (látku vyÏdímejte) a vyãistûte povrch skla.
UPOZORNùNÍ: Následující roztoky mohou zpÛsobit po‰kození
V níÏe popsan˘ch pfiípadech je nutno okamÏitû odpojit monitor ze sítû a
skla obrazovky: Benzen, fiedidla, kyselé nebo zásadité ãisticí
pfiivolat odborného technika:
prostfiedky, ãisticí prostfiedky obsahující alkohol, ãisticí prostfiedky
• Dojde k po‰kození napájecí ‰ÀÛry. s brusn˘m prá‰kem, ãisticí prostfiedky s antistatick˘m roztokem,
• Do monitoru se dostane kapalina nebo cizí pfiedmûty. ãisticí prostfiedky na hrubé ãi‰tûní.
• Monitor byl vystaven de‰ti nebo vodû. • Jas a kontrast nastavte tak, aby byla zaji‰tûna optimální
• Monitor upadne nebo se po‰kodí jeho obal. ãitelnost.
• Monitor fiádnû nefunguje, pfiestoÏe jste dodrÏeli v‰echny pokyny. • PouÏívejte stojan na dokumenty, kter˘ umístíte v blízkosti
obrazovky.
• Zajistûte kolem monitoru odpovídající odvûtrávání, aby
se nepfiehfiíval. Nezakr˘vejte vûtrací otvory a neumísÈujte • Obrazovku nebo referenãní materiál, se kter˘m pracujete,
monitor do blízkosti topidel a jin˘ch tepeln˘ch zdrojÛ. umístûte pfied sebe, abyste pfii psaní co nejménû otáãeli hlavou.
UPOZORNùNÍ Nepokládejte na monitor Ïádné pfiedmûty. • Choìte pravidelnû na prohlídky k oãnímu lékafii.
• Konektor napájecí ‰ÀÛry je hlavním prostfiedkem pro Ergonomika
odpojení systému od pfiívodu elektrického napûtí.
Abyste vyuÏili ergonomick˘ch v˘hod co nejvíce, doporuãujeme
Monitor je tfieba nainstalovat blízko elektrické zásuvky, k
provést následující kroky:
níÏ máte snadn˘ pfiístup.
• Nastavte jas tak, aby zmizel rastr na pozadí.
• Pfii dopravû a manipulaci zacházejte se zafiízením
opatrnû. Obal uschovejte pro pfiípadnou pfiepravu. • Nenastavujte ovládací prvek kontrastu do maximální polohy.
• VyuÏívejte v˘robcem nastavenou velikost a polohu se
standardním signálem.
• PouÏívejte nastavení barev a vodorovné umístûní obrazu od
v˘robce.
• PouÏívejte neprokládané signály s vertikální obnovovací
frekvencí v rozsahu 75–160 Hz.
• NepouÏívejte primárnû modrou barvu na tmavém pozadí; je
‰patnû vidût a zpÛsobuje únavu oãí v dÛsledku nedostateãného
kontrastu.
âesky-4
02_Czech 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

WARNUNG VORSICHT
SETZEN SIE DAS GERÄT WEDER REGEN NOCH FEUCHTIGKEIT STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR • NICHT ÖFFNEN
AUS, DA ES ANDERNFALLS ZU FEUER ODER STROMSCHLÄGEN
KOMMEN KANN. VERWENDEN SIE DEN NETZSTECKER DIESES VORSICHT: ENTFERNEN SIE KEINESFALLS ABDECKUNG ODER
GERÄTS KEINESFALLS MIT EINEM VERLÄNGERSKABEL ODER RÜCKSEITE, DAMIT ES NICHT ZU STROMSCHLÄGEN KOMMT. IM
EINER STECKDOSENLEISTE, WENN DIE STECKERSTIFTE NICHT INNEREN BEFINDEN SICH KEINE VOM BENUTZER ZU WARTENDEN
VOLLSTÄNDIG EINGEFÜHRT WERDEN KÖNNEN. KOMPONENTEN. LASSEN SIE WARTUNGSARBEITEN VON
QUALIFIZIERTEN WARTUNGSTECHNIKERN DURCHFÜHREN.
ÖFFNEN SIE DAS GEHÄUSE NICHT, DA SICH IM INNEREN
KOMPONENTEN BEFINDEN, DIE UNTER HOCHSPANNUNG STEHEN. Dieses Symbol weist den Benutzer auf nicht isolierte
LASSEN SIE WARTUNGSARBEITEN VON QUALIFIZIERTEN spannungsführende Komponenten im Gerät hin, die Stromschläge
WARTUNGSTECHNIKERN DURCHFÜHREN. verursachen können. Aus diesem Grund dürfen Sie keinesfalls
Kontakt mit einer Komponente im Geräteinneren herstellen.
Dieses Symbol weist den Benutzer auf wichtige Informationen zu
Betrieb und Pflege dieses Geräts hin. Die Informationen sollten
sorgfältig gelesen werden, um Probleme zu vermeiden.
Deutsch
Inhalt der Verpackung
Der Karton* mit Ihrem neuen Monitor MultiSync FE2111SB sollte
folgende Komponenten enthalten:
• Monitor MultiSync FE2111SB mit Schwenk-/Neigefuß
• Netzkabel
• Signalkabel (VGA - VGA)
• Bedienungsanleitung
Bedienungsanleitung • CD-ROM:
Diese enthält die vollständige Bedienungsanleitung im PDF-
Format und weitere Windows-Dateien, wie etwa die INF-Datei
CD-ROM und Farbprofile. Um das vollständige Handbuch anzeigen und
drucken zu können, muss auf dem Computer Acrobat Reader 4.0
installiert sein.
Sales
Office List Netzkabel Signalkabel * Bewahren Sie den Originalkarton und das Verpackungsmaterial
(VGA – VGA) für spätere Transporte des Monitors auf.
Kurzanleitung
Gehen Sie folgendermaßen vor, um den Monitor MultiSync
FE2111SB an Ihr System anzuschließen:
1. Schalten Sie Ihren Computer aus.
2. Installieren Sie gegebenenfalls die Grafikkarte im Computer.
Informationen hierzu finden Sie im Handbuch zur Grafikkarte.
3. PC: Verbinden Sie ein Ende des Signalkabels mit dem
Anschluss der Grafikkarte an Ihrem Computer (Abbildung A.1).
Ziehen Sie die Schrauben fest.
Mac-Adapter Mac: Schließen Sie den MultiSync-Macintosh-Kabeladapter
(nicht (nicht mitgeliefert) an den Computer an (Abbildung B.1).
mitgeliefert) Schließen Sie ein Ende des Signalkabels an den Macintosh-
Kabeladapter an (Abbildung B.1).
Abbildung A.1 Abbildung B.1
HINWEIS: Für einige Macintosh-Systeme ist kein Macintosh-
Kabeladapter erforderlich.
Stromsteckdose 4. Stecken Sie das andere Ende des Signalkabels in den
Anschluss auf der Rückseite des Monitors ein.
HINWEIS: Eine fehlerhafte Kabelverbindung kann zu
Betriebsfehlern, verminderter Anzeigequalität und
Beschädigungen von Komponenten des CRT-Monitors führen.
5. Die INF-Datei für Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP befindet sich auf
der CD-ROM, die mit dem Monitor geliefert wird.
Netzkabel 6. Stecken Sie ein Ende des Netzkabels auf der Rückseite des
Monitors und das andere Ende in die Steckdose ein
(Abbildung C.1).
7. Schalten Sie den Monitor ein (Abbildung D.1).
Abbildung C.1
8. Schalten Sie den Computer ein.
HINWEIS: Treten Probleme auf, beachten Sie das Kapitel
Netzschalter
Fehlerbehebung dieser Bedienungsanleitung.
Betriebsanzeige
Abbildung D.1
Deutsch-1
03_German 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Bedienelemente
Die OSM-Bedienelemente (On-Screen-Manager) auf der Vorderseite Größen- und Positionseinstellungen
des Monitors haben folgende Funktionen: Autom. Einst: Automatische Einstellung der horizontalen und vertikalen
Hauptmenü Untermenü Bildgröße sowie Positionseinstellungen für unterschiedliche Timings.
EXIT Schließt das OSM- Führt Sie zum HINWEIS: Die automatische Einstellung steht nicht zur Verfügung, wenn
Menü. Hauptmenü der OSM-
kein Bildsignal oder ein geringer Bildsignaleingang vorhanden ist.
Steuerungen zurück.
HINWEIS: Deaktiviert das OSM-Menü und aktiviert es, wenn OSM ausgeschaltet
Links/Rechts: Bild horizontal nach links oder rechts verschieben.
ist. Unten/Oben: Bild vertikal nach oben oder unten verschieben.
CONTROL / Verschiebt die Markierung Verschiebt die Markierung Schmal/Breit: Horizontale Größe des Bildes verringern oder erhöhen.
nach links oder rechts, um nach links oder rechts, Klein/Groß: Vertikale Größe des Bildes verringern oder erhöhen.
eines der Untermenüs um eine der Steuerungen
auszuwählen. auszuwählen.
HINWEIS: Wenn das OSM-Menü deaktiviert ist, dienen diese Tasten als Farbsteuerung/Farbsteuerungssystem
Direktzugriff auf die Helligkeitseinstellung. Mit den vordefinierten Farbeinstellungen 1 bis 5 kann die gewünschte
Farbeinstellung aktiviert werden. Der Balken wird durch die
CONTROL -/+ Keine Funktion. Verschiebt die Markierung
in Richtung – oder +, um Farbeinstellungsauswahl 1, 2, 3, sRGB oder 5 ersetzt. Jede
den Wert zu verringern Farbeinstellung wurde im Werk auf den angegebenen Kelvin-Wert
bzw. zu erhöhen. abgeglichen. Wenn Sie eine Einstellung ändern, wird die Einstellung
nicht mehr mit „Kelvin“ bezeichnet, sondern mit „Anwender“.
HINWEIS: Deaktiviert das OSM-Menü und dient zur Einstellung des Kontrasts,
wenn der Direktzugriff aktiviert ist. HINWEIS: Im Modus sRGB können Sie die einzelnen Farben nicht
einstellen.
SELECT/SB MODE Öffnet das Untermenü. Keine Funktion.
Rot, Grün, Blau: Das Farbsteuerungssystem verringert und erhöht je
Wenn OSM deaktiviert ist, dient diese Taste als
Funktionstaste für SuperBright (SB). Der Benutzer kann
nach Auswahl die Intensität der Farbstrahlen für Rot, Grün und Blau. Die
zwischen SB-MODUS AUS, SB-MODUS 1 und SB- Änderung der Farben ist auf dem Bildschirm sichtbar. Die Balken zeigen
MODUS 2 wählen. Beim ersten Drücken der Taste wird die Veränderung des Farbwerts (Erhöhung oder Verringerung) an.
der aktuelle SB-Modus angezeigt. Wird diese Taste Modus sRGB: Der Modus sRGB gewährleistet immer die geeignete
innerhalb von 3 Sekunden erneut gedrückt, wechselt der
Farbanpassung für die Bilddarstellung. Die Farbanteile für Rot, Grün
SB-Modus in den jeweils nächsten Modus. Wenn der
Modus beispielsweise auf SB-MODUS AUS gesetzt ist und Blau können nicht unabhängig voneinander eingestellt werden.
und die Taste innerhalb von 3 Sekunden zweimal HINWEIS: In diesem Modus können Farbsteuerung, Helligkeit und
gedrückt wird, ändert sich der SB-Modus in SB MODUS 1 Kontrast nicht eingestellt werden.
usw. Die Farbtemperatur im jeweiligen SB-Modus wird
durch die entsprechende Farbsteuerung angepasst, mit
Ausnahme des Modus sRGB, bei dem die
Farbeinstellung nicht angepasst werden kann. Wenn das
Geometrie-Einstellungen
Gerät ausgeschaltet wird, wird es auf SB-MODUS AUS Menü der Geometrie-Einstellungen
zurückgesetzt. Mit den Geometrie-Einstellungen können die Krümmung und die
SB-Modus AUS: für textbasierte Bilder (normale Seitenwinkel des Bildes korrigiert werden.
Verwendung) Ein/Aus (Kissenausgleich): Krümmung der Seiten nach innen oder
SB-Modus 1 EIN: für Bilder außen verringern oder erhöhen.
SB-Modus 2 EIN: für bewegliche Bilder, wie
beispielsweise Filme auf DVD Links/Rechts (Kissenverzerrung): Krümmung der Seiten nach links
oder rechts verringern oder erhöhen.
RESET Setzt alle Steuerungen im Setzt die markierte
markierten Menü auf die Steuerung auf die Parallel (Parallelogramm): Neigung der Bildseiten nach links oder
Werkseinstellungen zurück. Werkseinstellung zurück. rechts justieren.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie RESET im Haupt- oder Untermenü drücken, wird ein Trapez: Breite des unteren Bildrandes an die Breite des oberen
Fenster mit einer Warnung angezeigt, in dem Sie die Rücksetzfunktion Bildrandes anpassen.
auswählen können.
Drehen (Rasterlage): Das gesamte Bild wird im oder gegen den
Uhrzeigersinn gedreht.
Helligkeit-/Kontrast-Steuerungen Eckenkorrektur: Mit dieser Funktion kann die Geometrie der
Helligkeit: Passt die Bild- und Hintergrundhelligkeit des Bildschirms Bildkanten justiert werden. Verfügbare Optionen sind: Oben, Entzerrung
an. oben, Unten oder Entzerrung unten.
Kontrast: Ändert die Bildhelligkeit im Verhältnis zum Hintergrund.
Entmagnetisierung: Mit dieser Funktion werden magnetische Hilfsfunktionen 1
Streufelder beseitigt, die den Verlauf des Elektronenstrahls stören. Dies Moiré-Reduzierung: Der Moiré-Effekt erzeugt ein wellenförmiges
führt zu besserer Farbreinheit, Bildschärfe und Konvergenz. Während Muster, das manchmal auf dem Bildschirm zu sehen ist. Das Muster
des Entmagnetisierungsvorgangs wackelt das Bild und die wiederholt sich und überlagert sich in der Struktur des angezeigten
Farbwiedergabe wird kurzzeitig verfälscht. Bildes. Der Effekt kann in verschiedenen Anwendungen unterschiedlich
HINWEIS: Zwischen jeder Ausführung der Entmagnetisierungsfunktion stark auftreten. Mit den Tasten -/+ kann der Moiré-Effekt minimiert
sollten mindestens 20 Minuten liegen. werden.
Konvergenz: Die drei Grundfarben (Rot, Grün, Blau) werden zu
Konstante Helligkeit: Bewahrt die Helligkeit und Farbreinheit des
gleichen Teilen überlagert, sodass sich Weiß ergibt. Mit dieser Funktion
Bildschirms über die normale Lebensdauer des Monitors.
kann sichergestellt werden, dass eine weiße Linie auf dem Bildschirm
Für die Funktion Konstante Helligkeit ist eine 30-minütige
so scharf und deutlich wie möglich angezeigt wird.
Aufwärmphase des Monitors erforderlich, bevor sie voll funktionsfähig
ist. • Mit KONVERGENZ (HOR.) kann die Ausrichtung der weißen Linien
nach links und rechts korrigiert werden.
• Mit KONVERGENZ (VER.) kann die Ausrichtung der weißen Linien
nach oben und unten korrigiert werden.
Deutsch-2
03_German 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Linearität: Diese Option dient zur Einstellung der geometrisch exakten
Bildwiedergabe. Mit dieser Funktion wird sichergestellt, dass ein Kreis
Information
Anzeigemodus: Die aktuellen Einstellungen für Modus und
mit dem Solldurchmesser 2 cm überall auf dem Bildschirm auch
Bildwiederholfrequenz des Monitors.
tatsächlich mit diesem Durchmesser erscheint. Die vertikale Linearität
lässt sich am besten folgendermaßen bestimmen: Monitorinformation: Die Modell- und die Seriennummer des
• Zeichnen Sie mithilfe einer Grafikanwendung, die über eine Monitors.
Linealfunktion verfügt, horizontale Linien mit gleichmäßigem Meldung zur Wiederholrate: Wenn das an den Monitor geleitete
Abstand. Bildsignal eine zu geringe Wiederholrate vorgibt, wird eine
• Korrigieren Sie die Ausrichtung der Linien am oberen und unteren entsprechende Meldung angezeigt. Weitere Informationen hierzu
Bildschirmrand mit der vertikalen Lageeinstellung. finden Sie im Handbuch zur Grafikkarte bzw. zum Computer.
• Korrigieren Sie den Abstand zwischen den Linien im mittleren und
oberen Bildschirmbereich mit der Einstellfunktion LINEARITÄT
(VER.).
GlobalSync-Funktion: Unreinheiten in der Bilddarstellung, die durch
das Magnetfeld der Erde verursacht werden, lassen sich beheben. In
Deutsch
den Untermenüs (GLOBALSYNC, OBEN LINKS, OBEN RECHTS,
UNTEN LINKS oder UNTEN RECHTS) ist mit den Tasten –/+ ein
Feinabgleich der GlobalSync-Korrekturen möglich.
HINWEIS: NEC empfiehlt die GlobalSync-Korrektur durchzuführen,
während eine typische Anwendung, wie eine Textverarbeitung oder
eine Tabellenkalkulation, ausgeführt wird.
Hilfsfunktionen 2
Sprache: Die OSM-Steuerungsmenüs sind in 6 Sprachen verfügbar.
OSM-Position: Sie können festlegen, wo das OSM-Steuerungsmenü
auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt werden soll. Die Position kann nach
oben, unten, links oder rechts verschoben werden.
OSM Anzeigedauer: Das OSM-Steuerungsmenü wird ausgeblendet,
wenn es nicht mehr verwendet wird. Im Untermenü „OSM
Anzeigedauer“ können Sie festlegen, nach welchem Zeitraum das
OSM-Steuerungsmenü ausgeblendet wird, wenn der Benutzer keine
Taste drückt. Der Wert kann in Schritten von 5 Sekunden zwischen 5
und 120 Sekunden eingestellt werden.
OSM Abschaltung: Mit „OSM Abschaltung“ werden alle OSM-
Funktionen bis auf „Helligkeit“ und „Kontrast“ gesperrt. Wenn Sie
versuchen, auf OSM-Funktionen zuzugreifen, während diese Sperre
aktiviert ist, wird eine Meldung mit einem entsprechenden Hinweis
angezeigt. Um die Funktion „OSM Abschaltung“ zu aktivieren, halten
Sie die Tasten SELECT und + gleichzeitig gedrückt. Um die Funktion
„OSM Abschaltung“ zu deaktivieren, halten Sie die Tasten SELECT
und + gleichzeitig gedrückt.
Modus „IPM-System aus“:
Freigegeben: Das IPM-System arbeitet normal, alle Energiesparstufen
werden benutzt.
Gesperrt: Der Ausschaltmodus des IPM-Systems wird nicht benutzt.
HINWEIS: Für Standardcomputer und -grafikkarten sollte die
Voreinstellung FREIGEGEBEN beibehalten werden.
HINWEIS: Lassen Sie den MultiSync-Monitor nicht eingeschaltet, wenn
„Kein Signal“ angezeigt wird. Andernfalls könnte sich das Bild der
Meldung „Kein Signal“ auf dem Bildschirm einbrennen.
EdgeLock (Flankensperre): Wird der Monitor mit einem nicht
standardgemäßen Signaltiming betrieben, erscheint das Bild eventuell Erklärung des Herstellers
dunkler als normal oder es weist Farbabweichungen auf. Mit der
Funktion „EdgeLock“ wird das Bild auf normale Werte korrigiert.
Wir bestätigen hiermit, dass der Farbmonitor MultiSync
Direktzugriff: Mit dieser Option können Sie die Tasten / zur FE2111SB folgenden Richtlinien entspricht:
Helligkeitseinstellung und die Tasten –/+ zur Kontrasteinstellung EG-Direktive 73/23/EG:
verwenden. – EN 60950
Werkseinstellung: Mit der Option „Werkseinstellung“ werden die EG-Direktive 89/336/EG:
meisten OSM-Einstellungen wieder auf die Werkseinstellungen – EN 55022
zurückgesetzt. Es wird eine entsprechende Warnmeldung angezeigt, – EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
die Sie bestätigen müssen. Einzelne Einstellungen können durch
– EN 55024
Markieren der betreffenden Steuerung und anschließendes Drücken
erfüllt und mit folgendem Siegel gekennzeichnet ist:
der Taste RESET zurückgesetzt werden.

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Deutsch-3
03_German 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Einsatzempfehlungen
DURCH RICHTIGE AUFSTELLUNG UND
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen und Pflege
EINSTELLUNG DES MONITORS KÖNNEN
BEACHTEN SIE ZUR ERZIELUNG ERMÜDUNGSERSCHEINUNGEN VON
OPTIMALER LEISTUNG DIE FOLGENDEN AUGEN, SCHULTERN UND NACKEN
HINWEISE ZUM EINRICHTEN VERMIEDEN WERDEN. BEACHTEN SIE
UND NUTZEN DES FARBMONITORS BEI DER AUFSTELLUNG DES MONITORS
MULTISYNC FE2111SB: FOLGENDES:
• ÖFFNEN SIE DEN MONITOR NICHT. Es befinden sich keine vom
Benutzer zu wartenden Teile im Inneren. Das Öffnen oder • Stellen Sie den Monitor so auf,
Abnehmen der Abdeckungen kann zu gefährlichen Stromschlägen dass sich die Oberkante des
führen und birgt weitere Risiken. Lassen Sie alle Wartungsarbeiten Bildschirms auf Augenhöhe
von qualifizierten Wartungstechnikern durchführen. oder knapp darunter befindet.
• Lassen Sie keine Flüssigkeiten in das Gehäuse gelangen, und Ihre Augen sollten leicht nach
stellen Sie den Monitor in trockenen Räumen auf. unten gerichtet sein, wenn Sie
• Führen Sie keinesfalls Objekte in die Gehäuseschlitze ein, da auf die Bildschirmmitte blicken.
spannungsführende Teile berührt werden können, was zu • Platzieren Sie den Monitor in
schmerzhaften oder gefährlichen Stromschlägen, zu Feuer oder zu einem Abstand von 40-70 cm
Beschädigungen des Geräts führen kann. von Ihren Augen. Der optimale
• Legen Sie keine schweren Objekte auf das Netzkabel. Abstand beträgt 60 cm.
Beschädigungen des Kabels können zu Stromschlägen oder Feuer • Entspannen Sie Ihre Augen
führen. regelmäßig, indem Sie ein Objekt fokussieren, dass sich in
• Stellen Sie dieses Produkt nicht auf wackelige oder instabile einer Entfernung von mindestens 6 m befindet. Blinzeln Sie
Flächen, Wagen oder Tische, da der Monitor fallen und dabei häufig.
schwer beschädigt werden könnte. • Stellen Sie den Monitor in einem 90°-Winkel zu Fenstern und
• Halten Sie den Monitor fern von Hochleistungstransformatoren, anderen Lichtquellen auf, um Blendung und Reflexionen zu
elektrischen Motoren und sonstigen Geräten wie verhindern. Neigen Sie den Monitor in einem Winkel, der
Lautsprecherboxen oder Ventilatoren, die starke magnetische Reflexionen der Deckenleuchten auf dem Bildschirm verhindert.
Felder erzeugen können. • Ist das dargestellte Bild aufgrund von Reflexionen nur schwer
• Wenn möglich, stellen Sie den Monitor so auf, dass er nach Osten zu erkennen, sollten Sie einen Blendschutzfilter verwenden.
weist, um die Wirkung des magnetischen Erdfeldes zu minimieren. • Reinigen Sie den Monitor.
• Wird die Ausrichtung des Monitors während des Einschaltvorgangs Die Oberfläche dieses Monitors ist mit einer speziellen
geändert, kann dies zu einer Entfärbung des Bildes führen. Beschichtung versehen, um Reflexionen und eine statische
Schalten Sie in solchen Fällen den Monitor für 20 Minuten aus und Aufladung der Glasoberfläche zu vermeiden.
dann wieder ein. Verwenden Sie zum Entfernen von Staub ein weiches,
• Achten Sie bei Verwendung des international ausgelieferten 100- fusselfreies Tuch aus Baumwolle oder einem vergleichbaren
120/220-240V-Wechselstromnetzteils des Monitors MultiSync Material und ein nicht alkoholisches, neutrales und nicht
FE2111SB auf Verwendung eines Netzkabels, das den scheuerndes Reinigungsmittel, um Beschädigungen der
Anschlusswerten der Netzsteckdose entspricht. Das Netzkabel empfindlichen Oberflächenbeschichtung zu verhindern. Ist eine
muss in Ihrem Land zugelassen sein und den gültigen intensivere Reinigung erforderlich, befeuchten Sie ein weiches
Sicherheitsbestimmungen entsprechen. (In Europa muss Typ Tuch mit Wasser oder einem sanften Neutralreiniger, der mit
H05VV-F 3G, 0,7 mm2 verwendet werden.) viel Wasser verdünnt ist, und verwenden Sie dieses nach dem
• Verwenden Sie in Großbritannien für diesen Monitor ein BS- Auswringen des Wassers, um die Glasoberfläche zu reinigen.
zugelassenes Netzkabel mit angeformtem Stecker. Der Stecker VORSICHT: Die folgenden Reinigungsmittel führen zu einer
muss mit einer schwarzen Sicherung (5 A) ausgestattet sein. Beschädigung der Kathodenstrahlröhre, wenn sie zur Reinigung
Setzen Sie sich mit Ihrem Händler in Verbindung, wenn der Monitor der Glasoberfläche verwendet werden: Benzol, Verdünner, säure-
ohne Netzkabel geliefert wurde. bzw. laugenhaltige Reinigungsmittel, alkoholische Reinigungsmittel,
Reinigungsmittel mit Scheuerpulver, Reinigungsmittel mit
Unter den folgenden Bedingungen müssen Sie den Monitor sofort vom
antistatischen Zusatzstoffen, scharfe Reinigungsmittel.
Stromnetz trennen und sich mit einem qualifizierten Wartungstechniker
in Verbindung setzen: • Stellen Sie Helligkeit und Kontrast des Monitors mit den
• Das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker ist beschädigt. entsprechenden Steuerungen ein, um die Lesbarkeit zu optimieren.
• Flüssigkeit wurde über den Monitor gegossen oder Gegenstände • Stellen Sie neben dem Monitor einen Dokumentenhalter auf.
sind in das Gehäuse gefallen. • Platzieren Sie das beim Tippen häufiger betrachtete Objekt
• Der Monitor wurde Regen oder Wasser ausgesetzt. (Monitor oder Dokumentenhalter) direkt vor Ihnen, damit Sie
den Kopf seltener drehen müssen.
• Der Monitor wurde fallen gelassen oder das Gehäuse wurde
beschädigt. • Lassen Sie Ihre Augen regelmäßig untersuchen.
• Der Monitor arbeitet trotz Beachtung der Bedienungsanleitung Ergonomie

nicht ordnungsgemäß. Wir empfehlen folgendes Vorgehen, um eine ergonomisch optimale
• Achten Sie auf ausreichende Luftzufuhr, damit die Arbeitsumgebung einzurichten:
entstehende Wärme abgeführt werden kann. Decken • Korrigieren Sie die Helligkeit, bis das Hintergrundraster nicht
Sie die Lüftungsschlitze nicht ab, und stellen Sie den mehr erkennbar ist.
VORSICHT Monitor nicht neben Heizkörpern oder anderen • Verwenden Sie nicht die Maximaleinstellung der
Wärmequellen auf. Stellen Sie keine Gegenstände auf Kontraststeuerung.
den Monitor.
• Verwenden Sie bei Standardsignalen die voreingestellten
• Durch Ziehen des Netzkabelsteckers kann das Gerät Größen- und Positionseinstellungen.
vom Stromnetz getrennt werden. Der Monitor muss in
• Verwenden Sie die voreingestellten Farbeinstellungen und die
der Nähe einer Steckdose aufgestellt werden, die leicht
horizontalen Seiteneinstellungen.
zugänglich ist.
• Verwenden Sie Signale ohne Zeilensprung (Non-Interlaced) mit
• Transportieren Sie den Monitor vorsichtig. Bewahren
einer vertikalen Wiederholfrequenz von 75-160 Hz.
Sie die Verpackung für spätere Transporte auf.
• Verwenden Sie die Primärfarbe Blau nicht auf schwarzem
Hintergrund, da dies die Lesbarkeit beeinträchtigt und aufgrund des
geringen Kontrasts zu starker Ermüdung der Augen führen kann.
Deutsch-4
03_German 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
ΓΙΑ ΝΑ ΑΠΟΦΥΓΕΤΕ ΤΟΝ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟ ΠΥΡΚΑΓΙΑΣ Ή ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑΣ, ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΣ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑΣ • ΜΗΝ ΑΝΟΙΓΕΤΕ
ΜΗΝ ΕΚΘΕΤΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΗ ΤΗ ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΣΕ ΒΡΟΧΗ Ή ΥΓΡΑΣΙΑ. ΕΠΙΣΗΣ,
ΜΗ ΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΠΟΙΕΙΤΕ ΤΟ ΠΟΛΩΜΕΝΟ ΦΙΣ ΑΥΤΗΣ ΤΗΣ ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗΣ ΜΕ ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: ΓΙΑ ΝΑ ΜΕΙΩΣΕΤΕ ΤΟΝ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑΣ, ΜΗΝ
ΥΠΟ∆ΟΧΗ ΚΑΛΩ∆ΙΟΥ ΕΠΕΚΤΑΣΗΣ βΗ ΑΛΛΕΣ ΕΞΟ∆ΟΥΣ ΕΑΝ ΟΙ ΑΦΑΙΡΕΙΤΕ ΤΟ ΚΑΛΥΜΜΑ (ΜΠΡΟΣΤΙΝΟ βΗ ΠΙΣΩ). ΚΑΝΕΝΑ ΕΞΑΡΤΗΜΑ ΤΗΣ
ΑΚΡΟ∆ΕΚΤΕΣ ΤΟΥ ΦΙΣ ∆ΕΝ ΜΠΟΡΟΥΝ ΝΑ ΕΙΣΑΧΘΟΥΝ ΠΛΗΡΩΣ. ΟΘΟΝΗΣ ∆ΕΝ ΜΠΟΡΕΙ ΝΑ ΕΠΙΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΕΙ ΑΠΟ ΤΟ ΧΡΗΣΤΗ. ΓΙΑ ΤΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ
ΑΠΕΥΘΥΝΘΕΙΤΕ ΣΤΟ ΕΞΟΥΣΙΟ∆ΟΤΗΜΕΝΟ ΠΡΟΣΩΠΙΚΟ ΤΟΥ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.
ΑΠΟΦΥΓΕΤΕ ΝΑ ΑΝΟΙΓΕΤΕ ΤΗ ΣΥΣΚΕΥΗ ΚΑΘΩΣ ΣΤΟ ΕΣΩΤΕΡΙΚΟ
ΥΠΑΡΧΟΥΝ ΕΞΑΡΤΗΜΑΤΑ ΜΕ ΥΨΗΛΗ ΤΑΣΗ. ΓΙΑ ΤΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ Αυτ το σύµβολο προειδοποιεί το χρήστη τι στο εσωτερικ της
ΑΠΕΥΘΥΝΘΕΙΤΕ ΣΤΟ ΕΞΟΥΣΙΟ∆ΟΤΗΜΕΝΟ ΠΡΟΣΩΠΙΚΟ ΤΟΥ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ. συσκευής υπάρχουν εξαρτήµατα χωρίς µνωση µε αρκετά υψηλή
τάση ώστε να προκληθεί ηλεκτροπληξία. Συνεπώς, είναι επικίνδυνο
να αγγίζετε τα εξαρτήµατα στο εσωτερικ της συσκευής.
Αυτ το σύµβολο προειδοποιεί το χρήστη τι περιλαµβάνονται
σηµαντικές οδηγίες σχετικά µε τη λειτουργία και τη συντήρηση
αυτής της συσκευής. Συνεπώς, πρέπει να τις διαβάσετε
προσεκτικά ώστε να αποφύγετε τυχν προβλήµατα.
Περιεχµενα
Η συσκευασία* της νέας σας οθνης MultiSync FE2111SB πρέπει
να περιλαµβάνει τα ακλουθα:
• Οθνη ΜultiSync FE2111SB µε βάση κλίσης/περιστροφής
• Καλώδιο Ρεύµατος
• Καλώδιο Οπτικού Σήµατος (VGA – VGA)
Ελληνικά
• Οδηγίες Χρήσης
Οδηγίες Χρήσης • CD-ROM:
Περιλαµβάνει πλήρεις Οδηγίες Χρήσης σε µορφή PDF και
αρχεία για τα Windows (αρχείο πληροφοριών και έγχρωµη
CD-ROM ανάλυση). Για να δείτε τις πλήρεις Οδηγίες Χρήσης, θα
πρέπει να έχετε εγκαταστήσει στον υπολογιστή σας το
πργραµµα Acrobat Reader 4.0.
Sales
Office List Καλώδιο Καλώδιο Οπτικού Σήµατος * Θυµηθείτε να φυλάξετε το αρχικ κουτί και τα υλικά
Ρεύµατος (VGA – VGA) συσκευασίας για να τα χρησιµοποιήσετε σε περίπτωση
µεταφοράς ή αποστολής της οθνης.
Γρήγορη Εκκίνηση
Για να συνδέσετε την οθνη MultiSync FE2111SB στο σύστηµά
σας, ακολουθήστε τις παρακάτω οδηγίες:
1. Κλείστε τον διακπτη λειτουργίας του υπολογιστή σας.
2. Εάν χρειάζεται, εγκαταστήστε την κάρτα οθνης στον
υπολογιστή σας. Για περισστερες πληροφορίες,
συµβουλευτείτε το εγχειρίδιο της κάρτας οθνης.
3. Για Υπολογιστή PC: Συνδέστε το ένα άκρο του καλωδίου
σήµατος στο συνδετήρα της κάρτας οθνης του
Αντάπτορ για υπολογιστή σας (Σχήµα A.1). Σφίξτε λες τις βίδες.
Macintosh (δεν Για Macintosh: Συνδέστε το αντάπτορ του καλωδίου
περιλαµβάνεται) MultiSync Macintosh (δεν περιλαµβάνεται στη συσκευασία)
στον υπολογιστή (Σχήµα B.1). Συνδέστε το ένα άκρο του
Σχήµα A.1 Σχήµα B.1
καλωδίου σήµατος στο αντάπτορ του καλωδίου για
Macintosh (Σχήµα B.1).
Πρίζα ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Σε ορισµένα συστήµατα Macintosh δεν
απαιτείται αντάπτορ καλωδίου του Macintosh.
4. Συνδέστε το άλλο άκρο του καλωδίου σήµατος στο πίσω
µέρος της οθνης.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Λανθασµένες συνδέσεις καλωδίων µπορεί να
προκαλέσουν κακή λειτουργία, µειωµένη ποιτητα εικνας/
Καλώδιο
βλάβη των εξαρτηµάτων της οθνης καθοδικού σωλήνα
Ρεύµατος
(CRT).
5. Το αρχείο πληροφοριών Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP για την
οθνη MultiSync περιέχεται στο CD-ROM, το οποίο
Σχήµα Γ.1 παραδίδεται µαζί µε την οθνη.
6. Συνδέστε το ένα άκρο του καλωδίου ρεύµατος στην είσοδο
Εναλλασσµενου Ρεύµατος στο πίσω µέρος της οθνης και
∆ιακπτης Λειτουργίας
το άλλο άκρο στην πρίζα (Σχήµα Γ.1).
7. Ανοίξτε το διακπτη λειτουργίας της οθνης (Σχήµα ∆.1).
8. Ανοίξτε τον Υπολογιστή.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Εάν αντιµετωπίσετε οποιοδήποτε πρβληµα,
συµβουλευτείτε το κεφάλαιο Εντοπισµού Βλαβών στις
Ενδεικτική Λυχνία Λειτουργίας Οδηγίες Χρήσης.
Σχήµα ∆.1
Ελληνικά-1
04_Greek 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Πλήκτρα ελέγχου
Τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου ΟSM (On-Screen Manager - ∆ιαχειριστή Πλήκτρα ελέγχου Μεγέθους και Θέσης
Οθνης) στο µπροστιν µέρος της οθνης, λειτουργούν µε τον AutoAdjust (Αυτµατη Ρύθµιση): Ρυθµίζει αυτµατα τις οριζντιες
παρακάτω τρπο: και κάθετες τιµές του µεγέθους και της θέσης για τις
Κύριο Μενού Υποµενού εφαρµοζµενες τιµές χρονισµού.
EXIT Εξοδος απ το Εξοδος στο κύριο µενού
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το AutoAdjust δεν είναι διαθέσιµο ταν δεν υπάρχει
µενού OSM. πλήκτρων ελέγχου OSM.
σήµα εικνας ή το µέγεθος εισδου σήµατος εικνας είναι
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Απενεργοποιεί το µενού OSM και ενεργοποιεί το µενού OSM περιορισµένο.
ταν το OSM είναι εκτς λειτουργίας.
Left/Right (Αριστερά/∆εξιά): Μετακινεί την εικνα οριζντια
CONTROL / Μετακινεί την επιλεγµένη Μετακινεί την επιλεγµένη (αριστερά ή δεξιά).
περιοχή αριστερά/δεξιά για περιοχή αριστερά/δεξιά
την επιλογή ενς για την επιλογή ενς Down/Up (Κάτω/Επάνω): Μετακινεί την εικνα κατακρυφα (επάνω
υποµενού. πλήκτρου ελέγχου. ή κάτω).
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οταν το µενού OSM είναι εκτς λειτουργίας, ενεργεί ως Narrow/Wide (Μείωση/Αύξηση πλάτους): Μειώνει ή αυξάνει το
πλήκτρο Αµεσης Λειτουργίας για τη Φωτειντητα. οριζντιο µέγεθος (πλάτος) της εικνας.
CONTROL -/+ ∆εν εκτελείται καµία Μετακινεί τη µπάρα προς Short/Tall (Μείωση/Αύξηση ύψους): Μειώνει ή αυξάνει το
λειτουργία. την κατεύθυνση - ή + για κατακρυφο µέγεθος (ύψος) της εικνας.
αύξηση ή µείωση της
ρύθµισης.
Ελεγχος χρώµατος/Σύστηµα Ελέγχου Χρώµατος
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Απενεργοποιεί το µενού OSM και χρησιµεύει για τη ρύθµιση
Με τις προεπιλεγµένες χρωµατικές ρυθµίσεις απ το 1 µέχρι το 5
της Αντίθεσης µε το πλήκτρο Αµεσης Λειτουργίας στη θέση "ON"
επιλέγετε την επιθυµητή χρωµατική ρύθµιση. Η µπάρα
SELECT/SB MODE Εισαγωγή στο ∆εν εκτελείται καµία αντικαθίσταται απ την επιλογή της χρωµατικής ρύθµισης απ τις
υποµενού. λειτουργία. 1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5. Κάθε χρωµατική ρύθµιση προσαρµζεται απ το
Οταν το OSM είναι εκτς λειτουργίας, ενεργεί ως εργοστάσιο στην καθορισµένη τιµή Kelvin. Εάν αλλάξετε κάποια
πλήκτρο λειτουργίας για το SuperBright (SB). Ο ρύθµιση, η ονοµασία της ρύθµισης θα αλλάξει απ Kelvin σε
χρήστης µπορεί να επιλέξει µεταξύ των τρπων Custom.
λειτουργίας SB MODE OFF (ΑΠΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ SB), SB
MODE1 (ΤΡΟΠΟΣ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙΑΣ SB 1) και SB MODE2
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το sRGB δεν επιτρέπει τη ρύθµιση κάθε χρώµατος.
(ΤΡΟΠΟΣ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΙΑΣ SB 2). Την πρώτη φορά που θα Red, Green, Blue (Κκκινο, Πράσινο, Μπλε): Το Σύστηµα Ελέγχου
πιέσετε αυτ το πλήκτρο, υποδεικνύεται ο τρέχων Χρώµατος µειώνει ή αυξάνει το κκκινο, πράσινο ή µπλε χρώµα
Τρπος Λειτουργίας SB. Αν επιλεγεί πάλι αυτ το
στην οθνη ανάλογα µε την επιλογή. Η αλλαγή του χρώµατος θα
πλήκτρο εντς 3 δευτερολέπτων, ο τρπος λειτουργίας
SB MODE θα µεταβεί στον επµενο SB MODE. Για εµφανιστεί στην οθνη και η κατεύθυνση (µείωση ή αύξηση) θα
παράδειγµα, ταν ο τρέχων τρπος λειτουργίας είναι φαίνεται απ τις µπάρες.
SB MODE OFF, αν πιέσετε το πλήκτρο δυο φορές εντς sRGB Mode (Λειτουργία sRGB): Η λειτουργία sRGB εµφανίζει την
3 δευτερολέπτων ο SB MODE θα µεταβληθεί σε SB εικνα µε την κατάλληλη µίξη χρωµάτων. ∆εν µπορείτε να
MODE1 κ.ο.κ. Η θερµοκρασία χρώµατος σε κάθε Τρπο
αλλάξετε το Κκκινο, το Πράσινο και το Μπλε χρώµα µεµονωµένα.
Λειτουργίας SB ρυθµίζεται απ το κατάλληλο πλήκτρο
ελέγχου χρώµατος εκτς απ τον τρπο λειτουργίας ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οταν είναι ενεργή αυτή η λειτουργία Ελέγχου
sRGB του οποίου οι ρυθµίσεις χρώµατος δε µπορούν να Χρώµατος, δεν µπορείτε να ρυθµίσετε τη Φωτειντητα και την
αλλάξουν. Οταν η συσκευή είναι εκτς λειτουργίας, Αντίθεση.
επαναφέρεται στον αρχικ τρπο λειτουργίας
απενεργοποίησης SB.
ΑΠΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Τρπου Λειτουργίας Super Bright: Πλήκτρα Ελέγχου Γεωµετρίας
για εικνες µε κείµενο (κανονική χρήση) Geometry Controls Menu (Μενού Πλήκτρων Ελέγχου Γεωµετρίας)
ΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Τρπου Λειτουργίας Super Bright
Mode-1: για εικνες Τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου Geometry (Γεωµετρίας) σας επιτρέπουν να
ΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Τρπου Λειτουργίας Super bright προσαρµσετε την καµπυλτητα ή την γωνία των πλευρών της
Mode-2: για κινούµενες εικνες πως οι ταινίες DVD οθνης σας.
RESET Επαναφέρει λα τα Επαναφέρει το In/Out (Αύξηση/Μείωση καµπυλτητας): Μειώνει ή αυξάνει την
πλήκτρα ελέγχου µέσα στο επιλεγµένο πλήκτρο καµπυλτητα των πλευρών είτε προς τα µέσα είτε προς τα έξω.
επιλεγµένο µενού στις ελέγχου στην
εργοστασιακές ρυθµίσεις. εργοστασιακή ρύθµιση.
Left/Right (Eξισορρπηση Αριστερά/∆εξιά): Μειώνει ή αυξάνει την
καµπυλτητα των πλευρών είτε προς τα αριστερά είτε προς τα
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οταν πιέσετε το πλήκτρο RESET στο κύριο και στο υποµενού, δεξιά.
εµφανίζεται ένα προειδοποιητικ παράθυρο διαλγου, το οποίο σας
επιτρέπει να ακυρώσετε τη λειτουργία επαναφοράς. Tilt [Κλίση (παραλληλγραµµο)]: Μειώνει ή αυξάνει την κλίση των
πλευρών προς τα αριστερά ή τα δεξιά.
Align [Ευθυγράµµιση (τραπεζοειδές)]: Μειώνει ή αυξάνει το κάτω
Πλήκτρα ελέγχου Φωτειντητας/Αντίθεσης µέρος της οθνης ώστε να είναι ίσο µε το επάνω µέρος.
Brightness (Φωτειντητα): Ρυθµίζει τη συνολική φωτειντητα της
εικνας και του φντου της οθνης. Rotate [Περιστροφή (περιστροφή ράστερ)]: Περιστρέφει ολκληρη
την εικνα δεξιστροφα ή αριστερστροφα.
Contrast (Αντίθεση): Ρυθµίζει τη φωτειντητα της οθνης σε
σχέση µε το φντο. Corner Correction (∆ιρθωση Γωνίας): Σας επιτρέπει να ρυθµίσετε
τη γεωµετρία των γωνιών της οθνης – Πάνω Τµήµα,
Αποµαγνητισµς: Εξουδετερώνει τα παραµένοντα µαγνητικά Εξισορρπηση Πάνω Τµήµατος, Κάτω Τµήµα ή Εξισορρπηση Κάτω
πεδία, τα οποία αλλοιώνουν τη σωστή σάρωση των δεσµών των Τµήµατος.
ηλεκτρονίων και επηρεάζουν την καθαρτητα των χρωµάτων της
οθνης, την εστίαση και τη σύγκλιση. Μλις ενεργοποιήσετε
αυτή τη λειτουργία, η εικνα στην οθνη σας θα αναπηδήσει και
θα τρεµοπαίξει ελαφρά καθώς αποµαγνητίζεται η οθνη.
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Μετά απ τη χρήση της λειτουργίας Degauss
(Αποµαγνητισµού) πρέπει να περάσουν 20 τουλάχιστο
λεπτά προτού τη χρησιµοποιήσετε πάλι.
Constant Brightness (Σταθερή Φωτειντητα): ∆ιατηρεί τα επίπεδα
φωτειντητας και χρώµατος της οθνης σταθερά για τη συνήθη
διάρκεια ζωής της οθνης.
Η λειτουργία Σταθερής Φωτειντητας απαιτεί προθέρµανση 30
λεπτών της οθνης πριν το χαρακτηριστικ αυτ να λειτουργήσει
πλήρως.
Ελληνικά-2
04_Greek 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Εργαλεία 1 IPM System Off Mode (Λειτουργία Απενεργοποίησης
Συστήµατος IPM):
Moirι Canceler (Εξουδετέρωση θορύβου Moirι): Ο θρυβος moirι
είναι µία κυµατοµορφή που µπορεί ορισµένες φορές να Ενεργοποίηση: Το Σύστηµα IPM λειτουργεί κανονικά και
εµφανιστεί στην οθνη. Η µορφή αυτή επαναλαµβάνεται και αξιοποιούνται λα τα στάδια εξοικονµησης ενέργειας.
εµφανίζεται επάνω στην εικνα και την παραµορφώνει. Κατά την Απενεργοποίηση: Η λειτουργία απενεργοποίησης του
διάρκεια της χρήσης ορισµένων εφαρµογών, η κυµατοειδής αυτή Συστήµατος IPM δεν χρησιµοποιείται.
µορφή γίνεται πιο εµφανής απ’ τι σε άλλες περιπτώσεις. Για να ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για βασικά συστήµατα και κάρτες γραφικών,
περιορίσετε το θρυβο moirι, ρυθµίστε το επίπεδο διατηρήστε την εργοστασιακή ρύθµιση στη λειτουργία
χρησιµοποιώντας τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου –/+. ΕΝΕΡΓΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ.
Basic Convergence (Βασική Σύγκλιση): Ευθυγραµµίζει και τα τρία ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Μην διατηρείτε ανοιχτή την οθνη MultiSync ταν
χρώµατα (Κ,Π,Μ) για το σχηµατισµ ενς µοναδικού χρώµατος υπάρχει η ένδειξη ‘No Signal’ (∆εν υπάρχει σήµα). Αυτ θα
(λευκ). Ο σκοπς αυτού του πλήκτρου ελέγχου είναι να µπορούσε να προκαλέσει τη συνεχή παραµονή της εικνας στην
διασφαλιστεί η καλύτερη δυνατή καθαρτητα και ευκρίνεια της οθνη λγω της εµφάνισης του σήµατος ‘No Signal’.
λευκής γραµµής που σχηµατίζεται στην οθνη.
• Χρησιµοποιήστε το πλήκτρο CONVERGENCE (HOR.) Edge Lock Control (Πλήκτρο ελέγχου EdgeLock): Η λειτουργία
[ΣΥΓΚΛΙΣΗ (ΟΡΙΖ.)] για να ρυθµίσετε την ευθυγράµµιση των της οθνης σε µη τυποποιηµένο χρονισµ πιθανν να
λευκών γραµµών στην κατεύθυνση αριστερά/δεξιά. προκαλέσει την εµφάνιση των εικνων µε πιο σκοτεινά χρώµατα
απ τι συνήθως ή χρωµατική αλλοίωση. Η χρήση του πλήκτρου
• Χρησιµοποιήστε το πλήκτρο CONVERGENCE (VER.) ελέγχου EdgeLock θα ρυθµίσει τις εικνες στην κανονική τους
[ΣΥΓΚΛΙΣΗ (ΚΑΘ.)] για να ρυθµίσετε την ευθυγράµµιση των κατάσταση.
λευκών γραµµών στην κατεύθυνση πάνω/κάτω.
Hot Key (Πλήκτρο Αµεσης Λειτουργίας): Η επιλογή αυτή σας
Linearity (Γραµµικτητα): Αυτή η επιλογή σας επιτρέπει να επιτρέπει να χρησιµοποιείτε το / ως πλήκτρο ελέγχου
προσαρµσετε τις αποστάσεις των περιοχών της οθνης. Ο
Ελληνικά
φωτειντητας και το –/+ ως πλήκτρο ελέγχου αντίθεσης.
σκοπς αυτής της λειτουργίας ελέγχου είναι να βεβαιωθείτε τι
ένας κύκλος 2 cm είναι πραγµατικά κύκλος 2 cm σε οποιαδήποτε Factory Preset (Εργοστασιακή Ρύθµιση): Επιλέγοντας την
θέση της οθνης. Ο καλύτερος τρπος για να καθορίσετε την Εργοστασιακή Ρύθµιση µπορείτε να επαναφέρετε λες τις
κατακρυφη γραµµικτητα είναι ο ακλουθος: ρυθµίσεις ελέγχου του ∆ιαχειριστή Οθνης OSM, στις
εργοστασιακές ρυθµίσεις. Μία προειδοποίηση θα εµφανιστεί για
• Χαράξτε ισαπέχουσες, οριζντιες γραµµές, χρησιµοποιώντας
να επιβεβαιώσετε πως θέλετε να επαναφέρετε ΟΛΕΣ τις
κάποια σχεδιαστική εφαρµογή που διαθέτει χάρακα.
ρυθµίσεις. Μπορείτε να επαναφέρετε επιµέρους ρυθµίσεις
• Χρησιµοποιήστε το πλήκτρο ελέγχου Κάθετης Εξισορρπησης επιλέγοντας τη λειτουργία ελέγχου που θέλετε να επαναφέρετε
για να ρυθµίσετε τις γραµµές κοντά στο επάνω και στο κάτω και πιέζοντας το πλήκτρο RESET.
µέρος της οθνης σας.
• Χρησιµοποιήστε το LINEARITY (VER.) [ΓΡΑΜΜΙΚΟΤΗΤΑ
(ΚΑΘ.)] για να ρυθµίσετε την απσταση ανάµεσα στις γραµµές
Πληροφορίες
κοντά στο κέντρο και στο επάνω µέρος της οθνης σας. Display Mode (Τρπος Λειτουργίας Οθνης): ∆είχνει τον
παρντα τρπο λειτουργίας και τη ρύθµιση συχντητας της
GlobalSync Control (Ελεγχος GlobalSync): Εξουδετερώνει τις οθνης.
παρεµβολές που µπορεί να προκαλέσει το γήινο µαγνητικ πεδίο
Monitor Info (Πληροφορίες για την οθνη): ∆ηλώνει το µοντέλο
στην εικνα. Οταν βρίσκεστε στα υποµενού (GLOBALSYNC, ΑOω
και τους αριθµούς σειράς της οθνης σας.
ΑUEUUAUά, ΑOω ∆AIEά, ΚάUω ΑUEUUAUά 'Η ΚάUω ∆AIEά),
χρησιµοποιήστε τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου –/+ για να ρυθµίσετε µε Refresh Notifier (Ειδοποίηση Ανανέωσης): Ενα µήνυµα θα σας
ακρίβεια τις διορθώσεις GlobalSync. ειδοποιεί, εάν ο ρυθµς ανανέωσης του σήµατος που
αποστέλλεται στην οθνη απ τον υπολογιστή, είναι πολύ
ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η NEC συνιστά να κάνετε διρθωση GlobalSync
χαµηλς. Για περαιτέρω πληροφορίες, συµβουλευτείτε το
εκτελώντας ταυτχρονα µία τυπική εφαρµογή πως ένα φύλλο
εγχειρίδιο της κάρτας γραφικών ή του συστήµατς σας.
εργασίας ή ένα έγγραφο κειµένου.
Εργαλεία 2
Language (Γλώσσα): Τα µενού ελέγχου OSM είναι διαθέσιµα σε
έξι γλώσσες.
OSM Position (Θέση OSM): Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε την θέση της
οθνης στην οποία θέλετε να εµφανίζεται το µενού των
πλήκτρων ελέγχου του ∆ιαχειριστή Οθνης OSM. Επιλέγοντας τη
Θέση OSM, έχετε τη δυναττητα να ρυθµίσετε χειροκίνητα τη
θέση του µενού ελέγχου OSM αριστερά, δεξιά, πάνω ή κάτω. ∆ήλωση του Κατασκευαστή
OSM Turn Off (Απενεργοποίηση του OSM): Το µενού ελέγχου του
OSM θα παραµείνει ανοικτ για σο χρονικ διάστηµα το Πιστοποιούµε µε το παρν τι η έγχρωµη οθνη
χρησιµοποιείτε. Στο υποµενού απενεργοποίησης του OSM, MultiSync FE2111SB συµµορφώνεται µε την
µπορείτε να επιλέξετε το χρονικ διάστηµα αναµονής της Οδηγία του Ευρωπαïκού Συµβουλίου 73/23/ΕΟΚ:
οθνης, ύστερα απ το τελευταίο πάτηµα κάποιου πλήκτρου, για – EN 60950
να κλείσει το µενού ελέγχου του OSM. Η προεπιλογή γίνεται µε Οδηγία του Ευρωπαïκού Συµβουλίου 89/336/ΕΟΚ:
βήµα 5 δευτερολέπτων µεταξύ 5–120 δευτερολέπτων. – EN 55022
OSM Lock Out (Κλείδωµα του OSM): Αυτ το πλήκτρο ελέγχου – EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
απαγορεύει κάθε πρσβαση σε λες τις λειτουργίες του
– EN 55024
∆ιαχειριστή Οθνης (OSM) πλην του ελέγχου Φωτειντητας και
Αντίθεσης. Οταν επιχειρήσετε να ενεργοποιήσετε τα πλήκτρα και φέρει την ένδειξη
ελέγχου του OSM ενώ αυτ είναι κλειδωµένο, εµφανίζεται µία
οθνη που σας ενηµερώνει τι τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου OSM έχουν
κλειδωθεί. Για να ενεργοποιήσετε τη λειτουργία κλειδώµατος του
OSM, πιέστε το πλήκτρο SELECT, στη συνέχεια πιέστε το
πλήκτρο + και κρατήστε τα πατηµένα ταυτχρονα. Για να NEC-Mitsubishi Electric Visual
απενεργοποιήσετε τη λειτουργία κλειδώµατος του OSM, πιέστε Systems Corporation
SELECT, στη συνέχεια πιέστε το πλήκτρο + και κρατήστε τα 4-13-23, Shibaura,
πατηµένα ταυτχρονα. Minato-Ku
Ελληνικά-3
04_Greek 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Συνιστώµενη Χρήση
Η ΣΩΣΤΗ ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗ ΚΑΙ ΡΥΘΜΙΣΗ
Προφυλάξεις Ασφαλείας και Συντήρηση
ΤΗΣ ΟΘΟΝΗΣ ΜΠΟΡΕΙ ΝΑ ΜΕΙΩΣΕΙ
ΓΙΑ ΒΕΛΤΙΣΤΗ ΑΠΟ∆ΟΣΗ, ΟΤΑΝ ΤΗΝ ΚΟΠΩΣΗ ΤΩΝ ΜΑΤΙΩΝ, ΤΩΝ
ΡΥΘΜΙΖΕΤΕ ΚΑΙ ΧΡΗΣΙΜΟΠΟΙΕΙΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΩΜΩΝ ΚΑΙ ΤΟΥ ΑΥΧΕΝΑ. ΚΑΤΑ ΤΗΝ
ΕΓΧΡΩΜΗ ΟΘΟΝΗ MULTISYNC ΕΠΙΛΟΓΗ ΘΕΣΗΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΘΟΝΗΣ
FE2111SB, ΕΧΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΕΛΕΓΞΤΕ ΤΑ ΕΞΗΣ:
ΣΑΣ ΤΑ ΕΞΗΣ:
• ΜΗΝ ΑΝΟΙΓΕΤΕ ΤΟ ΠΕΡΙΒΛΗΜΑ ΤΗΣ ΟΘΟΝΗΣ. ∆εν υπάρχουν • Ρυθµίστε το ύψος της
εξαρτήµατα στο εσωτερικ της οθνης τα οποία µπορεί να οθνης έτσι ώστε η κορυφή
επισκευάσει ο χρήστης. Αν ανοίξετε ή αφαιρέσετε τα της να βρίσκεται στο ίδιο
καλύµµατα µπορεί να πάθετε ηλεκτροπληξία ή να εκτεθείτε σε ύψος ή λίγο χαµηλτερα
άλλους κινδύνους. Για κάθε επισκευή απευθυνθείτε στο απ το ύψος των µατιών. Το
εξουσιοδοτηµένο προσωπικ του σέρβις. ύψος της οθνης να είναι
• Μη χύνετε υγρά µέσα στο περίβληµα και µην χρησιµοποιείτε τέτοιο ώστε ταν κοιτάζετε
την οθνη κοντά σε νερ. το κέντρο της, να βλέπετε
• Μην εισάγετε οποιοδήποτε αντικείµενο µέσα στις σχισµές του µε κλίση προς τα κάτω.
περιβλήµατος, επειδή µπορεί να έρθει σε επαφή µε σηµεία • Τοποθετήστε την οθνη σε
επικίνδυνης τάσης, και να προκληθούν ζηµιές ή ατυχήµατα, απσταση απ τα µάτια σας
πως ηλεκτροπληξία, πυρκαγιά ή βλάβη του εξοπλισµού. µεταξύ 40 και 70 εκατοστά.
• Μην τοποθετείτε βαριά αντικείµενα πάνω στο καλώδιο Η βέλτιστη απσταση είναι
ρεύµατος. Αν καταστραφεί το καλώδιο, µπορεί να προκληθεί 60 εκατοστά.
ηλεκτροπληξία ή πυρκαγιά. • Περιοδικά, να ξεκουράζετε τα µάτια σας εστιάζοντας σε
• Μην τοποθετείτε την οθνη πάνω σε κεκλιµένη ή ασταθή βάση κάποιο αντικείµενο που βρίσκεται τουλάχιστον 6 µέτρα
ή τραπέζι, επειδή µπορεί να πέσει και να προκληθούν σοβαρές µακριά. Ανοιγοκλείνετε τα µάτια σας συχνά.
βλάβες στην οθνη. • Τοποθετήστε την οθνη υπ γωνία 90° ως προς το
• Κρατήστε την οθνη µακριά απ µετασχηµατιστές υψηλής παράθυρο ή άλλες πηγές φωτισµού για να
έντασης, ηλεκτροκινητήρες και άλλες συσκευές πως ελαχιστοποιήσετε το θάµπωµα και τις αντανακλάσεις.
εξωτερικά ηχεία και ανεµιστήρες, τα οποία µπορεί να Ρυθµίστε την κλίση της οθνης έτσι ώστε να µην
δηµιουργούν ισχυρά µαγνητικά πεδία. αντανακλάται πάνω της ο φωτισµς απ την οροφή.
• Εάν είναι δυνατν, τοποθετήστε την οθνη µε την ψη προς • Αν το ανακλώµενο φως σας εµποδίζει να βλέπετε την
την Ανατολή ώστε να ελαχιστοποιηθούν οι επιδράσεις του εικνα της οθνης, χρησιµοποιήστε ένα κατάλληλο φίλτρο.
γήινου µαγνητικού πεδίου. • Καθαρίζετε την οθνη τακτικά.
• Η αλλαγή της κατεύθυνσης της οθνης ταν βρίσκεται σε Η γυάλινη (CRT) επιφάνεια αυτής της οθνης διαθέτει
λειτουργία, µπορεί να προκαλέσει απώλεια των χρωµάτων της ειδική επικάλυψη για τη µείωση των αντανακλάσεων και του
οθνης. Για να το διορθώσετε, κλείστε την οθνη για 20 λεπτά στατικού ηλεκτρισµού.
και έπειτα ανοίξτε τη πάλι. Επειδή η επικάλυψη της γυάλινης επιφάνειας είναι ευαίσθητη,
• Οταν χρησιµοποιείτε την οθνη MultiSync FE2111SB µε τάση χρησιµοποιήστε ένα µαλακ ύφασµα χωρίς χνούδι (βαµβακερ
τροφοδοσίας εναλλασσοµένου ρεύµατος 100-120/220-240V, να ή ανάλογο) και ουδέτερο διάλυµα καθαρισµού, που δεν χαράζει
χρησιµοποιείτε καλώδιο ρεύµατος κατάλληλο για την τάση και δεν περιέχει οινπνευµα, για να αποµακρύνετε τη σκνη.
παροχής της πρίζας ηλεκτρικού ρεύµατος. Το καλώδιο ρεύµατος Αν απαιτείται βαθύτερος καθαρισµς της οθνης, βρέξτε µε
που χρησιµοποιείτε πρέπει να είναι εγκεκριµένο και να πληροί νερ ή ουδέτερο καθαριστικ διαλυµένο σε άφθονο νερ ένα
τις προδιαγραφές ασφαλείας της χώρας σας. (Στην Ευρώπη, θα µαλακ ύφασµα και αφού το στύψετε, χρησιµοποιήστε το για
πρέπει να χρησιµοποιηθεί ο τύπος H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2) να καθαρίσετε τη γυάλινη επιφάνεια.
• Στην Αγγλία, χρησιµοποιήστε ένα εγκεκριµένο καλώδιο BS µε ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Τα ακλουθα καθαριστικά µέσα θα προκαλέσουν
διαµορφωµένο βύσµα το οποίο να διαθέτει µία µαύρη ασφάλεια ζηµιά στη γυάλινη επιφάνεια CRT κατά τον καθαρισµ της
(5A) εγκαταστηµένη για χρήση µε αυτήν την οθνη. Εάν η µε αυτά: Βενζένιο, διαλυτικά, ξινα/αλκαλικά καθαριστικά,
οθνη δεν συνοδεύεται απ καλώδιο ρεύµατος, απευθυνθείτε καθαριστικά που περιέχουν οινπνευµα, καθαριστικά µε
στον προµηθευτή σας. σκνη που χαράζει, καθαριστικά µε συστατικά κατά του
στατικού ηλεκτρισµού, καθαριστικά γενικού καθαρισµού.
Εάν συµβεί κάποιο απ τα παρακάτω, αποσυνδέστε αµέσως την
οθνη απ την πρίζα και ζητήστε βοήθεια απ το ειδικευµένο • Ρυθµίστε τα πλήκτρα ελέγχου φωτειντητας και αντίθεσης
προσωπικ του σέρβις: της οθνης για να βελτιώσετε την αναγνωσιµτητά της.
• Αν καταστραφούν το καλώδιο ρεύµατος ή το φις. • Χρησιµοποιήστε εξάρτηµα συγκράτησης των εγγράφων,
• Αν χυθούν υγρά ή πέσουν αντικείµενα µέσα στην οθνη. τοποθετώντας το δίπλα στην οθνη.
• Αν η οθνη εκτεθεί στη βροχή ή πέσει πάνω της νερ. • Οταν πληκτρολογείτε, τοποθετήστε αυτ που κοιτάζετε
πολύ συχνά (την οθνη ή το υλικ αναφοράς) κατευθείαν
• Αν η οθνη πέσει κάτω ή υποστεί ζηµιά το περίβληµά της. µπροστά σας ώστε να ελαχιστοποιήσετε τις στροφές της
• Αν, παρά τη συµµρφωση προς τις οδηγίες χρήσης, η οθνη δε κεφαλής κατά τη διάρκεια της πληκτρολγησης.
λειτουργεί κανονικά. • Εξετάζετε τακτικά τα µάτια σας στον οφθαλµίατρο.
• Αφήστε αρκετ χώρο γύρω απ την οθνη για
Εργονοµία
επαρκή αερισµ και ψύξη. Μην καλύπτετε τα
ανοίγµατα αερισµού και µην τοποθετείτε την οθνη Για να επιτύχετε τα µέγιστα οφέλη απ την εργονοµία, σας
κοντά σε σώµατα καλοριφέρ ή άλλες πηγές συνιστούµε τα εξής:
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ
θερµτητας. Μην τοποθετείτε κανένα αντικείµενο • Ρυθµίστε το πλήκτρο ελέγχου Φωτειντητας µέχρις του
στο πάνω µέρος της οθνης. εξαφανιστεί το ράστερ του φντου
• Ο συνδετήρας του καλωδίου τροφοδοσίας αποτελεί • Μη ρυθµίζετε το πλήκτρο ελέγχου Αντίθεσης στη µέγιστη τιµή
το κύριο µέσο αποσύνδεσης του συστήµατος απ το • Χρησιµοποιήστε τις εργοστασιακές ρυθµίσεις των
ρεύµα. Η οθνη πρέπει να εγκατασταθεί κοντά σε πλήκτρων ελέγχου Μεγέθους και Θέσης µε τυποποιηµένα
πρίζα παροχής ρεύµατος ώστε να είναι εύκολη η σήµατα
πρσβαση.
• Χρησιµοποιήστε τις εργοστασιακές ρυθµίσεις των πλήκτρων
• Μεταχειρίζεστε µε προσοχή την οθνη κατά τις ελέγχου Ρύθµισης Χρώµατος και Πλευρών Αριστερά/∆εξιά
µεταφορές. Φυλάξτε τα υλικά της συσκευασίας για
• Χρησιµοποιήστε σήµατα "non-interlaced" µε συχντητα
τις µεταφορές.
κάθετης ανανέωσης µεταξύ 75-160 Hz
• Μη χρησιµοποιείτε ως πρωτεύον χρώµα το µπλε σε σκούρο
φντο, επειδή θα είναι δύσκολο να διαβάσετε την οθνη και
µπορεί να προκληθεί κπωση στα µάτια λγω ανεπαρκούς
αντίθεσης φωτειντητας
Ελληνικά-4
04_Greek 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

ADVERTENCIA PELIGRO
PARA PREVENIR EL PELIGRO DE INCENDIO O DESCARGAS RIESGO DE DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS • NO ABRIR
ELÉCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE PRODUCTO A LA LLUVIA O LA
HUMEDAD. TAMPOCO UTILICE EL ENCHUFE POLARIZADO DE ESTE PELIGRO: EL MONITOR NO CONTIENE PIEZAS QUE DEBA MANIPULAR
PRODUCTO CON UN RECEPTÁCULO DEL CABLE DE EXTENSIÓN U EL USUARIO. DEJE QUE SEA EL PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO
OTRAS TOMAS A MENOS QUE LAS PROLONGACIONES SE PUEDAN QUIEN SE ENCARGUE DE LAS TAREAS DE SERVICIO.
INSERTAR COMPLETAMENTE.
Este símbolo advierte al usuario de que el producto puede contener
NO ABRA LA CAJA DEL MONITOR, YA QUE CONTIENE suficiente voltaje sin aislar como para causar descargas eléctricas.
COMPONENTES DE ALTO VOLTAJE. DEJE QUE SEA EL PERSONAL Por tanto, evite el contacto con cualquier pieza del interior del
DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO QUIEN SE ENCARGUE DE LAS TAREAS monitor.
DE SERVICIO.
Este símbolo advierte al usuario de que se incluye documentación
importante respecto al funcionamiento y el mantenimiento de este
producto. Por ello, debería leerla atentamente para evitar problemas.
Contenido
Su nueva *caja de monitor MultiSync FE2111SB debería contener:
• Un monitor MultiSync FE2111SB con base inclinable/giratoria
• Un cable de alimentación
• Un cable de señal de vídeo (VGA - VGA)
• Un manual del usuario
• Un CD-ROM:
Manual del usuario incluye el manual del usuario completo en formato PDF y
documentos de Windows relacionados (archivo INF y perfil del
color). Para poder acceder al manual del usuario completo, debe
CD-ROM tener Acrobat Reader 4.0 instalado en su PC.
* Recuerde conservar la caja original y el material de embalaje

para poder transportar el monitor en el futuro.
Español
Sales
Office List Cable de Cable de señal de vídeo
alimentación (VGA - VGA)
Inicio rápido
Para conectar el monitor MultiSync FE2111SB a su sistema, siga
estas instrucciones:
1. Apague su ordenador.
2. Si es necesario, instale la tarjeta de visualización en su sistema.
Para más información, consulte el manual de la tarjeta de
visualización.
3. Para los PC: conecte un extremo del cable de señal al conector
de la tarjeta de visualización de su sistema (figura A.1). Apriete
Adaptador todos los tornillos.
para Mac Para los Mac: conecte el adaptador para Macintosh de
(no incluido) MultiSync (no incluido) al ordenador (figura B.1). Conecte un
extremo del cable de señal al adaptador para Macintosh
Figura A.1 Figura B.1
(figura B.1).
NOTA: algunos sistemas Macintosh no necesitan adaptador.
Toma de corriente 4. Conecte el otro extremo del conector de cable de señal a la
parte posterior del monitor.
NOTA: si los cables están mal conectados, es posible que falle
el funcionamiento, se deteriore la calidad de la imagen/los
componentes del monitor CRT.
5. En el CD-ROM que se suministra con el monitor MultiSync
Un cable encontrará el archivo de Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP INF para
de potencia su monitor.
6. Conecte un extremo del cable de alimentación a la entrada de
corriente alterna de la parte trasera del monitor y el otro extremo
a la toma de corriente (figura C.1).
Figura C.1 7. Encienda el monitor (figura D.1).
8. Encienda el ordenador.
Botón de encendido
NOTA: si surgiera algún problema, consulte el apartado
Solución de problemas de este manual del usuario.
Indicador de corriente
Figura D.1
Español-1
05_Spain 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Controles
Los botones de control OSM (On-Screen Manager) situados en la Control del color/sistema de control del color
parte frontal del monitor funcionan del siguiente modo: Con los valores predefinidos 1 a 5 se selecciona la configuración del
Menú principal Submenú color deseada. La barra desaparece y en su lugar se muestra la
EXIT Sale del menú OSM. Sale al menú principal de configuración del color 1, 2, 3, sRGB y 5. Cada configuración del color
los controles OSM. está ajustada de fábrica en escala Kelvin. Si se ajusta una
NOTA: desactiva el menú OSM y, cuando no está en funcionamiento, lo activa.
configuración, su nombre pasará de la escala Kelvin a la configuración
propia del usuario.
CONTROL / Desplaza la zona resaltada Desplaza la zona
a la izquierda/derecha para resaltada a la izquierda/ NOTA: sRGB no permite ajustar los colores.
seleccionar uno de los derecha para seleccionar Rojo, verde, azul: el sistema de control del color reduce o aumenta la
submenús. uno de los controles. proporción de rojo, verde o azul del monitor en función de la opción que
NOTA: cuando el menú OSM está desactivado, funciona como tecla directa para se seleccione. La modificación del color aparecerá en la pantalla y la
Brillo. dirección (aumento o disminución) se mostrará en las barras.
CONTROL -/+ No tiene función. Desplaza la barra con - o Modo sRGB: el modo sRGB ofrece la imagen gestionada por el color
+ para reducir o aumentar adecuado. Los colores rojo, verde y azul no se pueden modificar por
el ajuste. separado.
NOTA: desactiva el menú OSM y ajusta el Contraste si la tecla directa está NOTA: en este modo no se pueden ajustar el control del color, el brillo y
activada. el contraste.
SELECT/SB MODE Accede al submenú. No tiene función.
Cuando el menú OSM está desactivado, funciona como
tecla para el modo SuperBright (SB, superbrillo). El
Controles de Geometría
usuario puede seleccionar SB MODE OFF (modo Menú de los controles de Geometría
superbrillo desactivado), SB MODE1 (modo superbrillo 1) Los controles de Geometría le permiten ajustar la curvatura o el ángulo
o SB MODE2 (modo superbrillo 2). Al pulsar esta tecla de los lados de la visualización.
por primera vez, aparece el modo SB que se está
utilizando. Si vuelve a pulsar esta tecla antes Barril (PCC-AMP): aumenta o disminuye la curvatura de los lados
de que transcurran 3 segundos, el modo cambiará al hacia dentro o hacia fuera.
siguiente. Por ejemplo, si el modo actual es SB MODE Izq./derecha (BALANCE-PIN): aumenta o disminuye la curvatura de
OFF y se pulsa la tecla dos veces en un espacio de 3
segundos, éste pasará a ser SB MODE1, y así
los lados hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha.
sucesivamente. La temperatura del color de cada modo Inclinado (paralelogramo): aumenta o disminuye la inclinación de los
se ajusta con el control de color correspondiente, excepto lados hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha.
en el caso del sRGB, que no permite que se ajuste el
color. Cuando la unidad esté desactivada, recuperará el Alineación (trapezoide): aumenta o disminuye la parte inferior de la
modo SB OFF. pantalla para igualarla a la superior.
Super Bright Mode OFF (modo superbrillo Rotación (rotación de la trama): gira toda la pantalla hacia la derecha
desactivado): para imágenes de texto (uso normal). o hacia la izquierda.
Super Bright Mode-1 ON (modo superbrillo 1 Corrección esquina: permite ajustar las esquinas de la imagen: arriba,
activado): para imágenes.
balance superior, abajo o balance inferior.
Super Bright Mode-2 ON (modo superbrillo 2
activado): para imágenes en movimiento, por ejemplo,
películas en DVD. Herramientas 1
RESET Restablece todos los Restablece la Anular moiré: el moiré es una trama ondulada que puede aparecer a
controles estándar en el configuración de fábrica veces en la pantalla. La trama aparece repetidas veces superpuesta en
menú resaltado. del control resaltado. la imagen y formando ondulaciones. Esta trama se hace más patente al
NOTA: al pulsar RESET en el menú principal y en el submenú, aparecerá una ejecutar determinadas aplicaciones. Para reducir el moiré, ajuste el
ventana de advertencia con la que podrá seleccionar la función de preajuste. nivel con los botones de control –/+.
Converg. básica: alinea los tres colores (R, G, B - rojo, verde y azul)
Controles de brillo/contraste para formar un solo color (blanco). La finalidad de este control es
Brillo: ajusta el brillo de la imagen global y del fondo. garantizar que la línea blanca que aparece en la pantalla sea lo más
nítida y clara posible.
Contraste: ajusta el brillo de la imagen respecto al fondo.
• Utilice el control CONVERGENCIA ESTÁT. H para ajustar la
Degauss: elimina la formación de campos magnéticos dispersos, que alineación de las líneas blancas en dirección izquierda/derecha.
impiden el barrido correcto del haz de electrones y afectan a la pureza
• Utilice el control CONVERGENCIA ESTÁT. V para ajustar la
de los colores, el enfoque y la convergencia de la pantalla. Una vez
alineación de las líneas blancas en dirección arriba/abajo.
activada la pantalla, la imagen saltará y parpadeará un poco mientras
se desmagnetiza. Linealidad: seleccionando esta opción puede ajustar el espaciado del
NOTA: deje transcurrir un intervalo de 20 minutos como mínimo antes área de la pantalla. La finalidad de este control es garantizar que un
de volver a utilizar la función Degauss. círculo de una pulgada sea realmente un círculo de una pulgada
independientemente del lugar de la pantalla en el que se encuentre. La
Constant Brightness (brillo constante): mantiene constantes los mejor manera de determinar la linealidad vertical es la siguiente:
niveles de brillo y color mientras funcione el monitor. • Dibuje líneas horizontales equidistantes utilizando una aplicación de
Para que la función Constant Brightness (brillo constante) funcione dibujo que disponga de una regla.
a pleno rendimiento, el monitor tiene que llevar encendido 30 minutos.
• Utilice el control Balance vertical para ajustar las líneas cerca de la
parte superior e inferior de la pantalla.
Controles de tamaño y posición • Utilice el control LINEALIDAD (VER.) para ajustar el espaciado
Auto ajuste: ajusta automáticamente las opciones de tamaño entre las líneas cercanas al centro y la parte superior de la pantalla.
horizontal y vertical y de posición a las cadencias adecuadas.
Control GlobalSinc: elimina las impurezas de la imagen que puede
NOTA: la función Auto ajuste no está disponible si no se recibe señal causar el campo magnético terrestre. Cuando se encuentre en los
de imagen o si ésta es insuficiente. submenús (GLOBALSINC, IZQUIERDA SUPERIOR, DERECHA
Izq./derecha: desplaza la imagen horizontalmente (hacia la izquierda SUPERIOR, IZQUIERDA INFERIOR o DERECHA INFERIOR, utilice los
o hacia la derecha). botones de control –/+ para sintonizar las correcciones de GlobalSinc.
Abajo/arriba: desplaza la imagen verticalmente (hacia arriba o hacia NOTA: NEC recomienda realizar la corrección de GlobalSinc mientras
abajo). se esté ejecutando una aplicación habitual, como una hoja de cálculo o
un documento de texto.
Est./ancho: aumenta o disminuye el tamaño horizontal de la imagen.
Corto/alto: disminuye o aumenta el tamaño vertical de la imagen.
Español-2
05_Spain 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Herramientas 2
Idioma: los menús del control OSM están disponibles en seis idiomas.
Localización OSM: puede decidir dónde desea que aparezca el menú
de controles de OSM en su pantalla. Seleccionando Localización OSM
podrá ajustar manualmente el menú de controles de OSM a la
izquierda, a la derecha, arriba o abajo.
Actividad OSM: el menú de controles de OSM permanecerá activado
mientras se esté utilizando. En el submenú Actividad OSM puede
indicar cuánto tiempo debe transcurrir desde que se pulsa un botón
por última vez hasta que desaparece el menú de controles de OSM. La
opción preconfigurada consiste en intervalos de 5 segundos, siendo el
mínimo 5 segundos y el máximo 120.
Bloqueo OSM: este control bloquea totalmente el acceso a todas las
funciones de control de OSM excepto Brillo y Contraste. Si se intenta
activar los controles de OSM mientras está activado el modo de
bloqueo, aparecerá una ventana indicando que los controles de OSM
están bloqueados. Para activar la función Bloqueo OSM, pulse
SELECT (seleccionar) y + simultáneamente. Para desactivar la función
Bloqueo OSM, pulse SELECT (seleccionar) y + simultáneamente.
Sistema IPM modo off:
Activado: el sistema IPM está en funcionamiento y se utilizan todos los
tipos de ahorro de energía.
Desactivado: el Modo off del sistema IPM no se utiliza.
NOTA: para sistemas y tarjetas gráficas estándar, conserve la
configuración estándar en ACTIVADO.
NOTA: apague el monitor MultiSync cuando aparezca el mensaje “No
hay señal”. De este modo evitará que se produzca una excesiva
iluminización sobre una superficie de la pantalla, que hará que la
imagen persista.
Español
Control borde: si su monitor funciona con una cadencia distinta de la
estándar, las imágenes podrían ser más oscuras de lo normal o podría
distorsionarse el color. Si utiliza el Control borde podrá ajustar las
imágenes a su estado normal.
Hot Key (tecla directa): esta selección permite utilizar / como
control de brillo y –/+ control de contraste.
Conf. de fábrica: seleccionando la configuración de fábrica podrá
restablecer la mayoría de las configuraciones de control de OSM
originales. Aparecerá un mensaje en la pantalla pidiéndole que
confirme si desea restablecer TODOS los ajustes. Podrá restablecer
cada configuración resaltando el control correspondiente y pulsando el
botón RESET.
Información
Modo visualización: indica el modo y la configuración de frecuencia
actuales del monitor.
Información monitor: indica los números de modelo y de serie del
monitor.
Aviso de refresco: aparecerá un mensaje para advertir de que la
frecuencia de refresco aplicada al monitor es demasiado baja. Para
más información, consulte su tarjeta de visualización o el manual del
sistema.
Declaraciones del fabricante
Por la presente certificamos que el monitor en color
MultiSync FE2111SB cumple la
Directiva 73/23/EEC:
– EN 60950
Directiva 89/336/EEC:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
y se comercializan con las marcas

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-0023, JAPÓN
Español-3
05_Spain 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Uso recomendado
SI EL MONITOR ESTÁ SITUADO Y
Medidas de seguridad y mantenimiento
AJUSTADO CORRECTAMENTE, EL
PARA GARANTIZAR EL RENDIMIENTO USUARIO SENTIRÁ MENOS FATIGA EN
ÓPTIMO DEL PRODUCTO, TENGA EN LOS OJOS, HOMBROS Y CUELLO.
CUENTA LAS SIGUIENTES INSTRUCCIONES CUANDO COLOQUE EL MONITOR,
AL CONFIGURAR Y UTILIZAR EL MONITOR COMPRUEBE LO SIGUIENTE:
EN COLOR MULTISYNC FE2111SB:
• NO ABRA EL MONITOR. No contiene piezas que deba manipular • Ajuste la altura del monitor
el usuario. Si se abren o retiran las cubiertas, existe el riesgo de de forma que la parte
sufrir descargas eléctricas peligrosas u otros daños. Las tareas de superior de la pantalla esté
servicio deberá realizarlas un técnico cualificado. a la altura de los ojos o
• No vierta ningún líquido en la caja ni utilice el monitor cerca del ligeramente por debajo. Sus
agua. ojos deben mirar
• No inserte objetos de ningún tipo en las ranuras de la caja, porque ligeramente hacia abajo al
podrían tocar puntos con tensión peligrosos y ser dañinos o observar el centro de la
letales, o causar descargas eléctricas, fuego o fallos en el equipo. pantalla.
• No deposite objetos pesados sobre el cable de alimentación. Si • Coloque el monitor a 40 cm

éste se dañara, podrían producirse descargas o fuego. de distancia de los ojos
como mínimo y a 70 cm
• No coloque este producto sobre un carro, soporte o mesa inclinado como máximo. La distancia
o inestable, ya que el monitor podría caerse y producirse daños óptima son 60 cm.
graves.
• Descanse la vista periódicamente enfocándola hacia un objeto
• Mantenga el monitor alejado de transformadores de capacidad de situado a 6 m como mínimo. Parpadee con frecuencia.
alto voltaje, motores eléctricos y otros instrumentos, por ejemplo,
altavoces externos o ventiladores. Éstos podrían crear fuertes • Coloque el monitor en un ángulo de 90° respecto a las
campos magnéticos. ventanas u otras fuentes de luz para evitar al máximo los
brillos y reflejos. Ajuste la inclinación del monitor de modo que
• Si es posible, coloque el monitor mirando al este para minimizar las luces del techo no se reflejen en la pantalla.
los efectos del campo magnético terrestre.
• Si el reflejo de la luz le impide ver adecuadamente la pantalla,
• Si cambia la dirección del monitor mientras éste está en utilice un filtro antirreflectante.
funcionamiento podría causar una pérdida del color de la imagen.
Para evitar que esto suceda, el monitor tiene que estar apagado • Limpie el monitor con regularidad.
durante 20 minutos antes de que se vuelva a encender. La superficie de cristal (CRT) de este monitor dispone de una
• SB
Para utilizar el monitor MultiSync FE2111 con la alimentación de capa especial para reducir los reflejos y la electricidad estática
CA internacional de 100-120/ 220-240V, utilice un cable de de la superficie de cristal.
alimentación adecuado al voltaje de la corriente alterna en cuestión. Dado que la capa de la superficie de cristal es delicada, se
El cable de alimentación que utilice debe estar homologado y recomienda que utilice un paño sin hilachas y no abrasivo (por
cumplir las normas de seguridad de su país. (En Europa debería ejemplo, de algodón) y un líquido limpiador sin alcohol, neutro
utilizarse el tipo H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2.) y no abrasivo para quitar el polvo. Si la pantalla requiere una
• En el Reino Unido, utilice un cable de alimentación homologado BS limpieza más a fondo, aplique agua o detergente neutro
con enchufe moldeado que tenga un fusible negro (5A) instalado biodegradable diluido en abundante agua directamente sobre
para utilizarlo con este monitor. Si el monitor se le ha suministrado un paño suave y escúrralo antes de limpiar la superficie de
sin cable de alimentación, póngase en contacto con su proveedor. cristal.
PELIGRO: agentes que pueden dañar la superficie de cristal
Si se dan algunas de estas circunstancias, desenchufe
de la pantalla: benzol, diluyente, detergente ácido/alcalino,
inmediatamente el monitor de la toma de corriente y contacte con el
detergente con bioalcohol, detergente en polvo abrasivo,
personal de servicio cualificado:
detergente con agente antiestático, detergente fuerte.
• Si el cable de alimentación o el enchufe está dañado.
• Ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor para
• Si se ha derramado líquido o han caído objetos dentro del monitor. mejorar la legibilidad.
• Si el monitor ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o el agua. • Utilice un atril para documentos y colóquelo cerca de la
• Si el monitor se ha caído o se ha dañado la caja. pantalla.
• Si el monitor no funciona con normalidad y ha seguido las • Coloque aquello en lo que más fija la vista (la pantalla o el
instrucciones de servicio. material de referencia) directamente enfrente de usted para
• Coloque el monitor en un lugar debidamente ventilado evitar tener la cabeza girada al teclear.
para permitir que el calor se disipe sin problemas. No • Revise su vista con regularidad.
bloquee las aberturas ventiladas ni coloque el monitor
Ergonomía
PELIGRO cerca de un radiador u otras fuentes de calor. No
coloque nada sobre el monitor. Para conseguir las máximas ventajas ergonómicas,
recomendamos que:
• En caso de emergencia, tire del conector del cable de
alimentación si debe desconectar el sistema de la • Ajuste el brillo hasta que desaparezca el fondo de la imagen.
tensión de alimentación. El monitor debería estar • No seleccione el nivel máximo del contraste.
instalado cerca de una caja de enchufe de fácil acceso. • Utilice los controles de tamaño y posición predefinidos con
• Trate con cuidado el monitor al transportarlo. Guarde el señales estándar.
embalaje. Podría necesitarlo para futuros transportes. • Utilice la configuración del color y los controles laterales
izquierda/derecha predefinidos.
• Utilice señales no entrelazadas con una frecuencia de
regeneración de la imagen vertical de 75-160 Hz.
• No utilice el color azul primario en un fondo oscuro, ya que no
se ve fácilmente y, dado que el contraste es insuficiente, podría
fatigarle la vista.
Español-4
05_Spain 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION
POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU D’ÉLECTROCUTION, RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION • NE PAS OUVRIR
N’EXPOSEZ PAS L’APPAREIL À LA PLUIE OU À L’HUMIDITÉ. DE
MÊME, N’UTILISEZ PAS LA PRISE POLARISÉE DE CET APPAREIL ATTENTION : POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTROCUTION,
AVEC UNE RALLONGE OU D’AUTRES PRISES SI ELLES NE N’ENLEVEZ PAS LE CAPOT (OU L’ARRIÈRE). VOUS NE POUVEZ
PEUVENT ÊTRE TOTALEMENT ENFONCÉES. RÉPARER AUCUNE PIÈCE INTERNE. CONFIEZ TOUS LES TRAVAUX DE
DÉPANNAGE À DU PERSONNEL TECHNIQUE QUALIFIÉ.
N’OUVREZ PAS LE BOÎTIER CAR IL CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS À
HAUTE TENSION. CONFIEZ TOUS LES TRAVAUX DE DÉPANNAGE À Ce symbole prévient l’utilisateur qu’une tension non isolée dans
DU PERSONNEL TECHNIQUE QUALIFIÉ. l’appareil peut être suffisante pour provoquer une électrocution. Il est
donc dangereux d’établir le moindre contact avec une pièce dans cet
appareil.
Ce symbole prévient l’utilisateur que des documents importants sur
l’utilisation et le dépannage de cet appareil ont été inclus. Ils doivent
donc être lus attentivement pour éviter tout problème.
Contenu
La boîte* de votre nouveau moniteur MultiSync FE2111SB doit
contenir les éléments suivants :
• Moniteur MultiSync FE2111SB avec un socle pivotant et inclinable
• Cordon d’alimentation
• Câble signal vidéo (VGA - VGA)
• Manuel de l’utilisateur
Manuel de l’utilisateur • CD-ROM :
comprend le manuel de l’utilisateur complet au format PDF et les
fichiers Windows connexes (fichier INF et profil de couleurs).
CD-ROM Acrobat Reader 4.0 doit avoir été installé sur votre PC pour
pouvoir visualiser l’ensemble du manuel de l’utilisateur.
Sales * N’oubliez pas de conserver la boîte et le matériel d’emballage

Office List Cordon Câble signal vidéo d’origine pour transporter ou expédier le moniteur.
d’alimentation (VGA – VGA)
Mise en marche rapide
Français
Pour connecter le moniteur MultiSync FE2111SB à votre
système, suivez ces instructions :
1. Éteignez votre ordinateur.
2. Si nécessaire, installez la carte graphique dans votre système.
Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au manuel de cette
carte.
3. Pour un PC : branchez une extrémité du câble signal au
connecteur de la carte graphique de votre système (Figure A.1).
Serrez toutes les vis.
Adaptateur Mac Pour un Mac : branchez l’adaptateur de câble (non fourni) pour
(non fourni) Macintosh du MultiSync à l’ordinateur (Figure B.1). Connectez
une extrémité du câble signal à l’adaptateur de câble pour
Figure A.1 Figure B.1
Macintosh (Figure B.1).
REMARQUE : certains systèmes Macintosh n’ont pas besoin
d’adaptateur de câble.
Prise de courant
4. Connectez l’autre extrémité du câble de signal à l’arrière du
moniteur.
REMARQUE : la connexion incorrecte des câbles peut altérer le
fonctionnement du moniteur, le dégrader ou endommager les
composants du moniteur à tube cathodique.
Cordon 5. Le fichier INF de votre moniteur MultiSync pour Windows® 95/98/
d’alimentation 2000/Me/XP est sur le CD-ROM livré avec le moniteur.
6. Connectez une extrémité du cordon d’alimentation à l’arrière du
moniteur et l’autre à la prise de courant (Figure C.1).
7. Allumez le moniteur (Figure D.1).
Figure C.1
8. Allumez l’ordinateur.
REMARQUE : si vous rencontrez des problèmes, veuillez vous
Bouton d’alimentation
reporter à la section Dépannage de ce manuel de l’utilisateur.
Indicateur d’alimentation
Figure D.1
Français-1
06_French 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Commandes
Les boutons de commandes OSM (On-screen Manager - Gestionnaire Contrôle des couleurs/Système de contrôle
à l’écran) sur la face avant du moniteur fonctionnent comme suit : des couleurs
Menu principal Sous-menu Les préréglages de couleurs de 1 à 5 permettent la sélection du réglage
EXIT Quitte les commandes Revient au menu principal de couleur voulu. La barre est remplacée par le réglage des couleurs
OSM. des commandes OSM. voulu parmi 1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5. Chaque réglage de couleur est effectué en
REMARQUE : désactive les commandes OSM et active les commandes OSM usine et exprimé en Kelvin. Si un préréglage est modifié, le message
lorsque l’OSM est éteint. “Custom” (au choix) s’affiche et remplace la température en Kelvin.
Déplace la zone en Déplace la zone en REMARQUE : sRGB ne vous permet pas de régler chaque couleur.
CONTROL /
surbrillance vers la gauche surbrillance vers la
Rouge, Vert, Bleu : le système de contrôle augmente ou diminue le
ou vers la droite pour choisir gauche ou vers la droite
un des sous-menus. pour choisir une des
canon rouge, vert ou bleu du moniteur en fonction de la sélection. Le
commandes. changement de couleur apparaît à l’écran et le sens (augmentation ou
diminution) est indiqué par les barres.
REMARQUE : lorsque les commandes OSM sont éteintes, elles agissent comme
une touche de raccourci pour la Luminosité. Mode sRGB : le mode sRGB fournit la couleur gérée appropriée à
l’image. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier individuellement le rouge, le vert
CONTROL -/+ Aucune fonction. Déplace la barre dans la
et le bleu.
direction + ou – pour
augmenter ou diminuer le REMARQUE : dans ce mode de contrôle des couleurs, la luminosité et
réglage. le contraste ne sont pas réglables.
REMARQUE : désactive les commandes OSM et permet de régler le Contraste
avec l’option Touche de raccourci activée.
Commandes de géométrie
SELECT/SB MODE Entre dans le sous-menu. Aucune fonction.
Menu des commandes de géométrie
Lorsque les commandes OSM sont éteintes, elles vont agir Les commandes de géométrie permettent de régler la courbure ou
comme la touche de fonction SuperLuminosité (SL). l’angle des bords de votre affichage.
L’utilisateur peut choisir entre MODE SL DÉSACTIVÉ,
MODE SL 1, et MODE SL 2. Le mode SL actuel est indiqué Int/Ext (coussin) : diminue ou augmente l’incurvation des bords
la première fois que cette touche est utilisée. Dans une latéraux de l’image vers l’intérieur ou l’extérieur.
fenêtre active pendant 3 secondes, si cette touche est
Gauche/Droit (balance de la distorsion du coussin) : diminue ou
sélectionnée à nouveau, le MODE SL passera au MODE SL
suivant. Par exemple, si le mode actuel est MODE SL augmente l’incurvation des bords latéraux de l’image vers la gauche ou
DÉSACTIVÉ, et que la touche est pressée deux fois dans la droite.
un intervalle de 3 secondes, alors le MODE SL sera changé Inclinaison (distorsion de parallélogramme) : diminue ou augmente
en MODE SL 1, etc… La température de couleur pour l’inclinaison des bords latéraux vers la gauche ou la droite.
chaque mode SL est réglée par la commande de couleur
appropriée, sauf pour le mode sRGB dont le réglage de Alignement (distorsion du trapèze) : diminue ou augmente le bas de
couleur ne peut pas être changé. Lorsque l’unité est éteinte, l’écran pour le faire coïncider avec le haut.
elle sera réinitialisée avec le mode SL désactivé.
Rotation (rotation de balayage) : tourne l’ensemble de l’affichage
Mode Super Luminosité DÉSACTIVÉ : pour des images dans le sens horaire ou inversement.
à base de texte (utilisation normale)
Mode Super Luminosité 1 ACTIVÉ : pour les images Correction des coins : vous permet de régler la géométrie des coins
Mode Super Luminosité 2 ACTIVÉ : pour des images de votre affichage : Haut, Equilibre haut, Bas ou Equilibre bas.
animées telles que des films sur DVD
RESET Réinitialise toutes les Réinitialise la commande Outils 1
commandes du menu en en surbrillance au réglage Éliminateur de Moiré : le moiré est un motif ondulé pouvant apparaître
surbrillance aux réglages d’usine.
parfois à l’écran. Le motif répétitif est superposé comme des images de
d’usine.
vagues. Le motif est plus ou moins évident selon les applications. Pour
REMARQUE : lorsque la commande RESET est utilisée dans le menu principal réduire le moirage, réglez le niveau avec les boutons de commande -/+.
ou d’un sous-menu, une fenêtre d’avertissement apparaîtra afin de vous
permettre de sélectionner la fonction de réinitialisation. Convergence principale : aligne les trois couleurs (R,V,B) pour n’en
former qu’une seule (blanc). Le but de cette commande est d’assurer
qu’une ligne blanche dessinée à l’écran est aussi claire et précise que
Commandes de luminosité et de contraste possible.
Luminosité : règle la luminosité globale de l’image et du fond de • Utilisez la commande de convergence horizontale pour régler
l’écran. l’alignement des lignes blanches dans le sens droite/gauche.
Contraste : règle la luminosité de l’image en fonction du fond. • Utilisez la commande de convergence verticale pour régler
Démagnétisation : élimine l’accumulation de champ magnétique l’alignement des lignes blanches dans le sens haut/bas.
parasite qui empêche un balayage correct du faisceau d’électrons et Linéarité : cette sélection vous permet de régler l’espacement de la
affecte la pureté des couleurs à l’écran, la mise au point et la zone à l’écran. Cette commande permet de s’assurer qu’un cercle d’un
convergence. À l’activation de cette fonction, votre image à l’écran pouce correspond réellement à un cercle d’un pouce, où qu’il soit
sautera et ondulera un peu lors de la démagnétisation de l’écran. dessiné à l’écran. Voici la meilleure façon de déterminer la linéarité
REMARQUE : veuillez respecter un délai minimum de 20 minutes verticale :
entre deux utilisations de la fonction de démagnétisation. • Dessinez des lignes horizontales espacées régulièrement avec une
Luminosité constante : maintient les niveaux de luminosité et de couleur application de dessin disposant d’une règle.
d’écran de façon régulière au cours de la vie normale du moniteur. • Utilisez la commande d’équilibre vertical pour régler les lignes
La fonction Luminosité constante nécessite un préchauffage du moniteur proches du haut et du bas de votre écran.
de 30 minutes avant que la fonctionnalité soit totalement opérante. • Utilisez la commande de linéarité verticale pour régler l’espacement
des lignes près du centre et du haut de votre écran.
Commandes de format et de position Commandes GlobalSync : elles éliminent les imperfections d’image
Réglage automatique : règle automatiquement les dimensions horizontales qui peuvent provenir du champ magnétique terrestre. Dans les sous-
et verticales ainsi que la position de l’image pour les résolutions applicables. menus (GLOBALSYNC, HAUT GAUCHE, HAUT DROITE, BAS
GAUCHE ou BAS DROITE), utilisez les boutons de commande –/+ pour
REMARQUE : le réglage automatique n’est pas disponible si aucun signal
affiner le réglage des corrections GlobalSync.
d’image n’est présent ou si la taille du signal d’entrée d’image est réduite.
REMARQUE : NEC recommande d’effectuer la correction GlobalSync
Gauche/Droite : déplace l’image horizontalement (gauche ou droite). en éxécutant une application classique telle qu’un tableur ou un
Bas/Haut : déplace l’image verticalement (vers le haut ou vers le bas). traitement de texte.
Étroit/Large : rétrécit ou agrandit horizontalement l’image.
Petit/Grand : rétrécit ou agrandit l’image verticalement.
Français-2
06_French 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Outils 2
Langue : les menus des commandes OSM sont disponibles en six
langues.
Position OSM : vous pouvez choisir l’emplacement du menu des
commandes OSM à l’écran. En choisissant Position OSM, vous pouvez
régler manuellement la position du menu de commandes OSM :
gauche, droit, haut ou bas.
EXTINCTION DE L’OSM : le menu des commandes OSM restera à
l’écran aussi longtemps qu’il sera utilisé. Dans le sous-menu, vous
pouvez choisir la durée d’attente du moniteur entre la dernière
pression de touche et l’extinction du menu des commandes OSM. Le
choix prédéfini est compris entre 5 et 120 secondes, par pas de 5
secondes.
Verrouillage de l’OSM : cette commande bloque totalement l’accès à
toutes les fonctions des commandes OSM sauf la luminosité et le
contraste. Si l’on essaye d’activer des commandes OSM en mode
verrouillé, un écran apparaît indiquant que les commandes OSM sont
verrouillées. Pour activer la fonction de verrouillage OSM, appuyez sur
le bouton SELECT puis sur + et maintenez-les enfoncés. Pour
désactiver le verrouillage OSM, appuyez sur le bouton SELECT puis
sur + et maintenez-les enfoncés.
IPM mode Veille :
Activé : le système IPM fonctionne normalement et toutes les étapes
de l’économie d’énergie sont utilisées.
Désactivé : le mode Veille du système IPM n’est pas utilisé.
REMARQUE : gardez le réglage d’usine sur ACTIVÉ pour les
systèmes et les cartes graphiques standard.
REMARQUE : ne gardez pas le moniteur MultiSync allumé lorsque
‘Aucun signal’ s’applique. Ceci pourrait provoquer une image
persistante sur l’écran, en raison de l’affichage du message ‘Aucun
signal’.
Commande EdgeLock : l’utilisation de votre moniteur avec des
résolutions non standard peut créer une distorsion de la couleur ou
une mauvaise luminosité des images. La commande EdgeLock permet
de régler l’affichage des images.
Français
Touche de raccourci : cette sélection vous permet d’utiliser /
comme commande de luminosité et –/+ comme commande de
contraste.
Préréglage usine : ce menu permet de ramener tous les paramètres
des commandes OSM à leurs réglages d’usine. Un message
d’avertissement apparaît pour confirmer votre intention de réinitialiser
TOUS les paramètres. Les réglages individuels peuvent être
réinitialisés en mettant la commande concernée en surbrillance et en
appuyant sur le bouton RESET.
Informations
Mode d’affichage : indique la résolution d’affichage et les paramètres
de fréquence en cours pour le moniteur.
Informations moniteur : indique le nom du modèle et les numéros de
série de votre moniteur.
Avis de rafraîchissement : un message vous informe si le taux de
rafraîchissement du signal appliqué par l’ordinateur au moniteur est Déclaration du constructeur
trop bas. Reportez-vous au manuel de la carte graphique ou du
système pour plus d’informations. Nous certifions par le présent document que le moniteur
couleur MultiSync FE2111SB est conforme à
la directive européenne 73/23/EEC :
– EN 60950
la directive européenne 89/336/EEC :
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
et que la marque suivante apparaît :

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Français-3
06_French 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Conseils d’utilisation
UNE POSITION ET UN RÉGLAGE
Consignes de sécurité et d’entretien
CORRECTS DU MONITEUR PEUVENT
POUR UN FONCTIONNEMENT RÉDUIRE LA FATIGUE DES YEUX, DES
OPTIMAL, VEUILLEZ NOTER CE ÉPAULES ET DE LA NUQUE.
QUI SUIT POUR LE RÉGLAGE ET APPLIQUEZ CE QUI SUIT POUR
L’UTILISATION DU MONITEUR COULEUR POSITIONNER LE MONITEUR :
MULTISYNC FE2111SB :
• N’OUVREZ JAMAIS LE BOÎTIER DU MONITEUR. Aucune pièce • Réglez la hauteur du
interne ne peut être réparée par l’utilisateur et l’ouverture ou la moniteur pour que le haut de
dépose des capots peut vous exposer à des risques d’électrocution l’écran soit au niveau ou
ou autres. Confiez toutes les interventions de dépannage à du légèrement au-dessous du
personnel technique qualifié. niveau des yeux. Vos yeux
• Ne renversez pas de liquides dans le moniteur et ne l’utilisez pas doivent pointer légèrement
près d’une source d’eau. vers le bas pour regarder le
• N’introduisez pas d’objets de quelque nature que ce soit dans les milieu de l’écran.
fentes du boîtier car ceux-ci pourraient toucher des endroits sous • Positionnez le moniteur au
tension dangereuse, ce qui peut provoquer des blessures, voire minimum à 40 cm et au
être fatal, ou peut occasionner une décharge électrique, un maximum à 70 cm de vos
incendie ou une panne de l’appareil. yeux. La distance optimale
• Ne placez pas d’objets lourds sur le cordon d’alimentation. Un est de 60 cm.
cordon endommagé peut occasionner une décharge électrique ou • Reposez vos yeux régulièrement en regardant un objet situé à
un incendie. au moins 6 m. Clignez souvent des yeux.
• Ne placez pas cet appareil sur un chariot, un support ou une table • Placez le moniteur à un angle de 90° par rapport aux fenêtres
inclinés ou instables, car si le moniteur tombe, il peut être et autres sources de lumière pour réduire au maximum les
sérieusement endommagé. reflets et l’éblouissement. Réglez l’inclinaison du moniteur pour
• Éloignez le moniteur de transformateurs de hautes capacités, de que l’éclairage du plafond ne soit pas reflété par l’écran.
moteurs électriques et d’autres appareils comme des haut-parleurs • Si une lumière réfléchie rend la vision de l’écran difficile,
externes ou des ventilateurs qui peuvent créer de puissants utilisez un filtre antireflet.
champs magnétiques. • Nettoyez votre moniteur
• Si possible, placez le moniteur face à l’est pour minimiser les effets La surface (tube cathodique) du verre de ce moniteur est
du champ magnétique terrestre. revêtu d’un composant spécial, prévu pour réduire les reflets et
• Le changement de sens d’un moniteur en cours de fonctionnement l’électricité statique sur la surface du verre.
peut provoquer une décoloration de l’image. Pour la corriger, Pour retirer la poussière sans abîmer le revêtement de la
éteignez le moniteur pendant 20 minutes avant de le rallumer. surface du verre, utilisez un chiffon sans abrasif ni peluche (en
• Pour utiliser le moniteur MultiSync FE2111SB avec son alimentation coton ou équivalent) avec une solution de nettoyage non
100-120/220-240 V alternatifs universelle, employez un cordon abrasive, neutre et sans alcool. Si cela n’est pas suffisant,
d’alimentation qui correspond à la tension d’alimentation de la nettoyez la surface du verre avec un chiffon doux légèrement
prise de courant alternatif utilisée. Le cordon d’alimentation utilisé imbibé d’eau ou de détergent neutre dilué avec beaucoup
doit être agréé et en conformité avec les normes de sécurité de d’eau.
votre pays. (Le type H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2 doit être utilisé en ATTENTION : Vous risquez d’endommager le tube cathodique
Europe) si vous utilisez les agents suivants pour nettoyer la surface du
• Au Royaume Uni, utilisez avec ce moniteur un cordon verre : Benzène, diluant, détergent acide/alcalin, détergent à
d’alimentation approuvé BS avec une prise moulée équipée d’un base d’alcool, détergent comportant de la poudre abrasive ou
fusible noir (5A). Si un cordon d’alimentation n’a pas été fourni un agent anti-statique, détergent de nettoyage.
avec ce moniteur, veuillez contacter votre fournisseur. • Réglez les commandes de luminosité et de contraste du
Débranchez immédiatement le moniteur de la prise murale et confiez la moniteur pour améliorer la lisibilité.
réparation à du personnel qualifié dans les cas suivants : • Utilisez un support de documents placé près de l’écran.
• Si le cordon d’alimentation ou la prise est endommagé(e). • Positionnez ce que vous regardez le plus souvent (l’écran ou
• Si du liquide a été renversé ou si des objets sont tombés à les documents de référence) directement devant vous pour
l’intérieur du moniteur. minimiser les mouvements de la tête lorsque vous tapez.
• Si le moniteur a été exposé à la pluie ou à de l’eau. • Consultez régulièrement un ophtalmologiste.
• Si le moniteur est tombé ou si le boîtier est endommagé. Ergonomie
• Si le moniteur ne fonctionne pas normalement en suivant les Afin d’optimiser l’ergonomie du moniteur, nous vous suggérons de
directives d’utilisation. respecter les principes suivants :
• Prévoyez une aération suffisante autour du moniteur • Réglez la luminosité jusqu’à ce que la trame de fond
pour que la chaleur puisse se dissiper correctement. disparaisse.
N’obstruez pas les ouvertures de ventilation et ne • Ne placez pas la commande de contraste à son réglage
ATTENTION placez pas le moniteur près d’un radiateur ou d’une maximum.
autre source de chaleur. Ne posez rien sur le moniteur.
• Utilisez les commandes de taille et de position préréglées avec
• La prise du cordon d’alimentation est le moyen des signaux standard.
principal de débrancher le système de l’alimentation
• Utilisez les préréglages des couleurs et des contrôles des
électrique. Le moniteur doit être installé à proximité
côtés gauche/droite.
d’une prise de courant facilement accessible.
• Utilisez des signaux non entrelacés avec une fréquence de
• Manipulez avec soin lors du transport. Conservez
rafraîchissement vertical de 75 à 160 Hz.
l’emballage pour le transport.
• N’utilisez pas de bleu comme couleur primaire sur un fond
sombre car cela rend la lecture difficile et peut occasionner une
fatigue oculaire en raison d’un contraste insuffisant.
Français-4
06_French 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

AVVERTENZA ATTENZIONE
PER EVITARE IL PERICOLO DI INCENDI O SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, PERICOLO DI SCOSSA ELETTRICA • NON APRIRE
NON ESPORRE L’UNITA’ A PIOGGIA O UMIDITA’. INOLTRE, NON
USARE LA SPINA POLARIZZATA DELL’UNITA’ CON UNA PRESA DI ATTENZIONE: PER RIDURRE IL RISCHIO DI SCOSSA ELETTRICA, NON
CAVO DI PROLUNGA O ALTRE PRESE A MENO CHE I POLI DELLA TOGLIERE IL COPERCHIO (O LA COPERTURA POSTERIORE). ALL’INTERNO
SPINA SI INSERISCANO COMPLETAMENTE. NON VI SONO PARTI MANUTENIBILI DALL’UTENTE. PER LA MANUTENZIONE
RIVOLGERSI A PERSONALE DI MANUTENZIONE QUALIFICATO.
NON APRIRE LA CARROZZERIA POICHE’ ALL’INTERNO VI SONO
COMPONENTI SOTTO ALTA TENSIONE. PER LA MANUTENZIONE Questo simbolo avverte l’utente che tensioni non isolate all’interno
RIVOLGERSI A PERSONALE DI MANUTENZIONE QUALIFICATO. dell’unità possono essere sufficientemente elevate da provocare
scossa elettrica. Pertanto è pericoloso toccare in ogni modo qualsiasi
componente interno all’unità.
Questo simbolo avverte l’utente che sono state incluse importanti
informazioni relative al funzionamento ed alla manutenzione
dell’unità. Pertanto esse devono essere lette attentamente al fine di
evitare l’insorgere di problemi.
Contenuto
La scatola del monitor* del vostro nuovo MultiSync FE2111SB
deve contenere i seguenti elementi:
• Monitor MultiSync FE2111SB con supporto inclinabile e girevole
• Cavo di alimentazione
• Cavo segnali video (VGA - VGA)
• Manuale Utente
Manuale Utente • CD-ROM:
Contiene il manuale utente completo in formato PDF ed i relativi
file Windows (file INF e profilo a colori). Per visualizzare il
CD ROM manuale utente completo occorre installare Acrobat Reader 4.0
sul proprio PC.
Sales * Conservare la confezione ed il materiale di imballaggio originali

Office List Cavo di Cavo segnali video dopo il trasporto o la spedizione del monitor.
alimentazione (VGA –VGA)
Guida rapida
Per collegare il monitor MultiSync FE2111SB al sistema,
procedere come segue:
1. Spegnere il computer.
2. Se necessario installare la scheda video nel sistema. Per
ulteriori informazioni, fare riferimento al manuale della
scheda video.
3. Per PC: Collegare un'estremità del cavo segnali al connettore
Italiano
della scheda video del sistema (Figura A.1). Serrare tutte le viti.
Per Mac: Collegare l'adattatore cavo MultiSync Macintosh (non
Adattatore Mac incluso) al computer (Figura B.1). Collegare un'estremità del
(non incluso) cavo segnali all'adattatore cavo Macintosh (Figura B.1).
Figura A.1 Figura B.1 NOTA: Alcuni sistemi Macintosh non dispongono di un
adattatore cavo Macintosh.
4. Collegare l'altra estremità del connettore cavo segnali sul retro
Presa di alimentazione del monitor.
NOTA: Collegamenti errati dei cavi possono provocare un
funzionamento anomalo, danneggiare la qualità del display/
componenti del monitor CRT.
5. Il file INF Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP del monitor MultiSync è
disponibile sul CD ROM fornito con il monitor.
6. Collegare un'estremità del cavo di alimentazione all'ingresso c.a.
Cavo di sul retro del monitor e l'altra estremità alla presa di
alimentazione alimentazione (Figura C.1).
7. Accendere il monitor (Figura D.1).
Figura C.1 8. Accendere il computer.

NOTA: Per qualsiasi problema, vedere la sezione Ricerca guasti
di questo manuale utente.
Pulsante di alimentazione
Spia alimentazione
Figura D.1
Italiano-1
07_Italian 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Comandi
I tasti OSM (On-Screen Manager) sulla parte anteriore del monitor Controllo colore/sistema di controllo del colore
hanno le seguenti funzioni: L’impostazione di colore desiderata è selezionata attraverso la
Menu principale Sotto-menu predisposizione da 1 a 5. La barra viene sostituita dalla possibilità di
EXIT Uscita dal menu OSM. Uscita menu principale scegliere l’impostazione colore da 1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5. L’impostazione di
controlli OSM. ogni colore è regolata in fabbrica ad un grado Kelvin stabilito. Se
NOTA: Disattiva il menu OSM e lo attiva quando l’OSM non è attivato.
un’impostazione viene regolata, il nome dell’impostazione cambierà da
grado Kelvin a Custom.
CONTROL / Sposta l’area selezionata a Sposta la selezione a
sinistra/destra per scegliere sinistra/destra per
NOTA: L’sRGB non permette di regolare ogni colore.
uno dei sottomenu. scegliere uno dei controlli. Rosso, Verde, Blu: Il sistema di controllo del colore aumenta o
NOTA: Quando il menu OSM non è attivo, funziona come tasto di regolazione diminuisce il colore rosso, verde o blu del monitor a seconda di quale è
rapida della luminosità. selezionato. Il cambiamento del colore compare sullo schermo e la
direzione (aumento o diminuzione) sarà evidenziata dalle barre.
CONTROL -/+ Non esegue alcuna Sposta la barra in
operazione. direzione – o + per Modalità sRGB: La modalità sRGB fornisce l’opportuna gestione del
diminuire o aumentare la colore dell’immagine. Non è possibile modificare singolarmente i colori
regolazione. rosso, verde e blu.
NOTA: Disattiva il menu OSM e regola il contrasto con il tasto di scelta NOTA: In questa modalità non è possibile regolare il controllo colore,
rapida “ON” luminosità e contrasto.
SELECT/SB MODE Permette di entrare Non ha alcuna
nel sottomenu. funzione.
Comandi geometria
Quando l’OSM non è attivo, ha la funzione del tasto
SuperBright (SB). L’utente può selezionare tra SB MODE Menu comandi geometria
OFF, SB MODE1, e SB MODE2. L’SB Mode corrente viene I comandi Geometria permettono di regolare la curvatura o l’angolatura
indicato la prima volta che questo tasto viene premuto. Se dell’immagine ai bordi dello schermo.
entro un intervallo di 3 secondi, questo tasto viene
nuovamente premuto, l’SB MODE passerà al modo In/Out (ampiezza curvatura): Diminuisce o aumenta la curvatura dei
successivo. Per esempio, se la modalità attuale è SB lati verso l’interno o verso l’esterno.
MODE OFF e il tasto viene premuto due volte in un Sinistra/destra (bilanciamento ampiezza curvatura): Diminuisce o
intervallo di 3 secondi, l’SB MODE cambierà in SB MODE1 aumenta la curvatura dei lati a sinistra o a destra.
e così via. La temperatura del colore per ogni SB Mode è
regolata dall’appropriato sistema di controllo colore, Inclinazione (parallelograma): Diminuisce o aumenta l’inclinazione dei
eccetto che per la modalità sRGB per cui l’impostazione lati a sinistra o a destra.
del colore non può essere regolata. Quando l’unità non è
Allineamento (trapezoidale): Diminuisce o aumenta la parte bassa
attivata, si ripristinerà in modo SB off.
dello schermo in modo che sia come quella superiore.
Modalità Super Bright OFF: per immagini con testo (uso
normale)
Rotazione (rotazione reticolo): Ruota l’intero schermo in senso orario
Modalità Super Bright 1 ON: per immagini o antiorario.
Modalità Super Bright 2 ON: per immagini animate Correzione angolo: Permette di regolare la geometria degli angoli dello
come filmati DVD schermo – in alto, bilanciamento superiore, in basso o bilanciamento
RESET Effettua il reset di tutti i Ripristina il comando inferiore.
controlli nel menu evidenziato alle
evidenziato secondo impostazioni di fabbrica.
l’impostazione di fabbrica. Strumenti 1
Correttore Moiré: Per Moiré si intende un disegno ondulato che talvolta
NOTA: Quando si preme RESET, nel menu principale e nel sottomenu, compare
può apparire sullo schermo. Si tratta di un disegno ripetitivo sovrapposto
una finestra di avviso che permette di selezionare la funzione di reset.
come immagini increspate. Se si lanciano determinate applicazioni, il
disegno ondulato appare più evidente che non in altre. Per ridurre tale
Controlli Luminosità/Contrasto effetto, regolare il livello utilizzando i pulsanti di controllo –/ +.
Luminosità: Regola la luminosità dell’immagine e dello schermo. Convergenza base: Allinea i tre colori (R,V,B) fino ad ottenere un unico
Contrasto: Regola la luminosità dell’immagine in relazione allo sfondo. colore (bianco). Lo scopo di questo controllo è di assicurare che una
linea bianca sullo schermo sia il più chiara e nitida possibile.
Smagnetizzazione: Elimina l’accumulo di campi magnetici latenti sullo
schermo che modificano la corretta scansione del fascio di elettroni e • Utilizzare CONVERGENZA (ORIZ.) per regolare l’allineamento delle
che influiscono sulla nitidezza dei colori dello schermo, sulla linee bianche nella direzione sinistra/destra.
focalizzazione e sulla convergenza. Una volta attivato, l’immagine sullo • Utilizzare CONVERGENZA (VERT.) per regolare l’allineamento
schermo salterà e sfarfallerà leggermente. delle linee bianche nella direzione alto/basso.
NOTA: Lasciare trascorrere come minimo 20 minuti prima di utilizzare Linearità: Questa selezione della linearità permette di regolare la
la funzione di Degauss (smagnetizzazione). spaziatura dell’area sullo schermo. Questo comando ha lo scopo di
Luminosità costante: Mantiene i livelli di luminosità e colore dello assicurare che un cerchio di 2 cm sia effettivamente un cerchio di 2 cm
schermo costanti per tutta la durata del monitor. indipendentemente dalla sua posizione sullo schermo. Il modo migliore
La funzione Luminosità costante richiede un riscaldamento di 30 per determinare la linearità verticale è il seguente:
minuti del monitor prima che sia completamente operativa. • Tracciare delle linee orizzontali equamente distanziate utilizzando
un’applicazione per disegni dotata di righello.
• Utilizzare il comando “bilanciamento verticale” per regolare le linee
Controlli Dimensione e Posizione in prossimità della parte superiore ed inferiore dello schermo.
Regolazione automatica: Regola automaticamente la dimensione
orizzontale e verticale e le impostazioni di posizione per le • Utilizzare LINEARITÀ (VERT.) per regolare la spaziatura tra le linee
temporizzazioni applicabili. in prossimità del centro e della parte superiore dello schermo.
NOTA: La regolazione automatica (AutoAdjust) non è disponibile in Controllo GlobalSync: Elimina le anomalie dell’immagine che possono
assenza segnale immagine o con segnale immagine troppo basso in derivare dal campo magnetico terrestre. Nei sottomenu (GLOBALSYNC,
ingresso. IN ALTO A SINISTRA, IN ALTO A DESTRA, IN BASSO A SINISTRA o
IN BASSO A DESTRA), utilizzare i pulsanti –/+ per regolare in modo
Sin./Dest.: Sposta l’immagine orizzontalmente (a sinistra o a destra). preciso le correzioni GlobalSync.
Su/Giù: Sposta l’immagine verticalmente (in alto o in basso). NOTA: NEC raccomanda di eseguire la correzione GlobalSync durante
Stretto/Ampio: Diminuisce o aumenta la dimensione orizzontale l’esecuzione di un’applicazione tipica come un foglio elettronico o un
dell’immagine. documento di testo.
Lungo/Corto: Diminuisce o aumenta la dimensione verticale
dell’immagine.
Italiano-2
07_Italian 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Strumenti 2
Lingua: I menu OSM sono disponibili in sei lingue.
Posizione OSM: È possibile scegliere dove far comparire il menu OSM
sullo schermo. La posizione OSM permette di regolare manualmente la
posizione menu dei controlli OSM a sinistra, destra, in alto o in basso.
Disattivazione OSM: Il menu OSM rimane attivo per il tempo che è in
uso. Nel sottomenu “disattivazione OSM”, è possibile selezionare
l’intervallo di tempo passato il quale, nel caso non venga premuto
nessun tasto, scompare il menu OSM. L’impostazione può essere
regolata con risoluzione di 5 secondi tra 5 e 120 secondi.
OSM bloccato: Questo comando blocca l’accesso a tutte le funzioni di
comando OSM eccetto luminosità e contrasto. Se si tenta di attivare i
comandi OSM in modalità di OSM bloccato, apparirà una schermata
che informa del fatto che i comandi OSM sono bloccati. Per attivare la
funzione OSM bloccato, premere contemporaneamente SELECT e +.
Per disattivare la funzione OSM bloccato, premere
contemporaneamente SELECT e +.
Modalità Off del sistema IPM:
Abilitato: Il sistema IPM lavora normalmente e sono attivati tutti gli stadi
di risparmio energetico.
Disabilitato: La modalità Off del sistema IPM non è utilizzata.
NOTA: Per sistemi e schede grafiche standard, mantenere
l’impostazione di fabbrica ABILITATO.
NOTA: Non tenere acceso il monitor MultiSync quando compare il
messaggio ‘Nessun segnale’. Questo potrebbe provocare la bruciatura
dei fosfori dello schermo causata dal messaggio ‘Nessun segnale’
visualizzato.
Controllo EdgeLock: Il funzionamento del monitor ad una
temporizzazione non standard può comportare immagini più scure del
normale o una distorsione del colore. Il controllo EdgeLock regola le
immagini portandole al loro stato normale.
Scelta Rapida: Questa selezione permette di utilizzare / come
controllo luminosità e –/+ come controllo contrasto.
Configurazione di fabbrica: La configurazione di fabbrica permette di
ripristinare la maggior parte delle impostazioni controllo OSM. Verrà
visualizzato un messaggio di avviso per confermare se si desidera
effettivamente ripristinare TUTTE le regolazioni. È possibile resettare
impostazioni individuali selezionando il relativo comando e premendo il
pulsante RESET.
Informazioni
Modo display: Indica la modalità corrente e l’impostazione di
Italiano
frequenza del monitor.
Monitor Info: Indica il modello e i numeri di serie del monitor.
Frequenza di rinfresco: Verrà visualizzato un messaggio in caso la
frequenza di rinfresco del segnale applicata al monitor dal computer
sia troppo bassa. Per ulteriori informazioni vedere la scheda video o il
manuale di sistema.
Dichiarazione del Costruttore

Si certifica che il monitor a colori MultiSync FE2111SB
è conforme alla
Direttiva del Consiglio Europeo 73/23/CEE:
– EN 60950
Direttiva del Consiglio Europeo 89/336/CEE:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
ed è contrassegnato con

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Italiano-3
07_Italian 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Raccomandazioni per l’uso
IL CORRETTO POSIZIONAMENTO E
Precauzioni di sicurezza e manutenzione
REGOLAZIONE DEL MONITOR
PER UNA RESA OTTIMALE, ATTENERSI RIDUCE L’AFFATICAMENTO DI
ALLE SEGUENTI ISTRUZIONI PER OCCHI, SPALLE E COLLO. NEL
L’INSTALLAZIONE E L’UTILIZZODEL POSIZIONARE IL MONITOR,
MONITOR A COLORI MULTISYNC CONTROLLARE QUANTO SEGUE:
FE2111SB:
• NON APRIRE IL MONITOR. All’interno non ci sono parti • Regolare l’altezza del
manutenibili dall’utente e l’apertura o la rimozione di coperture può monitor in modo che la parte
esporre a scosse pericolose o ad altri rischi. Per la manutenzione, alta dello schermo sia a
fare riferimento a personale di manutenzione qualificato. livello degli occhi o
• Non versare liquidi nella carrozzeria, né usare il monitor vicino leggermente sotto.
all’acqua. Guardando il centro dello
• Non inserire alcun tipo di oggetto nelle fessure della carrozzeria, schermo, gli occhi devono
poiché esso potrebbe venire a contatto con punti a tensione essere rivolti leggermente
pericolosa, il che può essere dannoso o fatale o può causare verso il basso.
scosse elettriche, incendio o guasto dell’apparecchiatura. • Posizionare il monitor ad
• Non appoggiare oggetti pesanti sul cavo di alimentazione. Il almeno 40 cm e a non più di
danneggiamento del cavo può provocare scosse o incendi. 70 cm dagli occhi. La
distanza ottimale è di 60 cm.
• Non posare il prodotto su un carrello, un supporto o un tavolo
inclinato o instabile. Il monitor può cadere danneggiandosi • Far riposare periodicamente gli occhi guardando un oggetto
seriamente. lontano almeno 6 metri. Chiudere sovente gli occhi.
• Tenere il monitor lontano da trasformatori ad alta potenza, motori • Posizionare il monitor ad un angolo di 90° rispetto a finestre o
elettrici e altri dispositivi, quali altoparlanti o ventilatori esterni, che altre sorgenti di luce per ridurre il riflesso della luce sullo
possono creare forti campi magnetici. schermo. Regolare l’inclinazione del monitor in modo che le
luci del soffitto non si riflettano sullo schermo.
• Se possibile, posizionare il monitor in modo che sia rivolto a est per
ridurre gli effetti del campo magnetico terrestre. • Se la luce riflessa rende difficoltosa la visione dello schermo,
usare un filtro anti riflesso.
• Evitare di cambiare la direzione del monitor quando è alimentato
perché questo può provocare un’immagine sbiadita. Per correggere • Pulire il monitor
questo difetto, spegnere il monitor e tenerlo spento per 20 minuti La superficie di vetro di questo monitor (TUBO A RAGGI
prima di riaccenderlo. CATODICI) è dotata di un rivestimento speciale per ridurre la
• Se si lavora con il MultiSync FE2111SB e il relativo alimentatore riflessione e l’elettricità statica sulla superficie del vetro.
universale c.a. da 100-120/220-240V utilizzare un cavo di A causa del rivestimento delicato sulla superficie di vetro,
alimentazione compatibile con il tipo di voltaggio della presa di utilizzare un panno non sfilacciato, non abrasivo (cotone o
corrente c.a. utilizzata. Il cavo di alimentazione utilizzato deve equivalente) ed una soluzione non alcolica per una pulizia
essere di tipo approvato ed essere conforme agli standard di neutra non abrasiva per ridurre la polvere Se lo schermo
sicurezza del Paese. (Il tipo H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2 deve essere richiede più di una leggera pulizia, versare acqua oppure un
utilizzato in Europa) detergente neutro morbido con molta acqua direttamente su un
• In UK, utilizzare un cavo di alimentazione approvato BS con tappo panno morbido e utilizzarlo, dopo avere strizzato l’acqua, per
stampato, dotato di un fusibile nero (5A) installato per l’uso insieme pulire la superficie di vetro.
a questo monitor. Se il cavo di alimentazione non viene fornito con ATTENZIONE: I seguenti agenti provocano danni allo schermo
il monitor, contattare il fornitore. CRT quando si pulisce la superficie di vetro: Benzene, diluenti,
detergenti acido/alcalini, detergenti alcolici, detergenti con
Scollegare immediatamente il monitor dalla presa a muro e fare
polvere abrasiva, detergenti con agente antistatico, detergenti
riferimento a personale di manutenzione qualificato se si verificano le
per la pulizia.
seguenti condizioni:
• Il cavo di alimentazione o la presa sono danneggiati. • Regolare i comandi di luminosità e contrasto del monitor per
migliorare la leggibilità.
• E’ stato versato del liquido o sono caduti oggetti nel monitor.
• Usare un supporto per documenti posto vicino allo schermo.
• Il monitor è stato esposto a pioggia o acqua.
• Posizionare ciò che viene osservato più spesso (lo schermo o il
• Il monitor è stato fatto cadere o la carrozzeria è danneggiata. materiale di riferimento) direttamente davanti, per girare il
• Il monitor non funziona regolarmente seguendo le istruzioni d’uso. meno possibile la testa quando si digita.
• Lasciare spazio attorno al monitor per un’adeguata • Fare regolarmente esami della vista.
ventilazione per permettere la dissipazione del calore.
Ergonomia
Non ostruire le aperture di ventilazione o mettere il
ATTENZIONE monitor vicino a radiatori o altre fonti di calore. Non Per avere il massimo vantaggio dal punto di vista ergonomico, si
mettere nulla sopra il monitor. raccomanda quanto segue:
• Il connettore del cavo di alimentazione è il mezzo • Regolare la luminosità fino a che il reticolo di sfondo scompare
principale per scollegare il sistema dalla rete di • Non impostare il controllo di contrasto al massimo
alimentazione. Il monitor deve essere posto vicino ad • Utilizzare i controlli di dimensione e posizione preimpostati con
una presa di alimentazione facilmente accessibile. segnali standard
• Maneggiare con cura durante il trasporto. Conservare • Utilizzare l’impostazione predefinita del colore e della
l’imballo per il trasporto. dimensione destra/sinistra
• Utilizzare segnali non interallacciati con una frequenza di
rinfresco verticale compresa tra 75-160 Hz
• Non utilizzare il blu come colore primario su uno sfondo scuro,
poiché risulta difficile distinguere le immagini, con conseguente
affaticamento degli occhi dovuto ad insufficiente contrasto
Italiano-4
07_Italian 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

WAARSCHUWING LET OP!
STEL DEZE EENHEID NIET BLOOT AAN REGEN OF VOCHT, OM ZO KANS OP ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN • NIET OPENEN
DE KANS OP BRAND OF ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN TE VERMIJDEN.
GEBRUIK DE GEPOLARISEERDE STEKKER VAN DEZE EENHEID LET OP! VERWIJDER DE BEHUIZING NIET (NOCH DE ACHTERZIJDE) OM
NIET MET EEN VERLENGSNOER OF CONTACTDOOS OF ANDERE DE KANS OP ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN TE BEPERKEN. BEVAT GEEN
STOPCONTACTEN TENZIJ U DE POLEN VOLLEDIG IN HET INTERNE ONDERDELEN DIE DOOR DE GEBRUIKER KUNNEN WORDEN
CONTACTPUNT KUNT PLAATSEN. VERVANGEN OF ONDERHOUDEN. HET ONDERHOUD MAG ALLEEN
WORDEN UITGEVOERD DOOR BEVOEGDE EN HIERVOOR OPGELEIDE
OPEN DE BEHUIZING NIET. DEZE BEVAT ONDERDELEN DIE ONDER ONDERHOUDSTECHNICI.
HOGE SPANNING STAAN. HET ONDERHOUD MAG ALLEEN WORDEN
UITGEVOERD DOOR BEVOEGDE EN HIERVOOR OPGELEIDE Dit symbool waarschuwt de gebruiker dat de eenheid een niet-
ONDERHOUDSTECHNICI. geïsoleerde voltagebron bevat die sterk genoeg is om elektrische
schokken te veroorzaken. Het is bijgevolg gevaarlijk de onderdelen in
deze eenheid aan te raken.
Dit symbool wijst de gebruiker op belangrijke informatie over de
werking en het onderhoud van deze eenheid. Lees deze informatie
altijd zorgvuldig om eventuele problemen te vermijden.
Inhoud
De doos* van uw nieuwe MultiSync FE2111SB-monitor bevat de
volgende voorwerpen:
• MultiSync FE2111SB-monitor met draai-/kantelvoetstuk
• Voedingskabel
• Kabel voor beeldsignaal (VGA - VGA)
• Gebruikershandleiding
Gebruikershandleiding • Cd-rom:
met de volledige gebruikershandleiding in PDF-indeling en
Windows-bestanden (INF-bestand en kleurenprofiel). Als u de
Cd-rom volledige gebruikershandleiding wilt bekijken, moet Acrobat
Reader 4.0 op de computer zijn geïnstalleerd.
Sales * Bewaar de originele doos en het verpakkingsmateriaal zodat u de

Office List Voedingskabel Kabel voor beeldsignaal monitor later probleemloos kunt vervoeren of verzenden.
(VGA - VGA)
Snel aan de slag

Volg de onderstaande instructies om de MultiSync FE2111SB-
monitor op uw computersysteem aan te sluiten:
1. Zet de computer uit.
2. Installeer indien nodig de videokaart in het systeem. Raadpleeg
de handleiding bij de videokaart voor meer informatie.
3. Voor PC: sluit één uiteinde van de signaalkabel aan op de
connector van de videokaart in uw systeem (zie illustratie A.1).
Draai alle schroeven vast.
Mac-adapter Voor de Macintosh: Sluit de MultiSync Macintosh-kabeladapter
(niet standaard (niet standaard meegeleverd) aan op de computer
meegeleverd) (zie illustratie B.1). Sluit één uiteinde van de signaalkabel aan
op de Macintosh-kabeladapter (zie illustratie B.1).
Nederlands
Illustratie A.1 Illustratie B.1
OPMERKING: voor sommige Macintosh-systemen hebt u geen
Macintosh-kabeladapter nodig.
Stopcontact
4. Sluit het andere uiteinde van de signaalkabel aan op de
achterzijde van de monitor.
OPMERKING: verkeerde kabelaansluitingen kunnen leiden tot
een onbetrouwbare werking en de beeldkwaliteit/onderdelen van
de CRT-monitor verstoren.
5. Het Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP INF-bestand voor de
Voedingskabel MultiSync-monitor staat op de cd-rom die bij de monitor wordt
geleverd.
6. Sluit het uiteinde van de voedingskabel aan op de
voedingsingang van de monitor en steek de stekker van de
voedingskabel in het stopcontact (zie illustratie C.1).
Illustratie C.1 7. Zet de monitor aan (zie illustratie D.1).
Aan/uit-knop 8. Zet de computer aan.
OPMERKING: in geval van problemen raadpleegt u de sectie
Problemen oplossen in deze Gebruikershandleiding.
Stroomindicator
Illustratie D.1
Nederlands-1
08_Dutch 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Besturingselementen
De OSM-besturingsknoppen (On-Screen Manager) bevinden zich Grootte en positie
vooraan op de monitor en hebben de volgende functies: AutoAdjust (Automatische regeling): hiermee laat u de horizontale en
Hoofdmenu Submenu verticale grootte en positie automatisch aanpassen aan de gebruikte
EXIT Hiermee verlaat u het Hiermee schakelt u signaaltiming.
OSM-menu. over naar het
OPMERKING: als er geen beeldsignaal is of als het ingangssignaal van
hoofdmenu met OSM-
besturingselementen. het beeld beperkt is, is AutoAdjust (Automatische regeling) is niet
beschikbaar.
OPMERKING: schakelt het OSM-menu uit en schakelt het OSM-menu weer in
wanneer de OSM niet actief is. Left/Right (Links/rechts): hiermee verplaatst u het beeld op het
scherm horizontaal (naar links of naar rechts).
KNOP / Hiermee verplaatst u de Hiermee verplaatst u de
markeringsbalk naar links of markeringsbalk naar links Down/Up (Omlaag/omhoog): hiermee verplaatst u het beeld verticaal
naar rechts om een van de of naar rechts om een van op het scherm (omhoog of omlaag).
submenu's te selecteren. de opties in het menu te
Narrow/Wide (Smal/breed): hiermee vergroot of verkleint u de breedte
selecteren.
van het beeld (horizontaal).
OPMERKING: wanneer het OSM-menu is uitgeschakeld, werkt deze knop als
Short/Tall (Kort/lang): hiermee vergroot of verkleint u de hoogte van
sneltoets voor Helderheid.
het beeld (verticaal).
KNOP -/+ Hieraan is geen Hiermee verplaatst u de
functie markeringsbalk in de
toegewezen. overeenkomstige richting Kleurenbeheer(systeem)
(– of +) om de instelling te Met de vijf standaardinstellingen voor kleuren (Color Presets 1 tot en
verhogen of te verlagen. met 5) kunt u de gewenste optie voor de kleuren kiezen. De balk wordt
OPMERKING: schakelt het OSM-menu uit en past het Contrast aan als de vervangen door de kleureninstelling (1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5) die u in dit menu
sneltoets “AAN” staat. kiest. Alle kleurenopties zijn in de fabriek vooraf ingesteld en stemmen
overeen met de kleurentemperatuur in de vermelde graden Kelvin. Als u
SELECT/SB MODE Hiermee activeert u Hieraan is geen
het submenu. functie een instelling wijzigt, verandert de naam van de instelling van Kelvin in
toegewezen. Custom (Aangepast).
Wanneer de OSM is uitgeschakeld, werkt dit OPMERKING: met sRGB kunt u niet alle kleuren aanpassen.
besturingselement als de functietoets voor SuperBright Red, Green, Blue (Rood, Groen, Blauw): met het
(SB). Daarbij kunt u kiezen uit SB MODE OFF, SB
kleurenbeheersysteem wijzigt u de monitorinstellingen voor de kleur
MODE1 en SB MODE2. Wanneer u voor het eerst op
deze knop drukt, verschijnt de huidige SB-modus. Als u rood, groen of blauw. Als u een kleur verandert, is dit onmiddellijk
binnen 3 seconden opnieuw op die knop drukt, wordt de zichtbaar op het scherm. De instelling (lager of hoger) wordt door de
SB-modus ingesteld op de volgende SB-modus. De balken aangegeven.
huidige modus is bijvoorbeeld SB MODE OFF. Als u sRGB Mode (sRGB-modus): de modus sRGB biedt voor afbeeldingen
binnen 3 seconden nogmaals op de knop drukt, verandert
de SB-modus in SB MODE1, enzovoort. In elke SB-
het geschikte kleurenbeheer. U kunt de kleuren rood, groen en blauw
modus wordt de kleurentemperatuur aangepast met niet afzonderlijk aanpassen.
behulp van het overeenkomstige kleurbesturingselement. OPMERKING: in deze modus kunt u het kleurenbeheer, de helderheid
Dit geldt niet voor de sRGB-modus omdat de instelling en het contrast niet wijzigen.
hiervan niet kan worden aangepast. Wanneer de eenheid
wordt uitgeschakeld, wordt deze opnieuw op SB MODE
OFF ingesteld.
Geometrische besturingselementen
Super Bright Mode OFF (Modus Extra helderheid Menu met geometrische besturingselementen
UIT): voor op tekst gebaseerde afbeeldingen (normaal
gebruik) Met de Geometry-besturingselementen (Geometrie-
Super Bright Mode-1 ON (Modus Extra helderheid-1 besturingselementen) kunt u de kromming of hoek van de zijkanten van
AAN): voor afbeeldingen het beeld op het scherm aanpassen.
Super Bright Mode-2 ON (Modus Extra helderheid-2
In/Out (pincushion) (Naar binnen/buiten - pincushion): hiermee
AAN): voor bewegende beelden zoals DVD-films
maakt u de kromming van de zijkanten naar binnen of naar buiten groter
RESET Hiermee zet u voor alle Hiermee zet u voor de of kleiner.
besturingselementen in het geselecteerde optie de
geselecteerde menu de fabrieksinstelling terug. Left/Right (pincushion balance) (Naar links/rechts -
fabrieksinstellingen terug. pincushionbalans): hiermee maakt u de kromming van de zijkanten
naar links of naar rechts groter of kleiner.
OPMERKING: wanneer u in het hoofdmenu of een submenu op de knop RESET
drukt, verschijnt op het scherm een waarschuwingsvenster waarin u de reset- Tilt (parallelogram) (Kantelen - parallellogram): hiermee vergroot of
functie kunt selecteren. verkleint u de helling van de zijkanten van het beeld naar links of naar
rechts.
Align (trapezoidal) (Uitlijnen - trapezevervorming): hiermee maakt u
Helderheid/contrast de onderkant van het beeld op het scherm groter of kleiner zodat deze
Brightness (Helderheid): hiermee stelt u de algemene helderheid van
met de bovenkant overeenkomt.
het beeld en de achtergrond op het scherm in.
Rotate (raster rotation) (Roteren - rasterrotatie): hiermee draait u het
Contrast (Contrast): hiermee stelt u de helderheid van het beeld ten
volledige beeld rechtsom of linksom.
opzichte van de achtergrond in.
Corner Correction (Hoekcorrectie): hiermee past u de geometrie van
Degauss (Demagnetiseren): met deze optie kunt u de opbouw van
de hoeken van het beeldscherm aan: Top, Top Balance, Bottom or
zwevende magnetische velden voorkomen. Magnetische velden
Bottom Balance (Bovenaan, Balans bovenaan, Onderaan of Balans
kunnen een invloed uitoefenen op de correcte scanprocessen van de
onderaan).
elektronenstralen en zo afwijkingen veroorzaken in de zuiverheid van
de schermkleuren, beeldscherpte en -convergentie. Als deze functie is
ingeschakeld, is het mogelijk dat het beeld op uw scherm even trilt op
het ogenblik dat het scherm wordt gedemagnetiseerd.
OPMERKING: na het gebruik van de functie Degauss
(Demagnetiseren) moet u minstens 20 minuten wachten alvorens
opnieuw te demagnetiseren.
Constant Brightness (Constante helderheid): hiermee kunt u de
helderheid en schermkleurenniveaus consistent houden gedurende de
normale levensduur van de monitor.
De functie Constant Brightness (Constante helderheid) is pas
volledig operationeel nadat de monitor 30 minuten is opgewarmd.
Nederlands-2
08_Dutch 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Hulpmiddelen 1 IPM System Off Mode (Modus OFF van IPM-systeem):
Moiré Canceler (Moiré annuleren): moiré is een golfpatroon dat soms Enable (Inschakelen): met deze instelling werkt het IPM-systeem
op het scherm verschijnt. Dit is een repetitief patroon zichtbaar als normaal, zodat elke vorm van energiebesparing is ingeschakeld.
beelden met rimpels. Dit golfpatroon is niet bij alle toepassingen even Disable (Uitschakelen): de modus OFF van het IPM-systeem is niet
duidelijk op het scherm zichtbaar. Als u het moiré-effect wilt geactiveerd.
verminderen, past u deze instelling aan met de besturingsknoppen -/+. OPMERKING: voor normale computers en videokaarten is het
Basic Convergence (Basisconvergentie): hiermee voegt u alle drie raadzaam de fabrieksinstelling ENABLE (INSCHAKELEN) te
de kleuren (rood, groen en blauw) samen tot één kleur (wit). Met deze gebruiken.
functie zorgt u dat witte lijnen op het scherm zo scherp en duidelijk OPMERKING: laat de MultiSync-monitor niet aan staan wanneer No
mogelijk worden weergegeven. Signal (Geen signaal) actief is. Hierdoor kan het beeld op het scherm
• Gebruik het besturingselement voor CONVERGENCE (HOR.) inbranden omdat het bericht No Signal (Geen signaal) wordt
(Convergentie - Hor.) om de uitlijning van de witte lijnen naar links weergegeven.
of naar rechts te verplaatsen.
EdgeLock Control (Randvergrendeling): wanneer u geen
• Gebruik het besturingselement voor CONVERGENCE (VER.) standaardtiming voor de monitor gebruikt, kan het beeld donkerder
(Convergentie - Ver.) om de uitlijning van de witte lijnen naar boven dan normaal worden weergegeven of kan kleurvervorming optreden.
of naar beneden te verplaatsen. Gebruik het besturingselement EdgeLock (Randvergrendeling) om de
Linearity (Linealisering): hiermee past u de spatiëring van de zone normale weergave van het beeld te herstellen.
op het scherm aan. Met deze functie zorgt u dat een op het scherm Hot Key (Sneltoets): hiermee kunt u de knoppen / gebruiken
getekende cirkel van één cm overal op het scherm als een cirkel van als besturingselementen voor de helderheid en de knoppen –/+ als
één cm wordt weergegeven. U kunt de verticale linealisering het beste besturingselementen voor het contrast.
als volgt bepalen:
Factory Preset (Fabrieksinstelling): als u de optie Factory Preset
• teken gelijkmatig verdeelde horizontale lijnen in een
(Fabrieksinstelling) kiest, worden voor de meeste OSM-
tekenprogramma waarin u een liniaal op het scherm kunt
besturingselementen opnieuw de fabrieksinstellingen geladen. Op het
weergeven;
scherm verschijnt een waarschuwingsvenster waarin u moet
• gebruik de knop voor Vertical Balance (Verticale balans) om de bevestigen of u voor ALLE functies opnieuw de fabrieksinstellingen
lijnen aan de boven- en onderzijde van het scherm aan te passen; wilt gebruiken. U kunt de instellingen afzonderlijk aanpassen door de
• gebruik de knop voor LINEARITY (VER.) (Linealisering - Ver.) om gewenste functie te selecteren en op de knop RESET te drukken.
de spatiëring tussen de lijnen in het midden en aan de bovenzijde
van uw scherm aan te passen.
Informatie
GlobalSync (GlobalSync-besturingselement): verwijdert Display Mode (Weergavemodus): hiermee kunt u de huidige
beeldonzuiverheden die kunnen worden veroorzaakt door het gebruiksmodus en de frequentie-instelling van de monitor opvragen.
magnetische veld van de aarde. Wanneer u zich in de submenu's
Monitor Info (Monitorgegevens): geeft de naam van het model en
bevindt (GLOBALSYNC, TOP LEFT, TOP RIGHT, BOTTOM LEFT of
het serienummer van de monitor weer.
BOTTOM RIGHT) (GlobalSync, Bovenaan links, Bovenaan rechts,
Onderaan links of Onderaan rechts), gebruikt u de besturingsknoppen Refresh Notifier (Verversingswaarschuwing): als de
-/+ om de GlobalSync-correcties nauwkeurig in te stellen. signaalverversingsfrequentie die door de computer voor de monitor
wordt gebruikt te laag is, verschijnt hierover een bericht op het
OPMERKING: NEC raadt u aan de GlobalSync-correctie toe te passen
scherm. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de handleiding bij uw
wanneer u een veelgebruikte toepassing zoals een
videokaart of computersysteem.
spreadsheetprogramma of tekstverwerker gebruikt.
Hulpmiddelen 2
Language (Taal): de menu's met de OSM-besturingselementen zijn
beschikbaar in zes talen.
OSM Position (Positie OSM): u kunt zelf bepalen waar u het menu
met de OSM-besturingselementen op het scherm wilt laten verschijnen.
Als u OSM Position (OSM-positie) selecteert, kunt u handmatig de
positie van het menu met de OSM-besturingselementen naar links,
naar rechts, omhoog of omlaag verschuiven.
Nederlands
OSM Turn Off (OSM uitschakelen): het menu met de OSM-
besturingselementen blijft op het scherm zolang u het gebruikt. In het
submenu OSM Turn Off (OSM uitschakelen) kunt u opgeven hoe lang
de inactiviteit op de monitor moet duren (nadat u voor het laatst een
knop hebt ingedrukt) voordat het menu met de OSM- Kennisgeving van de fabrikant
besturingselementen verdwijnt. Standaard kunt u de tijd voor deze
inactiviteit opgeven in stappen van 5 seconden (tussen 5 en 120 Hierbij verklaren wij dat de kleurenmonitor MultiSync
seconden). FE2111SB in overeenstemming is met
OSM Lock Out (OSM vergrendelen): hiermee vergrendelt u de 73/23/EEC van de Europese Commissie:
toegang tot alle OSM-functies. Alleen de helderheid en het contrast – EN 60950
kunnen nog worden gewijzigd. Als u probeert de OSM- 89/336/EEC van de Europese Commissie:
besturingselementen opnieuw te gebruiken wanneer de beveiligde – EN 55022
modus is geactiveerd, verschijnt de melding dat de OSM- – EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
besturingselementen zijn vergrendeld. Als u de functie OSM Lock Out – EN 55024
(OSM vergrendelen) wilt inschakelen, drukt u eerst op de knop
en het volgende keurmerk heeft:
SELECT en vervolgens op +. Houd beide knoppen tegelijk ingedrukt.
Als u de functie OSM Lock Out (OSM vergrendelen) wilt uitschakelen,
drukt u eerst op de knop SELECT en vervolgens op +. Houd beide
knoppen tegelijk ingedrukt.

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Minato-Ku
Nederlands-3
08_Dutch 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Aanbevolen gebruik
U KUNT VERMOEIDHEID VAN UW OGEN,
Veiligheidsmaatregelen en onderhoud
SCHOUDERS EN NEK TOT EEN MINIMUM
VOOR EEN OPTIMAAL RESULTAAT BIJ DE BEPERKEN DOOR DE MONITOR
INSTALLATIE EN HET GEBRUIK VAN DE CORRECT TE PLAATSEN EN GOED AF TE
MULTISYNC FE2111SB-KLEURENMONITOR STELLEN. CONTROLEER DE VOLGENDE
IS HET BELANGRIJK DAT U DE PUNTEN WANNEER U DE MONITOR
ONDERSTAANDE INSTRUCTIES VOLGT: INSTALLEERT:
• OPEN NOOIT DE MONITOR. De monitor bevat geen interne • Stel de hoogte van de monitor
onderdelen die door de gebruiker kunnen worden vervangen of zodanig in dat de bovenzijde
onderhouden. Bovendien loopt u het risico op elektrische schokken van het scherm zich op of net
of andere gevaren wanneer u de monitor opent of de behuizing onder ooghoogte bevindt. Uw
verwijdert. Het onderhoud mag alleen worden uitgevoerd door ogen zouden licht omlaag
bevoegde en hiervoor opgeleide onderhoudstechnici. moeten zijn gericht wanneer u
• Mors geen vloeistoffen op het raster van de monitor en gebruik de naar het midden van het
monitor niet in de buurt van water. scherm kijkt.
• Steek geen voorwerpen in de ventilatiegleuven. Deze kunnen in • Plaats de monitor niet
aanraking komen met onderdelen die onder hoogspanning staan, dichter dan 40 cm en niet
wat kan leiden tot elektrische schokken, brand, een defect van het verder dan 70 cm van uw
apparaat of ernstige verwondingen en zelfs de dood. ogen verwijderd. De
optimale afstand voor de
• Plaats geen zware voorwerpen op de voedingskabel. Een
monitor is 60 cm.
beschadigde voedingskabel kan elektrische schokken of brand tot
gevolg hebben. • Ontspan uw ogen door af en toe naar een voorwerp te kijken dat
minstens 6 meter van u is verwijderd. Knipper vaak met de ogen.
• Plaats dit toestel niet op een hellende of onstabiele ondergrond,
houder of tafel. De monitor zou dan kunnen vallen en zo ernstig • Plaats de monitor in een hoek van 90° ten opzichte van ramen
beschadigd raken. en andere lichtbronnen, om eventuele reflecties op het scherm
tot ene minimum te beperken. Stel de hellingshoek van de
• Plaats geen zware transformatoren, elektrische motoren of andere
monitor zodanig in, dat de plafondverlichting niet op het scherm
apparaten, zoals externe luidsprekers of ventilatoren, die sterke
wordt gereflecteerd.
magnetische velden ontwikkelen, in de omgeving van de monitor.
• Als u door het gereflecteerde licht de gegevens op het scherm
• Plaats indien mogelijk de monitor met de voorkant naar het oosten
moeilijk kunt lezen, breng dan een antireflectiefilter op het
gericht. Zo beperkt u het effect van het magnetische veld van de
scherm aan.
aarde tot een minimum.
• Maak de monitor regelmatig schoon.
• Als u de monitor draait wanneer de stroom is ingeschakeld, kan het
beeld mogelijk verkleuren. Om dit te corrigeren, schakelt u de Op het glazen oppervlak van de monitor (beeldbuis) is een
monitor uit en wacht u 20 minuten alvorens deze opnieuw aan te speciale laag aangebracht die reflecties en statische
zetten. elektriciteit op het glazen oppervlak tot een minimum beperkt.
• Als u de MultiSync FE2111SB-monitor gebruikt met de Maak de gevoelige laag op het glazen oppervlak schoon met
geïntegreerde wisselstroomvoeding van 100-120/220-240 V een pluisvrije, niet-schurende doek (katoen of een soortgelijke
(internationaal gebruik), dient u een voedingskabel te gebruiken die stof) en een alcoholvrije, neutrale en niet-schurende
voldoet aan de vereisten voor de voedingsspanning van de reinigingsvloeistof om zoveel mogelijk stofvorming te vermijden.
wisselstroombron waarop u de monitor hebt aangesloten. De Als het scherm grondig moet worden schoongemaakt, neemt u
voedingskabel die u gebruikt, moet zijn goedgekeurd en moet een zachte doek met water of een neutraal reinigingsmiddel
voldoen aan de veiligheidsnormen die in uw land van toepassing met veel water, wringt u de doek uit en maakt u hiermee
zijn. (In Europa is het gebruik van het type H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2 vervolgens het glazen oppervlak schoon.
aanbevolen.) LET OP! De volgende middelen kunnen de beeldbuis
• Gebruikers in Groot-Brittannië dienen een door het BS beschadigen wanneer u hiermee het glazen oppervlak
goedgekeurde voedingskabel met gietstekker en ingebouwde schoonmaakt: Benzeen, verdunner, zuurhoudend/alkalisch
zwarte zekering (5 A) voor de monitor te gebruiken. Als bij de reinigingsmiddel, reinigingsmiddelen op basis van alcohol,
monitor geen voedingskabel is meegeleverd, neemt u contact op reinigingsmiddelen met schuurpoeder, reinigingsmiddelen met
met uw leverancier. een antistatisch middel, reinigingsmiddelen voor schoonmaak.
Haal in de volgende situaties de stekker van de voedingskabel van de • Gebruik de instellingen voor helderheid en contrast om de
monitor onmiddellijk uit het stopcontact en laat het onderhoud of de leesbaarheid te vergroten.
reparatie uitvoeren door bevoegde onderhoudstechnici: • Gebruik een documenthouder en plaats deze dicht bij de monitor.
• Als de voedingskabel of stekker beschadigd is. • Plaats het voorwerp waar u het meeste naar kijkt (het scherm
• Als u een vloeistof op de monitor hebt gemorst of voorwerpen in de of het referentiemateriaal) direct voor u, zodat u uw hoofd zo
monitor hebt laten vallen. weinig mogelijk hoeft te draaien.
• Als de monitor is blootgesteld aan regen of insijpelend water. • Laat uw ogen regelmatig door een arts onderzoeken.
• Als de monitor is gevallen of de behuizing beschadigd is. Ergonomie
• Als de monitor niet correct functioneert hoewel u de normale De volgende aanbevelingen bieden maximale ergonomische
gebruiksinstructies in acht hebt genomen. resultaten:
• Zorg voor een goede ventilatie rond de monitor, zodat • Stel de helderheid van de monitor zo in dat het
de warmte goed kan worden afgevoerd. Controleer achtergrondraster niet meer zichtbaar is.
altijd of de ventilatieopeningen vrij zijn en plaats de • Stel het contrast niet op de maximale waarde in.
LET OP! monitor niet in de buurt van een radiator of andere • Gebruik de fabrieksinstellingen voor de grootte en positie van
warmtebronnen. Plaats nooit voorwerpen op de het beeld, en standaardsignalen.
monitor.
• Gebruik de vooraf ingestelde waarden voor de kleuren en de
• U kunt het beste de monitor van de stroombron linker- en rechterkant van het beeld.
loskoppelen door de stekker van de voedingskabel uit
het stopcontact te nemen. Plaats de monitor dicht bij • Gebruik non-interlaced signalen met een verticale
een stopcontact dat makkelijk bereikbaar is. beeldverversingsfrequentie tussen 75 en 160 Hz.
• Ga voorzichtig te werk als u de monitor moet • Kies bij een donkere achtergrond niet de primaire kleur blauw
verplaatsen of vervoeren. Bewaar de verpakking voor om te vermijden dat u moeilijk leest en uw ogen sneller
een eventueel transport. vermoeid raken.
Nederlands-4
08_Dutch 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

OSTRZE˚ENIE UWAGA
W CELU UNIKNI¢CIA NIEBEZPIECZE¡STWA PO˚ARU LUB PORA˚ENIA NIEBEZPIECZE¡STWO PORA˚ENIA PRÑDEM
PRÑDEM NIE NALE˚Y WYSTAWIAå MONITORA NA DESZCZ LUB NA ELEKTRYCZNYM • NIE OTWIERAå
DZIA¸ANIE WILGOCI. NALE˚Y TAK˚E SPRAWDZIå, CZY BOLCE
WTYCZKI KABLA ZASILAJÑCEGO SÑ PRAWID¸OWO W¸O˚ONE DO UWAGA: UWAGA: W CELU UNIKNI¢CIA NIEBEZPIECZE¡STWA
GNIAZDA ZASILAJÑCEGO LUB GNIAZDA PRZED¸U˚ACZA. WTYCZKI PORA˚ENIA PRÑDEM ELEKTRYCZNYM NIE WOLNO ZDEJMOWAå TYLNEJ
NIE NALE˚Y WK¸ADAå DO GNIAZDA NA SI¸¢. POKRYWY. PRACE NAPRAWCZE I OBS¸UGOWE WEWNÑTRZ OBUDOWY
MO˚E WYKONYWAå JEDYNIE WYKWALIFIKOWANY PERSONEL.
NIE NALE˚Y OTWIERAå OBUDOWY, PONIEWA˚ WEWNÑTRZ
ZNAJDUJÑ SI¢ ELEMENTY POD WYSOKIM NAPI¢CIEM. WSZELKIE Ten symbol ostrzega u˝ytkownika, ˝e nieizolowane elementy wewnàtrz
PRACE SERWISOWE MO˝E WYKONYWAÇ JEDYNIE znajdujà si´ pod tak du˝ym napićiem, i˝ mo˝e ono spowodowaç
WYKWALIFIKOWANY PERSONEL. pora˝enie pràdem elektrycznym. Jakikolwiek bezpoÊredni kontakt
z dowolnym elementem wewnàtrz obudowy jest niebezpieczny.
Ten symbol ostrzega u˝ytkownika, ˝e istotne informacje dotyczàce
pracy i obs∏ugi monitora znajdujà si´ w za∏àczonej literaturze.
W zwiàzku z tym nale˝y szczegó∏owo zapoznaç si´ z nimi w celu
uniknićia problemów.
ZawartoÊç opakowania
Wewnàtrz opakowania monitora MultiSync FE2111SB* powinny
znajdowaç si´:
• Monitor MultiSync FE2111SB z ruchomà podstawà
• Kabel zasilajàcy
• Przewód sygna∏owy (VGA - VGA)
• Podrćznik u˝ytkownika
Podrćznik u˝ytkownika • Dysk CD-ROM.
Dysk ten zawiera pe∏nà wersj´ Podrćznika u˝ytkownika w
formacie PDF oraz pliki w formacie Windows (plik INF i profil
Dysk koloru). Aby otworzyç Podrćznik u˝ytkownika w formacie PDF,
CD-ROM nale˝y zainstalowaç w komputerze program Acrobat Reader 4.0.
Sales * Zalecamy zachowaç oryginalne opakowanie, które mo˝e si´

Office List Przewód Przewód sygna∏owy przydaç w przypadku transportu monitora (serwis, przesy∏ka
zasilajàcy (VGA - VGA) kurierska, itp.).
Pod∏àczenie monitora
W celu pod∏àczenia monitora MultiSync FE2111SB do komputera
nale˝y post´powaç zgodnie z nast´pujàcymi wskazówkami:
1. Wy∏àcz zasilanie komputera.
2. JeÊli to konieczne, zainstaluj kart´ graficznà. Dodatkowych
informacji nale˝y szukaç w dokumentacji karty graficznej.
3. Komputery PC: Pod∏àcz wtyczk´ przewodu sygna∏owego do
gniazda karty graficznej komputera. (Rysunek A.1). Dokr´ç
Adapter do wszystkie Êruby.
komputera Mac Komputery Macintosh: Pod∏àcz do komputera adapter MultiSync
(wyposa˝enie Macintosh (wyposa˝enie dodatkowe) (Rysunek B.1). Pod∏àcz
dodatkywe) wtyczk´ przewodu sygna∏owego do adaptera Macintosh
(Rysunek B.1).
Rysunek A.1 Rysunek B.1
UWAGA: Niektóre komputery Macintosh nie wymagajà
zastosowania adaptera Macintosh.
Gniazdo sieciowe 4. Pod∏àczyç drugi koniec przewodu sygna∏owego do gniazda z ty∏u
komputera.
UWAGA: Nieprawid∏owe pod∏àczenie przewodów mo˝e byç
przyczynà nieprawid∏owej pracy lub uszkodzenia podzespo∏ów
monitora.
Polski
5. Dostarczona wraz z monitorem p∏yta CD-ROM zawiera plik INF

Przewód systemu Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP dla monitora MultiSync.
zasilajàcy 6. Pod∏àcz jeden koniec przewodu zasilajàcego do gniazda pràdu
zmiennego w tylnej cz´Êci monitora, a drugi koniec do gniazdka
zasilajàcego (Rysunek C.1).
7. W∏àcz monitor (Rysunek D.1).
Rysunek C.1
8. W∏àcz komputer.
Przycisk zasilania UWAGA: W razie problemów nale˝y zajrzeç do Podrćznika
U˝ytkownika rozdzia∏: “Usuwanie problemów”.
Wskaênik zasilania
Rysunek D.1
Polski-1
09_Polish 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Przyciski
Przyciski sterowania OSM (ang. On-screen Manager) znajdujàce si´ z Regulacja Kolorów/System Regulacji Kolorów
przodu monitora majà nast´pujàce funkcje: (Colour Control/Colour Control System)
Menu g∏ówne Podmenu Wybierajàc ustawienia od 1 do 5, mo˝na okreÊliç w∏aÊciwy zestaw
EXIT WyjÊcie z menu WyjÊcie do g∏ównego menu kolorów. Pasek jest zamieniany na odpowiednie ustawienie koloru (1, 2,
g∏ównego. OSM. 3, sRGB, 5). Ka˝de ustawienie jest skonfigurowane fabrycznie wed∏ug
UWAGA: Wy∏àcza menu OSM i w∏àcza je, gdy jest wy∏àczone. skali Kelvina. Je˝eli dany zestaw kolorów zostanie zmieniony, jego nazwa
(Kelvin) na nazw´ niestandardowà (Custom).
CONTROL / Przesuwa podÊwietlony Przesuwa podÊwietlony
obszar w lewo lub w prawo obszar w lewo lub w prawo w UWAGA: W trybie sRGB regulacja kolorów nie jest mo˝liwa.
w celu wybrania jednego z celu wybrania jednego z
Nasycenie kolorów (Red, Green, Blue): System regulacji koloru
podmenu. parametrów.
zmniejsza lub zwi´ksza nasycenie koloru czerwonego, zielonego i
UWAGA: Gdy menu OSM jest wy∏àczone, jest przyciskiem skrótu parametru niebieskiego monitora w zale˝noÊci od wyboru u˝ytkownika. Ustawienia
JasnoÊç (Brightness). fabryczne kolorów zosta∏y dobrane na podstawie wieloletnich
CONTROL -/+ Nie ma ˝adnej Przesuwa pasek w gór´ i w doÊwiadczeƒ, opinii u˝ytkowników i sà najbardziej popularnymi
funkcji. dó∏ w celu wybrania jednego z zestawami kolorów dla wi´kszoÊci programów. System regulacji kolorów
parametrów (– lub + — firmy NEC pozwala na indywidualne dopasowanie zestawów kolorów dla
zmniejszenie lub zwi´kszenie ka˝dego u˝ytkownika poprzez sterowaniem ka˝dym z trzech
wartoÊci parametru). podstawowych kolorów oddzielnie. W zale˝noÊci od potrzeb mo˝na
UWAGA: Wy∏àcza menu OSM i s∏u˝y do regulacji kontrastu (Contrast) przy wybraç standardowe ustawienia temperatury kolorów lub ustawiç je
w∏àczonym klawiszu skrótu (“ON”). samemu.
SELECT/SB MODE Otwiera podmenu. Nie ma ˝adnej funkcji. Tryb sRGB: Tryb sRGB zapewnia obraz o odpowiednich kolorach.
U˝ytkownik nie mo˝e zmieniaç kolorów podstawowych (R-czerwony, G-
Gdy menu OSM jest wy∏àczone, jest przyciskiem funkcji
SuperBright (SB). U˝ytkownik mo˝e wybraç nast´pujàce zielony, B-niebieski).
parametry: SB MODE OFF, SB MODE1 i SB MODE2. Po UWAGA: W tym trybie pracy nie mo˝na zmieniaç nast´pujàcych
pierwszym naciÊnićiu przycisku zostanie wyró˝niony bie˝àcy ustawieƒ: Regulacja kolorów (Colour Control), JasnoÊç (Brightness) i
tryb SB. Po ponownym naciÊnićiu tego przycisku w ciàgu 3 Kontrast (Contrast).
sekund bie˝àcy tryb SB MODE zostanie zmieniony na kolejny
tryb SB MODE. Na przyk∏ad, jeÊli w danej chwili jest
ustawiony tryb SB MODE OFF, dwukrotne naciÊnićie
przycisku w ciàgu 3 sekund spowoduje przejÊcie z trybu SB Regulacja geometrii
MODE do trybu SB MODE1 itd. Temperatur´ kolorów w Menu regulacji geometrii
poszczególnych trybach SB ustawia si´ za pomocà Regulacja geometrii umo˝liwia wyregulowanie krzywizny i kàtów ekranu.
odpowiednich parametrów regulacji kolorów. Nie dotyczy to
trybu sRGB, którego ustawieƒ nie mo˝na regulowaç. Gdy Poduszka/beczka (In/Out (pincushion)): Równoczesna regulacja
monitor jest wy∏àczony, tryb SB jest wy∏àczony. krzywizn obu pionowych kraw´dzi ekranu, do wewnàtrz i na zewnàtrz.
Tryb SB wy∏àczony (Super Bright Mode OFF): Tryb pracy w Poduszka/∏uk (Left/Right (pincushion balance)): Równoczesna
przypadku wyÊwietlania tekstów (standardowy tryb pracy). regulacja krzywizn obu pionowych kraw´dzi ekranu, w lewo lub w prawo.
Tryb SB-1 w∏àczony (Super Bright Mode-1 ON): Tryb
Równoleg∏obok (Tilt (parallelogram)): Równoczesna regulacja
pracy w przypadku wyÊwietlania obrazów.
Tryb SB-2 w∏àczony (Super Bright Mode-2 ON): Tryb pracy nachylenia obu pionowych kraw´dzi ekranu, w lewo lub w prawo.
w przypadku wyÊwietlania obrazów, takich jak filmy DVD. Wyrównanie trapezoidalne (Align (trapezoidal)): Regulacja d∏ugoÊci
RESET Przywraca fabryczne Przywraca fabryczne dolnej kraw´dzi ekranu w stosunku do d∏ugoÊci kraw´dzi górnej.
ustawienia parametrów z ustawienia parametrów z Obrót (raster rotation): Obrót ca∏ego obrazu w prawo lub w lewo.
podÊwietlonego menu. podÊwietlonego menu.
Korekcja naro˝ników (Corner Correction): Umo˝liwia regulacj´
UWAGA: Po naciÊnićiu przycisku RESET w menu g∏ównym i podmenu na geometrii naro˝ników ekranu – góra (Top), wywa˝enie – góra (Top
ekranie pojawia si´ okno z ostrze˝eniem, w którym mo˝na w∏àczyç t´ funkcj´. Balance), dó∏ (Bottom) lub wywa˝enie – dó∏ (Bottom Balance).
Regulacja jasnoÊci/kontrastu Narz´dzia 1

JasnoÊç (Brightness): Umo˝liwia pe∏nà regulacj´ jasnoÊci obrazu i t∏a. Redukcja efektu mory (Moire Canceller): Mora jest to zjawisko
Kontrast (Contrast): Regulacja jasnoÊci obrazu w stosunku do t∏a. falistego wype∏nienia obrazu, które niekiedy pojawia si´ na ekranie.
Rozmagnesowanie (Degauss): Usuwa ewentualne pozosta∏oÊci pola Sk∏ada si´ z powtarzajàcych si´ i nak∏adajàcych si´ na siebie falujàcych
magnetycznego, które mog∏oby niekorzystnie wp∏ywaç na strumienie obrazów. W niektórych aplikacjach te faliste wype∏nienia sà bardziej
elektronów, a co za tym idzie – na jakoÊç obrazu. Po uruchomieniu tej widoczne ni˝ w innych. Aby ograniczyç efekt mory, nale˝y wyregulowaç
funkcji obraz b´dzie przez chwil´ skaka∏ i falowa∏, a˝ do poziom redukcji za pomocà przycisków –/+.
rozmagnesowania. Podstawowa zbie˝noÊç (Basic convergence): Reguluje zbie˝noÊç
UWAGA: Nie nale˝y uruchamiaç funkcji rozmagnesowania zbyt cz´sto, wszystkich trzech kolorów podstawowych (czerwonego, zielonego i
a w szczególnoÊci nie szybciej ni˝ po 20 minutach od ostatniego niebieskiego), tak aby tworzy∏y jeden kolor (bia∏y). Dzi´ki temu
rozmagnesowania. parametrowi regulacji bia∏a linia wyÊwietlana na ekranie jest maksymalnie
ostra i wyraêna.
Sta∏a jasnoÊç (Constant Brightness): Utrzymuje jasnoÊç i kolory • Funkcja regulacji zbie˝noÊci w poziomie CONVERGENCE (HOR.)
obrazu na sta∏ym poziomie przez ca∏y okres korzystania z monitora. s∏u˝y do regulowania po∏o˝enia bia∏ych linii w kierunku lewo/prawo.
Przed w∏àczeniem funkcji Constant Brightness monitor musi
nagrzewaç si´ przez 30 minut. • Funkcja regulacji zbie˝noÊci w pionie CONVERGENCE (VER.) s∏u˝y
do regulowania po∏o˝enia bia∏ych linii w kierunku góra/dó∏.
LiniowoÊç (Linearity): S∏u˝y do regulowania odst´pów pomi´dzy liniami
Regulacja rozmiaru (Size) i pozycji (Position) na ekranie. Dzi´ki tej funkcji u˝ytkownik ma pewnoÊç, ˝e rysunek okr´gu
Regulacja automatyczna (AutoAdjust): Automatyczna regulacja o Êrednicy jednego cala jest naprawd´ okr´giem o Êrednicy jednego cala,
rozmiaru i pozycji w poziomie i w pionie dla ró˝nych pr´dkoÊci niezale˝nie od tego, w której cz´Êci ekranu jest wyÊwietlany. Najprostszy
odÊwie˝ania. sposób regulacji liniowoÊci:
UWAGA: JeÊli na wejÊciu nie ma sygna∏u obrazu lub sygna∏ ten jest zbyt • Narysuj równo od siebie oddalone linie poziome, u˝ywajàc programu
s∏aby, funkcja AutoAdjust jest niedost´pna. do rysowania, który ma linijk´.
Prawo/Lewo: Przesuwa obraz w poziomie (w lewo lub prawo). • Regulujàc ustawienia parametru Vertical Balance , rozsuƒ linie w
Dó∏/Góra: Przesuwa obraz w pionie (w dó∏ lub w gór´). kierunku górnej i dolnej kraw´dzi ekranu.
Rozmiar poziomy (Narrow/Wide): Powi´ksza lub pomniejsza wielkoÊç • Za pomocà parametru LINEARITY (VER.) ustaw odst´py pomi´dzy
obrazu w poziomie. liniami po∏o˝onymi na Êrodku i w górnej cz´Êci ekranu.
Rozmiar pionowy (Short/Tall): Powi´ksza lub pomniejsza wielkoÊç
obrazu w pionie.
Polski-2
09_Polish 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Uwagi dotyczàce zasilania monitora
Funkcja GlobalSync: Eliminuje zak∏ócenia obrazu wynikajàce z • Od∏àczenie urzàdzenia od sieci zasilania nast´puje po wyciàgnićiu
oddzia∏ywania pola magnetycznego Ziemi. W podmenu (GLOBALSYNC, wtyczki sznura sieciowego z gniazda, które powinno byç
TOP LEFT, TOP RIGHT, BOTTOM LEFT lub BOTTOM RIGHT) usytuowane w pobli˝u urzàdzenia i byç ∏atwo dost´pne.
przyciskami –/+ nale˝y dok∏adnie ustawiç korekcj´ GlobalSync.
• Dla wype∏nienia warunków przepisów IEC 60950 (tzn. równie˝ PN-
UWAGA: NEC zaleca dokonywanie korekcji funkcjà GlobalSync 93/T-42107) w zakresie bezpieczeƒstwa u˝ytkownika zobowiàzuje
podczas pracy z typowà aplikacjà, na przyk∏ad z arkuszem si´ instalatora urzàdzenia do wyposa˝enia instalacji elektrycznej
kalkulacyjnym lub z dokumentem tekstowym. budynku (pomieszczenia), gdzie b´dzie pracowaç,rezerwowà
ochron´ przed zwarciami w przewodzie fazowym za pomocà
Narz´dzia 2 bezpiecznika 10 A.
J´zyk (Language): Funkcje sterowania menu OSM sà dost´pne w
szeÊciu j´zykach. UWAGA: Urzàdzenie musi byç zasilane z gniazda z
Po∏o˝enie menu OSM (OSM menu position): Mo˝esz wybraç miejsce przy∏àczonym obwodem ochronnym (gniazdo z bolcem).
na ekranie, w którym ma pojawiaç si´ menu OSM. Wybranie OSM Przed w∏o˝eniem wtyczki do gniazda nale˝y sprawdziç
Position umo˝liwia rćznà regulacj´ menu OSM w lewo lub w prawo, miejsce przy∏àczenia przewodów fazowego i zerowego w
oraz w gór´ lub w dó∏. gnieêdzie. Je˝eli lokalizacja przewodów nie jest zgodna
Wy∏àczanie menu OSM (OSM Turn Off): Menu OSM b´dzie tak d∏ugo z rysunkiem, to dla bezpieczeƒstwa u˝ytkowania musi byç
wyÊwietlane na ekranie, jak d∏ugo b´dzie u˝ywane. W podmenu OSM dokonana odpowiednia zmiana. Przeprowadzenie
Turn Off (Wy∏àcz OSM) mo˝esz okreÊliç, jak d∏ugo po naciÊnićiu powy˝szych czynnoÊci nale˝y zleciç specjaliÊcie
przycisków menu OSM monitor ma czekaç, zanim menu OSM zniknie. elektrykowi. Wspó∏pracujàce ze sobà urzàdzenia
DomyÊlnie czas ten wynosi od 5 do 120 sekund w odst´pach 5-
komputerowe (komputer, drukarka, monitor itp.) muszà byç
sekundowych.
zasilane z tego samego êród∏a z zachowaniem powy˝szych
Zablokowanie menu OSM (OSM Lock Out): Ta funkcja ca∏kowicie
zasad.
blokuje dost´p do wszystkich funkcji menu OSM, z wyjàtkiem jasnoÊci i
kontrastu. Przy próbie aktywowania regulacji OSM przy zablokowanym
menu OSM, na ekranie pojawi si´ informacja o zablokowaniu menu
OSM. Aby w∏àczyç blokad´ menu OSM, naciÊnij przycisk SELECT, a
nast´pnie naciÊnij i przytrzymaj przycisk +. Aby wy∏àczyç blokad´ menu zero
OSM, naciÊnij przycisk SELECT, nast´pnie naciÊnij i przytrzymaj
przycisk +.
Wy∏àczanie systemu oszcz´dzania energii IPM (IPM System Off zero faza
Mode):
W∏àczony: System oszcz´dzania energii IPM pracuje normalnie i
wykorzystuje wszystkie etapy oszcz´dzania energii.
Wy∏àczony (Disable): System oszcz´dzania energii IPM nie jest
u˝ywany.
Widok gniazda od strony
UWAGA: Przy wspó∏pracy z normalnymi systemami i kartami
graficznymi nale˝y zachowaç ustawienia fabryczne (ENABLE).
UWAGA: JeÊli zostanie wyÊwietlony komunikat “No Signal” (brak
sygna∏u), nale˝y wy∏àczyç monitor. W przeciwnym wypadku wyÊwietlany
komunikat mo˝e “wypaliç si´” na ekranie.
Dostrajanie do cz´stotliwoÊci (EdgeLock Control): U˝ytkowanie
urzàdzenia przy cz´stotliwoÊci niestandardowej mo˝e sprawiç, ˝e
obrazy b´dà ciemniejsze ni˝ zazwyczaj, a kolory b´dà zniekszta∏cone.
Wykorzystanie funkcji EdgeLock pozwala na przywrócenie normalnego
wyglàdu obrazu.
Przyciski skrótów (Hot Key): Dzi´ki tej opcji do regulacji jasnoÊci
mo˝na u˝ywaç przycisków / , a do regulacji kontrastu mo˝na
u˝ywaç przycisków –/+. OÊwiadczenie Wytwórcy
Ustawienia fabryczne (Factory Preset): Wybranie opcji Factory Preset
powoduje przywrócenie fabrycznych wartoÊci wi´kszoÊci ustawieƒ menu Niniejszym oÊwiadczamy, ˝e ten kolorowy monitor
MultiSync FE2111SB jest zgodny z
OSM. Wówczas na ekranie pojawi si´ okno ostrzegajàce, ˝e u˝ytkownik
chce zmieniç WSZYSTKIE ustawienia. Poszczególne parametry mogà Dyrektywà Rady 73/23/EEC:
byç przywracane do ustawieƒ fabrycznych poprzez wybranie ich – EN 60950
(podÊwietlenie) i naciÊnićie przycisku RESET. Dyrektywà Rady 89/336/EEC:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
Informacje – EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
Polski
Tryb pracy (Display Mode): Dzi´ki tej funkcji mo˝liwe jest otrzymanie
informacji o aktualnej rozdzielczoÊci wyÊwietlanego obrazu oraz i jest oznaczony symbolem
aktualnych cz´stotliwoÊciach odchylania poziomego i pionowego.
Informacje na temat monitora (Monitor Info): WyÊwietla nazw´
modelu i numer seryjny monitora.
Zbyt ma∏a cz´stotliwoÊç odÊwie˝ania (Refresh Notifier): Je˝eli
szybkoÊç odÊwie˝ania obrazu, którà zapewnia sygna∏ pochodzàcy z
Systems Corporation
karty graficznej , jest zbyt wolna, odpowiedni komunikat pojawi si´ na
4-13-23, Shibaura,
ekranie monitora. Wówczas nale˝y sprawdziç poprawnoÊç dzia∏ania
Minato-Ku
karty graficznej lub zmieniç parametry jej pracy.
Znak B przyznany przez POLSKIE

CENTRUM BADA¡ I CERTYFIKACJI
Polski-3
09_Polish 3 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Zalecenia eksploatacyjne
PRAWID¸OWE USTAWIENIE ORAZ
Zasady bezpieczeƒstwa i konserwacji
REGULACJA MONITORA MOGÑ
ABY UTRZYMAå OPTYMALNE ZMNIEJSZYå ZM¢CZENIE OCZU,
PARAMETRY PRACY MONITORA RAMION i SZYI. ZALECA SI¢
KOLOROWEGO MULTISYNC FE2111SB, STOSOWANIE DO PONI˚SZYCH
NALE˚Y PRZESTRZEGAå WSKAZÓWEK:
NAST¢PUJÑCYCH ZASAD:
• NIE OTWIERAå MONITORA. Wewnàtrz monitora nie ma ˝adnych • Nale˝y tak ustawiç wysokoÊç
elementów, które móg∏by naprawiç lub obs∏ugiwaç u˝ytkownik. monitora, aby górna cz´Êç
Zdjćie obudowy grozi pora˝eniem pràdem elektrycznym oraz ekranu znajdowa∏a si´ troch´
innymi niebezpieczeƒstwami. Wszelkie prace serwisowe mo˝e poni˝ej poziomu oczu. Oczy
wykonywaç jedynie wykwalifikowany personel. powinny byç skierowane
• Nie wolno rozlewaç cieczy na obudow´ monitora ani u˝ywaç go w lekko w dó∏ podczas
pobli˝u wody. patrzenia w Êrodek ekranu.
• Nie wolno wk∏adaç ˝adnych przedmiotów w szczeliny obudowy, • Monitor nale˝y umieÊciç nie
poniewa˝ mogà dotykaç elementów znajdujàcych si´ pod bli˝ej ni˝ 40 cm i nie dalej ni˝
napićiem, co mo˝e spowodowaç zagro˝enie dla zdrowia lub ˝ycia, 70 cm od oczu. Optymalna
pora˝enie pràdem elektrycznym, po˝ar lub uszkodzenie sprz´tu. odleg∏oÊç wynosi 60 cm.
• Nie wolno umieszczaç ˝adnych ci´˝kich przedmiotów na przewodzie • Okresowo nale˝y daç oczom
zasilajàcym. Uszkodzenie przewodu zasilajàcego mo˝e odpoczàç patrzàc na
spowodowaç pora˝enie pràdem lub po˝ar. przedmiot oddalony o przynajmniej 6 m. Nale˝y cz´sto mrugaç
• Nie wolno stawiaç monitora na pochy∏ych lub niestabilnych wózkach, powiekami.
stojakach lub sto∏ach, poniewa˝ monitor mo˝e upaÊç i w rezultacie • Ustawiç monitor pod kàtem 90° do okna lub innych êróde∏
ulec zniszczeniu lub niebezpiecznej awarii. Êwiat∏a, aby zminimalizowaç odbicie Êwiat∏a. Ustawiç przechy∏
• Monitor nale˝y trzymaç z dala od transformatorów du˝ej mocy, monitora tak, aby Êwiat∏o emitowane przez oÊwietlenie
silników elektrycznych i innych urzàdzeƒ, takich jak zewn´trzne umieszczone na suficie nie odbija∏o si´ od ekranu.
g∏oÊniki lub wentylatory, które mogà wytwarzaç silne pola • Je˝eli odbijajàce si´ Êwiat∏o utrudnia patrzenie na ekran, nale˝y
magnetyczne. zastosowaç filtr antyodblaskowy.
• Je˝eli jest to mo˝liwe, nale˝y skierowaç monitor na wschód, aby • Nale˝y regularnie czyÊciç monitor.
zminimalizowaç pole magnetyczne Ziemi. Kineskop monitora jest pokryty specjalnà warstwà,
• Zmiana kierunku ustawienia monitora podczas pracy mo˝e ograniczajàcà odbicia i dzia∏anie ∏adunków statycznych na jego
powodowaç zmiany kolorów obrazu. Aby tego uniknàç, nale˝y powierzchni.
wy∏àczyç komputer na 20 minut przed ponownym w∏àczeniem. Poniewa˝ warstwa ochronna kineskopu jest delikatna, nale˝y
• Korzystajàc z monitora MultiSync FE2111SB wraz z jego czyÊciç jà mi´kkà, niestrz´piàcà si´ szmatkà (bawe∏nianà lub
uniwersalnym zasilaczem sieciowym 100-120/220-240V, nale˝y podobnà) oraz bezalkoholowym, oboj´tnym, delikatnym
stosowaç przewód zasilajàcy odpowiedni dla u˝ywanego gniazda roztworem Êrodka czyszczàcego, aby zmniejszyç dzia∏anie
sieciowego. Przewód zasilajàcy musi odpowiadaç normom kurzu. JeÊli konieczne jest dok∏adne czyszczenie monitora,
bezpieczeƒstwa kraju, w którym jest u˝ywany (w Europie nale˝y nale˝y to robiç mi´kkà szmatkà zwil˝onà wodà lub oboj´tnym
stosowaç typ H05VV-F 3G 0,7 mm2). roztworem detergentu w du˝ej iloÊci wody (po uprzednim
• W Wielkiej Brytanii nale˝y stosowaç przewód zatwierdzony przez dok∏adnym wykrćeniu).
Brytyjski Standard z wtyczkà wyposa˝onà w czarny (5A) bezpiecznik UWAGA: Ârodki wymienione poni˝ej mogà spowodowaç
przeznaczony do stosowania z tym monitorem. Je˝eli przewód uszkodzenie kinseskopu: benzen, rozcieƒczalniki, detergenty
zasilajàcy nie zosta∏ dostarczony razem z monitorem, nale˝y kwasowe/alkaliczne, detergenty alkoholowe, detergenty z
skontaktowaç si´ ze sprzedawcà. zawartoÊcià proszku, detergenty z zawartoÊcià Êrodka
antystatycznego, detergenty czyszczàce.
W razie zaistnienia nast´pujàcych okolicznoÊci, nale˝y niezw∏ocznie
od∏àczyç komputer od gniazdka zasilajàcego: • Nale˝y ustawiç jasnoÊç i kontrast monitora w celu uzyskania
• Gdy przewód zasilajàcy lub wtyczka sà uszkodzone. optymalnej widzialnoÊci.
• Gdy na monitor zostanie rozlana ciecz lub wpadnà do niego obce • Uchwyty na dokumenty nale˝y ustawiaç blisko ekranu.
przedmioty. • To, na co patrzy si´ najcz´Êciej (ekran lub dokumenty), powinno
• Je˝eli monitor zosta∏ nara˝ony na dzia∏anie deszczu lub wody. znajdowaç si´ na wprost oczu w celu zmniejszenia krćenia
g∏owà podczas pisania.
• Monitor upad∏ i jego obudowa zosta∏a uszkodzona,
• Nale˝y regularnie kontrolowaç wzrok u okulisty.
• Monitor nie dzia∏a normalnie pomimo stosowania si´ do zaleceƒ
zawartych w instrukcji. Ergonomia
• Nale˝y zapewniç wystarczajàcà wentylacj´ wokó∏ W celu zapewnienia maksymalnej ergonomii zaleca si´ stosowanie
monitora w celu w∏aÊciwego rozproszenia ciep∏a. Nie do poni˝szych wskazówek:
wolno zas∏aniaç otworów wentylacyjnych oraz ustawiaç • Nale˝y tak ustawiç jasnoÊç, aby znikn´∏a siatka t∏a.
UWAGA monitora w pobli˝u grzejników lub innych êróde∏ ciep∏a. • Nie nale˝y ustawiaç maksymalnej wartoÊci kontrastu.
Nie wolno k∏aÊç ˝adnych przedmiotów na górnà cz´Êç
• Przy korzystaniu ze standardowych sygna∏ów nale˝y ustawiç
monitora.
wartoÊci fabryczne rozmiaru i pozycji.
• Wyjćie wtyczki przewodu zasilajàcego jest
• Ustawiç fabrycznie wartoÊci kolorów oraz po∏o˝enia.
podstawowym sposobem na od∏àczenie monitora od
zasilania. Monitor powinien byç zainstalowany w pobli˝u • Nale˝y stosowaç sygna∏ bez przeplotu z cz´stotliwoÊcià
gniazdka, do którego jest ∏atwy dost´p. odÊwie˝ania pionowego w zakresie 75-160 Hz.
• Podczas transportu nale˝y ostro˝nie obchodziç si´ z • Nale˝y unikaç u˝ywania koloru niebieskiego na ciemnym tle,
monitorem. Opakowanie nale˝y zachowaç na wypadek poniewa˝ jest on trudno widoczny i powoduje zmćzenie oczu z
transportu monitora w przysz∏oÊci. powodu ma∏ego kontrastu.
Polski-4
09_Polish 4 14/5/02, 11:55 am

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ
ВО ИЗБЕЖАНИЕ ВОЗГОРАНИЯ ИЛИ ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ОПАСНОСТЬ ПОРАЖЕНИЯ
ТОКОМ НЕ ПОДВЕРГАЙТЕ АППАРАТ ВОЗДЕЙСТВИЮ ДОЖДЯ ИЛИ ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ • НЕ ОТКРЫВАТЬ
ВЛАГИ. КРОМЕ ТОГО, НЕ ВСТАВЛЯЙТЕ ПОЛЯРНУЮ ВИЛКУ
УСТРОЙСТВА В РОЗЕТКУ УДЛИНИТЕЛЯ ИЛИ ДРУГИЕ РОЗЕТКИ, ВНИМАНИЕ: ЧТОБЫ УМЕНЬШИТЬ РИСК ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ
ЕСЛИ ЕЕ ШТЫРЬКИ НЕ ВХОДЯТ ПОЛНОСТЬЮ. ТОКОМ, НЕ СНИМАЙТЕ КРЫШКУ (ИЛИ ЗАДНЮЮ ПАНЕЛЬ). ВНУТРИ
АППАРАТА НЕТ ДЕТАЛЕЙ, ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕ КОТОРЫХ МОЖЕТ
НЕ ОТКРЫВАЙТЕ КОРПУС, ТАК КАК ВНУТРИ НАХОДЯТСЯ ДЕТАЛИ ВЫПОЛНЯТЬ ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЬ. ПО ВОПРОСАМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЯ
ПОД ВЫСОКИМ НАПРЯЖЕНИЕМ. ПО ВОПРОСАМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЯ ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К КВАЛИФИЦИРОВАННОМУ СПЕЦИАЛИСТУ.
ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К КВАЛИФИЦИРОВАННОМУ СПЕЦИАЛИСТУ.
Этот знак предупреждает пользователей о том, что внутри
устройства находятся неизолированные детали под высоким
напряжением, которые могут стать причиной поражения
электрическим током. Поэтому ни в коем случае нельзя
прикасаться к каким-либо деталям внутри устройства.
Этот знак предупреждает пользователей о том, что имеется
важная документация по эксплуатации и обслуживанию этого
устройства. Поэтому ее необходимо внимательно прочитать,
чтобы избежать возможных проблем.
Содержимое
В упаковочной коробке* нового монитора MultiSync FE2111SB
должно быть следующее:
• Монитор MultiSync FE2111SB с шарнирной опорой
• Кабель питания
• Кабель видеосигнала (VGA - VGA)
• Руководство пользователя
Руководство пользователя • CD-ROM:
содержит полное руководство пользователя в формате PDF
и соответствующие файлы для Windows (файл INF и
CD-ROM цветовой профиль). Для просмотра полного руководства
пользователя необходимо, чтобы на Вашем ПК была
установлена программа Acrobat Reader 4.0.
Sales
Office List Кабель Кабель видеосигнала * Обязательно сохраните коробку и упаковочный материал
питания (VGA -VGA) для транспортировки или перевозки монитора.
Краткое руководство по началу работы

Чтобы подключить монитор MultiSync FE2111SB к системе,
выполните следующие инструкции:
1. Отключите питание компьютера.
2. Если необходимо, установите плату видеоадаптера в
систему. Для получения подробных сведений см.
руководство по плате видеоадаптера.
3. Для PC: Подсоедините один конец кабеля видеосигнала к
разъему платы видеоадаптера в компьютере (рисунок A.1).
Адаптер для Затяните все винты.
Mac (не входит Для Mac: Подсоедините адаптер кабеля для MultiSync
в комплект) Macintosh (не входит в комплект) к компьютеру
(рисунок B.1). Подсоедините один конец кабеля
Рисунок A.1 Рисунок B.1
видеосигнала к адаптеру кабеля для Macintosh (рисунок B.1).
Розетка электропитания ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Для некоторых компьютеров Macintosh
адаптер кабеля Macintosh не требуется.
4. Подсоедините другой конец кабеля видеосигнала к разъему
на задней панели монитора.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Неправильное подсоединение кабелей
может привести к неустойчивой работе, снизить качество
Кабель изображения на дисплее/повредить компоненты кинескопа
питания монитора.
5. Файл INF Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP INF для монитора
MultiSync можно найти на CD-ROM, поставляемом с
монитором.
Русский
Рисунок C.1 6. Подсоедините один конец кабеля питания к гнезду AC на

задней панели монитора, а другой - к розетке
Кнопка питания электропитания (рисунок C.1).
7. Включите монитор (рисунок D.1).
8. Включите компьютер.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. В случае каких-либо неполадок обратитесь
к разделу Устранение неисправностей этого руководства
Индикатор питания пользователя.
Рисунок D.1
Русский-1
10_Russian 1 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Органы управления
Кнопки управления OSM (Экранного меню) на передней панели Параметры размера и положения
монитора выполняют следующие функции: AutoAdjust (Автонстройка): Автоматическая настройка размера и
Главное меню Подменю положения по горизонтали и вертикали для соответствующих
EXIT Выход из меню OSM. Выход в главное меню параметров синхронизации.
OSM.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Функция автонастройки недоступна, если входной
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Отключает меню OSM и выключает меню OSM, когда оно сигнал изображения отсутствует или слушком узкий.
выключено.
Left/Right (Влево/вправо): Перемещение изображения по
CONTROL / Перемещение Перемещение горизонтали (влево или вправо).
выделенной области выделенной области
влево или вправо для влево/вправо для Down/Up (Вниз/вверх): Перемещение изображения по вертикали
выбора одного из выбора одного из (вверх или вниз).
подменю. параметров. Narrow/Wide (Уже/шире): Уменьшение или увеличение
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Когда меню OSM отключено, используется для быстрого горизонтального размера изображения.
доступа к регулировке яркости. Short/Tall (Короче/длиннее): Уменьшение или увеличение
CONTROL -/+ Не Перемещение полосы вертикального размера изображения.
функционирует. индикатора в
направлении - или + для
уменьшения или Параметры цвета/Система регулировки цвета
увеличения значения С помощью заданных палитр цветов от 1 до 5 можно выбрать
настройки. нужную настройку цвета. Полоса индикатора заменяется на одну
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Отключает меню OSM и используется для настройки из следующих настроек цвета 1, 2, 3, sRGB, 5. Каждая настройка
контрастности, когда для параметра Клавиши быстрого доступа цвета установлена на заводе в положение по шкале Кельвина. При
установлено значение “ВКЛ” изменении настройки ее название меняется с Kelvin на Custom
(Настраиваемая).
SELECT/SB MODE Вход в подменю. Не функционирует.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. В режиме sRGB невозможно настроить отдельные
Когда меню OSM отключено, эта кнопка цвета.
работает как функциональная клавиша
SuperBright (SB). Пользователь может выбрать Red, Green, Blue (Красный, зеленый, синий): Система
режимы SB MODE OFF, SB MODE1 или SB регулировки цвета - уменьшение или увеличение красного,
MODE2. При первом нажатии кнопки зеленого или синего в зависимости от выбранного параметра.
отображается текущий режим SB. Если в Цвета на экране изменятся, а направление (в сторону уменьшения
течение 3 секунд нажать эту кнопку еще раз, или увеличения) будет показано с помощью полос индикаторов.
режим SB MODE изменится на следующий sRGB Mode (Режим sRGB): Режим sRGB предоставляет
режим SB MODE. Например, если в текущем возможность получить изображения с подходящей настройкой
режиме SB MODE OFF кнопка нажимается цветовой палитры. Красный, зеленый и синий цвета нельзя
дважды в течение 3 секунд, режим SB MODE изменять по отдельности.
изменится на SB MODE1 и т.д. Цветовая ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. В этом режиме цвета, яркость и контрастность не
температура в каждом режиме SB регулируются.
настраивается с помощью соответствующего
параметра цвета, кроме режима sRGB,
настройка цветов в котором невозможна. Параметры геометрии
После выключения устройства на нем Меню Параметры геометрии
восстанавливается режим выключения SB.
Режим Super Bright выкл: для изображений с
Параметры геометрии позволяют регулировать кривизну или угол
текстом (обычное использование) наклона краев экрана.
Режим Super Bright Mode-1 вкл: для изображений In/Out (Внутрь/Наружу) (подушка изображения): Уменьшение
Режим Super bright Mode-2 вкл: для движущихся или увеличение искривления сторон экрана внутрь или наружу.
изображений, например, для фильмов DVD
Left/Right (Вправо/Влево) (баланс подушки): Уменьшение или
RESET Сброс всех параметров в Сброс выделенного увеличение искривления сторон экрана влево или вправо.
выделенном меню до параметра до значения,
значений, установленных установленного на Tilt (Наклон) (параллелограмм): Уменьшение или увеличение
на заводе. заводе. наклона сторон экрана влево или вправо.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. При нажатии кнопки RESET в главном или подменю Align (Выравнивание) (трапеция): Уменьшение или увеличение
появляется предупреждающее сообщение, которое позволяет выбрать нижней части экрана до размера верхней части.
функцию сброса. Rotate (Поворот) (поворот растра): Вращение всего экрана по
часовой или против часовой стрелки.
Параметры яркости/контрастности Corner Correction (Коррекция углов): Позволяет настроить
Brightness (Яркость): Настройка общей яркости изображения и геометрию углов изображения - Top (Сверху), Top Balance (Баланс
фона экрана. сверху), Bottom (Снизу) или Bottom Balance (Баланс снизу).
Contrast (Контрастность): Настройка яркости изображения по
отношению к фону.
Degauss (Размагничивание): Устранение излишних рассеянных
магнитных полей, которые изменяют правильную развертку пучка
электронов и влияют на четкость цветов на экране, фокус и
сведение. При активизации этого параметра изображение на
экране будет некоторое время прыгать и дрожать во время
размагничивания экрана.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Между операциями по размагничиванию должно
пройти не менее 20 минут.
Constant Brightness (Постоянная яркость): Поддерживает
уровни яркости и цветов экрана постоянными на протяжении
обычного срока эксплуатации монитора.
Для оптимальной работы функции постоянной яркости перед ее
вызовом монитор должен прогреться в течение не менее 30
минут.
Русский-2
10_Russian 2 14/5/02, 11:55 am

Инструменты 1 ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Для обычных компьютеров и плат
видеоадаптеров необходимо включить заводские настройки
Moire Canceler (Подавление муара): Муар - это волнистые линии,
(положение ENABLE).
которые иногда появляются на экране. Линии повторяются и
пересекаются, как рябь на изображении. При работе в ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Отключите монитор MultiSync при получении
определенных приложениях эти волнистые линии более заметны, сообщения об отсутствии сигнала. В противном случае на экране
чем в других. Чтобы уменьшить муар, отрегулируйте его уровень с может сохраниться остаточное изображение от надписи ‘No
помощью кнопок -/+. Signal’ (Нет сигнала).
Basic Convergence (Основное сведение): Сведение всех трех EdgeLock Control (Параметры EdgeLock): При эксплуатации
цветов (R,G,B - красный, зеленый, синий) для образования одного монитора с нестандартной синхронизацией изображение может
цвета (белого). Этот параметр гарантирует максимально четкое и отображаться темнее, чем обычно, или с искажением цветности.
резкое изображение белой линии на экране. С помощью регулятора EdgeLock можно подстроить изображение
• Используйте параметр CONVERGENCE (HOR.) (СВЕДЕНИЕ до нормального состояния.
(ГОР,)) для выравнивания белых линий, перемещая их влево Hot Key (Клавиша быстрого доступа): Выбор этого параметра
или вправо.
позволяет использовать кнопки / как регулятор яркости, а
• Используйте параметр CONVERGENCE (VER.) (СВЕДЕНИЕ кнопки -/+ как регулятор контрастности.
(ВЕР.)) для выравнивания белых линий, перемещая их вверх
Factory Preset (Заводские настройки): Выбор параметра
или вниз.
Заводские настройки позволяет выполнить сброс большинства
Linearity (Линейность): Этот параметр позволяет настроить параметров OSM до значений, установленных на заводе.
отступы от области изображения на экране. Он гарантирует, что Появится предупреждающее сообщение с просьбой подтвердить
кружок диаметром один дюйм будет отображаться, как кружок сброс ВСЕХ параметров. Можно сбросить отдельные настройки,
диаметром один дюйм, в какой бы части экрана он ни находился. для чего необходимо их выделить и нажать кнопку RESET.
Наилучший способ определения линейности по кадрам
следующий:
• Нарисуйте горизонтальные линии на одинаковом расстоянии
Информация
друг от друга с помощью графического приложения, в котором Display Mode (Режим отображения): Информация о текущем
есть линейка. режиме и настройке частоты монитора.
Monitor Info (Информация о мониторе): Информация о номере
• Используйте параметр баланса по вертикали, чтобы
модели и серийном номере монитора.
отрегулировать линии, расположенные рядом с верхней и
нижней частью экрана. Refresh Notifier (Уведомление о регенерации): Сообщение,
уведомляющее о том, что уровень регенерации видеосигнала,
• Используйте параметр LINEARITY (VER.) (ЛИНЕЙНОСТЬ
поступающего на монитор с компьютера, слишком низкий. Для
(ВЕР.), чтобы отрегулировать расстояние между линиями,
получения дополнительных сведений см. руководство по плате
расположенными рядом с центральной и верхней частью
видеоадаптера или по компьютеру.
экрана.
GlobalSync Control (Управление GlobalSync): Позволяет
избежать искажения изображения, причиной которых может быть
влияние магнитного поля земли. В подменю (GLOBALSYNC, TOP
LEFT (Слева вверху), TOP RIGHT (Справа вверху), BOTTOM LEFT
(Слева внизу) или BOTTOM RIGHT (Справа внизу)) используйте
кнопки управления -/+, чтобы точно настроить корректировки
GlobalSync.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. NEC рекомендует выполнять корректировки
GlobalSync во время работы в стандартных приложениях,
например, электронных таблицах или текстовых документах.
Инструменты 2
Language (Язык): Меню параметров OSM переведены на шесть Заявление изготовителя
языков.
OSM Position (Положение меню OSM): Можно выбрать, в каком
Мы настоящим подтверждаем, что данный цветной
месте экрана должно отображаться меню параметров OSM. При монитор MultiSync FE2111SB соответствует
выборе параметра Положение меню OSM можно вручную
Директиве Совета 73/23/EEC:
перемещать меню параметров OSM влево, вправо, вверх или – EN 60950
вниз.
Директиве Совета 89/336/EEC:
OSM Turn Off (Отключение меню OSM): Меню параметров OSM – EN 55022
будет оставаться на экране, пока оно используется. В подменю – EN 61000-3-2
Отключение меню OSM можно выбрать время ожидания – EN 61000-3-3
монитора после последнего нажатия кнопки до закрытия меню – EN 55024
параметров OSM. Предварительно заданные значения от 5 до 120 и содержит отметку
секунд с шагом 5 секунд.
OSM Lock Out (Блокировка меню OSM): С помощью этого
параметра можно полностью заблокировать доступ ко всем
функциям параметров OSM, кроме Яркость и Контрастность. При
попытке активизации параметров OSM в режиме блокировки NEC-Mitsubishi Electric Visual
появится сообщение, указывающее, что параметры OSM Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Русский
заблокированы. Чтобы включить функцию блокировки меню

OSM, нажмите кнопку SELECT, затем + и удерживайте обе кнопки Minato-Ku
нажатыми. Чтобы выключить функцию блокировки меню OSM, Tokyo 108-0023, JAPAN
нажмите кнопку SELECT, затем + и удерживайте обе кнопки
нажатыми.
IPM System Off Mode (Режим отключения системы IPM):
Enable (Включить): Система IPM работает в обычном режиме,
используя все этапы экономии энергии.
Disable (Отключить): Режим отключения системы IPM не
используется.
Русский-3
10_Russian 3 14/5/02, 11:56 am

Рекомендации по эксплуатации
ПРАВИЛЬНОЕ РАЗМЕЩЕНИЕ И
Техника безопасности и техническое обслуживание
РЕГУЛИРОВКА МОНИТОРА
ПРИ УСТАНОВКЕ И ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИИ СНИЖАЕТ УТОМЛЕНИЕ ГЛАЗ,
ЦВЕТНОГО МОНИТОРА MULTISYNC ПЛЕЧ И ШЕИ. ПРИ РАЗМЕЩЕНИИ
FE2111SB ДЛЯ ЕГО ОПТИМАЛЬНОЙ МОНИТОРА ВЫПОЛНЯЙТЕ
РАБОТЫ СОБЛЮДАЙТЕ СЛЕДУЮЩИЕ УСЛОВИЯ:
СЛЕДУЮЩЕЕ:
• НЕ ВСКРЫВАЙТЕ МОНИТОР. Внутри аппарата нет деталей, • Отрегулируйте высоту
которые может ремонтировать пользователь, поэтому монитора, чтобы верхний
открытие и снятие корпуса может привести к опасному край экрана находился
поражению электрическим током и другим травмам. Любое немного ниже уровня глаз.
техническое обслуживание должен выполнять Если смотреть на центр
квалифицированный специалист. монитора, взгляд должен
• Не допускайте попадания жидкостей внутрь корпуса или быть направлен немного
использования монитора рядом с водой. вниз.
• Не вставляйте никакие предметы в отверстия в корпусе, так • Устанавливайте монитор
как они могут соприкасаться с деталями под высоким так, чтобы экран находился
напряжением, что может быть опасно или привести к не ближе 40 см и не дальше
летальному исходу, или вызвать поражение электрическим 70 см от глаз. Оптимальное
током, возгорание или неисправность аппарата. расстояние - 60 см.
• Не кладите тяжелые предметы на кабель питания. • Давайте глазам отдых, периодически фокусируя взгляд на
Повреждение кабеля может привести к поражению предмете, находящемся на расстоянии не менее 6 м. Чаще
электрическим током или возгоранию. моргайте.
• Не ставьте этот аппарат на тележку, подставку или стол с • Располагайте монитор под углом 90° к окнам и другим
наклонной или неустойчивой поверхностью, так как монитор источникам света, чтобы уменьшить блики и отражения.
может упасть, что приведет к его серьезному повреждению. Отрегулируйте наклон монитора так, чтобы свет
• Не допускайте использования монитора в непосредственной потолочных светильников не отражался на экране.
близости от мощных трансформаторов, электрических • Если отражаемый свет затрудняет просмотр изображения,
двигателей и других устройств, таких как внешние используйте антибликовый фильтр.
громкоговорители или вентиляторы, создающих сильные • Протирайте монитор
магнитные поля.
На поверхность стекла (кинескопа) в этом мониторе
• По возможности разместите монитор так, чтобы его экран был нанесено специальное покрытие для уменьшения бликов и
направлен на восток, для уменьшения влияния магнитного статического электричества на поверхности экрана.
поля земли.
Так как покрытие на поверхности стекла является очень
• Перемещение работающего монитора может вызвать тонким, используйте мягкую ткань без ворса, неабразивную
изменение цвета изображения. Чтобы устранить это, ткань (хлопок или эквивалентный материал), а также
отключите монитор на 20 минут и снова включите его. нейтральные чистящие растворы, не содержащие спирта и
• Если монитор MultiSync FE2111SB работает от стандартного не повреждающие поверхность, чтобы предотвратить
источника питания переменного тока 100-120/220-240В, оседание пыли. Если легкой чистки для экрана
необходимо использовать кабель питания, соответствующий недостаточно, хорошо смочите водой или слабым водным
напряжению этой электрической сети. Кабель питания должен раствором нейтрального моющего средства мягкую ткань,
соответствовать стандартам безопасности Вашей страны. (В отожмите ее и очистите поверхность стекла.
Европе необходимо использовать кабель H05VV-F 3G 0,7 мм2) ВНИМАНИЕ. Следующие вещества повреждают кинескоп
• В Великобритании с этим монитором необходимо во время чистки поверхности стекла: Бензол, разбавитель;
использовать кабель питания, одобренный BS, с вилкой в средства: кислотно/щелочные, спиртосодержащие, с
литом корпусе, в которую вмонтирован черный абразивным порошком, с антистатиком, чистящие.
предохранитель (5 A). Если кабель питания не входит в • Отрегулируйте яркость и контрастность монитора для
комплект этого монитора, обратитесь к поставщику. удобства просмотра.
В случае возникновения следующих ситуаций немедленно • Используйте держатели документов, расположенные
отключите кабель питания монитора из электрической розетки и рядом с экраном.
вызовите квалифицированного специалиста: • Расположите то, с чем Вы работаете чаще всего (экран или
• Если поврежден кабель питания или вилка. справочные материалы), непосредственно перед собой,
• Если в монитор попала жидкость или какие-либо предметы. чтобы уменьшить количество поворотов головы при печати.
• Если монитор попал под дождь или в воду. • Регулярно проверяйте зрение.
• При падении монитора или повреждении корпуса. Эргономика
• Если монитор не работает должным образом при выполнении Для максимальной эргономики рабочего места рекомендуется
инструкций по эксплуатации. следующее:
• Обеспечьте необходимое свободное пространство • Отрегулируйте яркость таким образом, чтобы исчез
вокруг монитора для вентиляции и правильного фоновый растр
рассеивания тепла. Не закрывайте • Не устанавливайте максимальное значение контрастности
ВНИМАНИЕ вентиляционные отверстия и не размещайте
• Используйте предварительно установленные параметры
монитор в непосредственной близости от батарей
размера и положения со стандартными видеосигналами
отопления и других источников тепла. Не кладите
ничего на монитор. • Используйте предварительно установленные параметры
цветности и настройки левой/правой стороны экрана
• Кабель питания является основным средством для
отключения системы от источника питания. • Используйте видеосигналы с прогрессивной разверткой с
Монитор необходимо устанавливать рядом с уровнем регенерации видеосигнала по вертикали
легкодоступным источником питания. 75-160 Гц
• Соблюдайте осторожность при перевозке. • Не используйте синий цвет в качестве основного цвета на
Сохраните упаковку на случай перевозки. темном фоне, так как недостаточная контрастность приводит
к зрительному утомлению и быстрой усталости глаз
Русский-4
10_Russian 4 14/5/02, 11:56 am

D∑KKAT UYARI
YANGIN VE ΩOK TEHL∑KELER∑N∑ ÖNLEMEK ∑Ç∑N C∑HAZ YA∏MUR YA ELEKTR∑K ΩOKU R∑SK∑ • AÇMAYIN
DA NEME MARUZ KALMAMALIDIR. AYRICA BU C∑HAZIN POLAR∑ZE
F∑Ω∑N∑ UÇLAR TAM OTURMADI∏I SÜRECE B∑R UZATMA KABLOSU YA UYARI: ELEKTR∑K ΩOKU R∑SK∑N∑ AZALTMAK ∑Ç∑N, KAPA∏I AÇMAYIN
DA BAΩKA PR∑ZLERDE KULLANMAYIN. (VEYA ARKASINI). ∑Ç KISIMDA KULLANICININ ∑LG∑LENEB∑LECE∏∑
HERHANG∑ B∑R PARÇA BULUNMAMAKTADIR. SERV∑S ∑Ç∑N YETK∑L∑
∑ÇER∑S∑NDE YÜKSEK VOLTAJLI B∑LEΩENLER BULUNDU∏U ∑Ç∑N SERV∑S PERSONEL∑NE BAΩVURUN.
KASAYI AÇMAKTAN KAÇININ SERV∑S ∑Ç∑N YETK∑L∑ SERV∑S
PERSONEL∑NE BAΩVURUN. Bu sembol kullan∂c∂y∂ cihaz∂n içindeki izole edilmemiµ voltaj∂n elektrik
µoku yaratabilecek büyüklükte olduπu konusunda uyar∂r. Bu yüzden
cihaz∂n içerisindeki herhangi bir parça ile temas tehlikelidir.
Bu sembol kullan∂c∂y∂ bu cihaz∂n kullan∂m∂ ve bak∂m∂ ile ilgili önemli
belgelerin pakete dahil olduπu konusunda bilgilendirir. Bu yüzden,
herhangi bir soruna yol açmamak için dikkatle okunmal∂d∂r.
∑çindekiler
Yeni MultiSync FE2111SB monitör kutunuz* aµa©∂dakileri
içermelidir:
• MultiSync FE2111SB Monitör ve monitör aya©∂
• Güç kablosu
• Video Sinyal Kablosu (VGA - VGA)
• Kullan∂c∂ K∂lavuzu
Kullan∂c∂ Klavuzu • CD-ROM:
PDF format∂nda Kullan∂c∂ Klavuzunun tamam∂n∂ ve Windows ile
ilgili dosyalar∂ (INF dosyas∂ ve renk profilleri) içerir. Kullan∂c∂
CD-ROM Klavuzunun tamam∂n∂ görmek için, bilgisayar∂n∂zda Acrobat
Reader 4.0 yüklü olmal∂d∂r.
Sales * Monitörü taµ∂mak veya bir yere göndermek için orjinal kutusunu
Office List Güç Kablosu Video Sinyal Kablosu ve ambalaj malzemesini saklamay∂ unutmay∂n.
(VGA - VGA)
H∂zl∂ Baµlama
MultiSync FE2111SB monitörü sisteminize ba©lamak için,
aµa©∂daki talimatlar∂ izleyin:
1. Bilgisayar∂n∂z∂ kapat∂n.
2. E©er gerekliyse sisteminize ekran kart∂ tak∂n. Daha fazla bilgi
için, ekran kart∂n∂z∂n kullan∂m k∂lavuzuna bak∂n.
3. PC ∑çin: Sinyal kablosunun bir ucunu sisteminizdeki ekran
kart∂n∂n ba©lay∂c∂s∂na tak∂n (Ωekil A.1). Tüm vidalar∂ s∂k∂n.
Mac ∑çin: MultiSync Macintosh kablo adaptörünü (dahil de©ildir)
bilgisayara ba©lay∂n (Ωekil B.1). Sinyal kablosunun bir ucunu
Mac Adaptörü Macintosh kablo adaptörüne tak∂n (Ωekil B.1).
(dahil deπil) NOT: Baz∂ Macintosh sistemlerinde Macintosh kablo adaptörüne
Ωekil A.1 Ωekil B.1 gerek yoktur.
4. Sinyal kablosu ba©lay∂c∂s∂n∂n öbür ucunu monitörün arkas∂na
ba©lay∂n.
Elektrik Prizi NOT: Yanl∂µ kablo ba©lant∂s∂ düzensiz çal∂µmaya yol açabilir,
CRT monitörünün görüntü/parça kalitesine zarar verebilir.
5. MultiSync monitörünüz için Windows® 95/98/2000/Me/XP INF
dosyas∂ monitörünüzle birlikte gelen CD-ROM’da bulunabilir.
6. Güç kablosunun bir ucunu monitörün arkas∂ndaki AC giriµine,
di©er ucunu da elektrik prizine tak∂n (Ωekil C.1).
Güç Kablosu 7. Monitörü aç∂n (Ωekil D.1).

8. Bilgisayar∂ aç∂n.
NOT: Herhangi bir problemle karµ∂laµt∂©∂n∂zda, bu Kullan∂c∂
K∂lavuzunun Sorun Giderme bölümüne bak∂n.
Ωekil C.1
Güç Dü©mesi
Güç Göstergesi
Türkçe
Ωekil D.1
Türkçe-1
11_Turkish 1 14/5/02, 11:56 am

Kontroller
Monitörün ön k∂sm∂ndaki OSM (Ekran Üstü Kontrol) kontrol dü©meleri Renk Kontrolü/Renk Kontrol Sistemi
aµa©∂daki gibi çal∂µ∂r: 1 den 5’e kadar olan Color Presets (Önceden Belirlenmiµ Renk Ayarlar∂)
Ana Menü Alt Menü istenilen renk ayar∂n∂ seçer. Çubuk 1,2, 3, sRBG, 5 aras∂ndaki renk
EXIT (ÇIKIΩ) OSM menüsünden OSM kontrolleri ana seçimi ile yer de©iµir. Her renk ayar∂ belirtilen Kelvin için fabrikada
ç∂k∂µ. menüsüne dönüµ. ayarlanm∂µt∂r. E©er ayar de©iµtirilirse ayar∂n ad∂ Kelvin’den Custom
NOT: OSM kapal∂ iken OSM menüsünü devre d∂µ∂ b∂rak∂r / aktive eder.
(Kullan∂c∂ Tan∂ml∂)ya de©iµir.
NOT: sRGB her rengi ayarlaman∂za izin vermez.
KONTROL / Alt menülerden birini Kontrollerde birini seçmek
seçmek için vurgulu alan∂ için vurgulu alan∂ sola/ Red, Green, Blue (K∂rm∂z∂, Yeµil, Mavi): Renk Kontrol Sistemi seçilene
sola/sa©a hareket ettirir. sa©a hareket ettirir. ba©l∂ olarak monitörün k∂rm∂z∂, yeµil veya mavi tabancas∂n∂ azalt∂r veya
NOT: OSM menüsü kapal∂ iken Parlakl∂k için k∂sayol olarak çal∂µ∂r. artt∂r∂r. Renkteki de©iµim ekranda görülür ve yön (azaltme veya artt∂rma)
çubuk üzerinde gösterilir.
CONTROL Bir fonksiyonu Ayar∂ azaltmak veya
(KONTROL) -/+ yoktur. artt∂rmak için çubu©u - sRGB Modu: sRGB modu uygun renklerle resim görüntüsü sa©lar.
veya + yönünde hareket K∂rm∂z∂, Yeµil, ve Mavi renkleri tek tek de©iµtiremezsiniz.
ettirir. NOT: Bu modda, Renk Kontrolü, Parlakl∂k ve Kontrast ayarlanamaz.
NOT: OSM menüsünü devre d∂µ∂ b∂rak∂r ve Kestirme tuµ “AÇIK” oldu©unda
Kontrast∂ ayarlar.
Geometri Kontrolleri
SELECT/SB MODE Alt menüye girer. Bir fonksiyonu
(SEÇ/SB MODU) yoktur. Geometri Kontrolleri Menüsü
Geometry (Geometri) kontrolleri ekran∂n∂z∂n köµelerindeki yuvarlakl∂©∂
OSM menüsü kapal∂ iken Süper Parlakl∂k (SB) fonksiyon
veya aç∂y∂ ayarlaman∂z∂ sa©lar.
tuµu olarak çal∂µ∂r Kullan∂c∂ SB MODE OFF (SB MODU
KAPALI), SB MODE1 ve SB MODE2 aras∂nda seçim In/Out (∑ç/D∂µ) (pincushion): Köµelerin yuvarlakl∂©∂n∂ içe veya d∂µa
yapabilir. Bu tuµa ilk bas∂ld∂©∂nda, mevcut SB modu azalt∂r ya da artt∂r∂r.
gösterilir. Üç saniyelik bir pencere içerisinde, e©er bu tuµa
tekrar bas∂l∂rsa SB MODE bir sonraki SB MODE ile
Left/Right (Sol/Sa©) (pincushion dengesi): Köµelerin yuvarlakl∂©∂n∂
de©iµir. Örne©in, mevcut mod SB MODE OFF ise, sola veya sa©a azalt∂r ya da artt∂r∂r.
3 saniye içerisinde bu tuµa bir kez daha bas∂l∂rsa SB Tilt (E©im) (paralkenar): Kenarlar∂n e©imini sola veya sa©a azalt∂r ya
MODE de©iµerek SB MODE1 olur ve bu µekilde devam da artt∂r∂r.
eder. Her SB Modun renk ∂s∂s∂, renk ayarlar∂
de©iµtirilemeyen sRGB modu d∂µ∂nda uygun renk kontrolü Align (Hizala) (trapezoidal): Ekran∂n taban∂n∂ üstüyle ayn∂ olacak
taraf∂ndan ayarlan∂r. Ünite kapat∂ld∂©∂nda SB off moduna µekilde azalt∂r ya da artt∂r∂r.
s∂f∂rlan∂r.
Rotate (Döndür) (tram dönüµü): Ekran∂n tümünü saat yönünde veya
Super Bright Mode OFF (Süper Parlak Mod KAPALI): saat yönünün aksinde döndürür.
metin tabanl∂ görüntüler için (normal kullan∂m)
Super Bright Mode-1 ON (Süper Parlak Mod-1 AÇIK):
Corner Correction (Köµe Düzeltme): Ekran∂n∂z∂n köµelerinin
görüntüler için geometrisini düzeltmenize imkan verir – Üst, Üst Denge, Alt veya Alt
Super Bright Mode-2 ON (Süper Parlak Mod-2 AÇIK): Denge.
DVD filmler gibi hareketli görüntüler için
RESET Vurgulanm∂µ menüdeki tüm Vurgulanm∂µ ayar∂ fabrika Araçlar 1
(SIFIRLA) kontrolleri fabrika ayar∂na döndürür. Moiré Canceler (Moiré Azalt∂c∂): Moiré ekranda bazen beliren dalgal∂
ayarlar∂na döndürür.
bir görüntüdür. Görüntü kendi kendini tekrar eder ve dalgal∂ görüntü
NOT: Ana ve alt menüde RESET (SIFIRLA) dü©mesine bas∂ld∂©∂nda, s∂f∂rlama olarak üst üste biner. Belirli uygulamalar çal∂µt∂r∂ld∂©∂nda, dalgal∂
iµlemini seçmenize olanak sa©layan bir uyar∂ penceresi belirir. görüntü di©erlerinde oldu©undan daha belirgindir. Moiré’yi azaltmak için,
–/+ Control (kontrol) dü©meleri ile Level (seviye) ayar∂n∂ yap∂n.
Parlakl∂k/Kontrast Kontrolleri Temel Bir Noktada Toplanma: Tek bir renk (beyaz) oluµturmak için üç
Brightness (Parlakl∂k): Ekrandaki görüntü ve arka fon parlakl∂©∂n∂ rengi (K,Y,M) hizalar. Bu kontrolün amac∂ ekranda çizilen beyaz bir
ayarlar. çizginin mümkün oldu©unca temiz ve net olmas∂d∂r.
Contrast (Kontrast): Arka fona ba©l∂ olarak görüntü parlakl∂©∂n∂ • Beyaz çizgilerin sol/sa© yönde hizalanmas∂n∂ ayarlamak için Bir
ayarlar. Noktada Toplama (Yatay) kontrolü kullan∂n.
Degauss: Elektron ∂µ∂malar∂n∂n do©ru taranmas∂n∂ bozan ve ekrandaki • Beyaz çizgilerin aµa©∂ yukar∂ yönde hizalanmas∂n∂ ayarlamak için
renkleri, netli©i ve bir noktada toplanmay∂ etkileyen manyetik alanlar∂n Bir Noktada Toplama (Dikey) kontrolü kullan∂n.
oluµmas∂n∂ engeller. Çal∂µt∂r∂ld∂©∂nda, ekran demanyetize edilirken Linearity (Do©rusall∂k): Bu seçim ekran üzerindeki alanlar∂n aralar∂n∂
ekrandaki görüntü z∂plar ve dalgalan∂r. ayarlaman∂za izin verir. Bu kontrolün amac∂ ekran üzerinde nerede
NOT: Degauss fonksiyonunun kullan∂mlar∂ aras∂nda en az 20 dakika çizilmiµ olursa olsun bir inç çap∂ndaki bir dairenin gerçekten bir inç
olmal∂d∂r. çap∂nda oldu©unu garanti etmektir. Dikey do©rusall∂©∂ belirlemenin en iyi
yolu aµa©∂daki µekildedir:
Constant Brightness (Sabit Parlakl∂k): Parlakl∂k ve ekran rengi
• Cetveli olan bir çizim uygulamas∂ ile eµit aral∂kl∂ yatay çizgiler çizin.
seviyelerini monitörün normal ömrü süresince sabit olarak korur.
Sabit Parlakl∂k fonksiyonu tam olarak fonksiyonel olmadan önce • Vertical Balance (Dikey Denge) kontrolünü kullanarak çizgileri
monitörün 30 dakika ∂s∂nmas∂n∂ gerektirir. ekran∂n alt∂na ve üstüne ayarlay∂n.
• Do©rusall∂k (Dikey) kontrolü kullanarak çizgilerin aras∂ndaki
mesafeyi ekran∂n ortas∂ ve üstüne ayarlay∂n.
Boyut ve Konum Kontrolleri
AutoAdjust (Otomatik Ayar): Uygulanabilir zamanlamalar için, yatay GlobalSync Kontrolü: Dünyadaki manyetik alan sebebiyle
ve dikey boyut ve pozisyon ayarlar∂n∂ otomatik olarak ayarlar. oluµabilecek görüntü bozulmalar∂n∂ düzeltir. Alt menülerdeyken
(GLOBALSYNC, ÜST SOL, ÜST SA⁄, ALT SOL VEYA ALT SA⁄),
NOT: Otomatik Ayar görüntü sinyali yokken veya dar boyutlu görüntü GlobalSync düzeltmelerine ince ayar yapmak için –/+ kontrol
sinyal giriµi ile çal∂µmaz. dü©melerini kullan∂n.
Left/Right (Sol/Sa©): Görüntüyü yatay olarak kayd∂r∂r (sol veya sa©). NOT: NEC, GlobalSync düzeltmelerini spreadsheet veya metin belgesi
Down/Up (Aµa©∂/Yukar∂): Görüntüyü dikey olarak kayd∂r∂r (yukar∂ veya gibi tipik bir uygulama aç∂kken yapman∂z∂ tavsiye eder.
aµa©∂).
Narrow/Wide (Dar/Geniµ): Görüntünün yatay boyutunu azalt∂r veya
artt∂r∂r.
Short/Tall (K∂sa/Uzun): Görüntünün dikey boyutunu azalt∂r veya
artt∂r∂r.
Türkçe-2
11_Turkish 2 14/5/02, 11:56 am

Araçlar 2
Language (Dil): OSM kontrol menüleri alt∂ dildedir.
OSM Position (OSM Konumu): OSM kontrol menüsünün ekran∂n∂z∂n
neresinde belirmesini istedi©inizi seçebilirsiniz. OSM konumunu
seçmek OSM kontrol menüsünü sol, sa©, aµa©∂ ve yukar∂ manuel
olarak ayarlaman∂za imkan verir.
OSM Turn Off (OSM Kapatma): OSM kontrol menüsü kullan∂mda
oldu©u sürece aç∂k kalacakt∂r. OSM Turn Off (Kapatma) alt
menüsünde, OSM kontrol menüsünün kapat∂lmas∂ için monitörün son
dü©meye dokunulduktan sonra ne kadar bekleyece©ini seçebilirsiniz.
Önceden ayarlanm∂µ seçenek 5 saniyedir, 5-120 saniye aras∂nda
seçilebilir.
OSM Lock Out (OSM Kilitleme): Bu kontrol parlakl∂k ve kontrast
kontrolü d∂µ∂ndaki tüm OSM fonksiyonlar∂na eriµimi tamamen kilitler.
OSM kontrollerini kilitleme modundayken kullanmaya çal∂µ∂rsan∂z,
OSM kontrollerinin kilitli oldu©unu bildiren bir ekran belirir. OSM Lock
Out (OSM Kilitleme) fonksiyonunu aktive etmek için, SELECT (Seç)
dü©mesine bas∂p sonra + dü©mesine basarak her ikisini bas∂l∂ tutun.
OSM Lockout (OSM Kilitleme) devre d∂µ∂ b∂rakmak için, SELECT (SEÇ)
dü©mesine bas∂p sonra + dü©mesine basarak herikisini bas∂l∂ tutun.
IPM System Off Mode (IPM Sistem Kapal∂ Modu):
Enable (Etkin): IPM Sistemi normal çal∂µ∂r, enerji tasarrufunun tüm
evreleri kullan∂l∂r.
Disable (Devre D∂µ∂): IPM’in Off Mode (Kapal∂ Modu) kullan∂lmaz.
NOT: Standart sistemler ve grafik kartlar∂ için fabrika ayar∂n∂ ENABLE
(Etkin) olarak tutun.
NOT: ‘No Signal’ (Sinyal Yok) durumunda MultiSync monitörü aç∂k
b∂rakmay∂n. Bu gösterilen “Sinyal Yok” mesaj∂ndan dolay∂ ekranda
görüntü yanmas∂na yol açabilir.
EdgeLock Control (Uç Kilit Kontrolü): Monitörünüzü standart d∂µ∂
zamanlamalarla çal∂µt∂rmak, görüntülerin daha karanl∂k gözükmesine
veya renk da©∂lmalar∂na yol açar. EdgeLock (Uç Kilit) kontrolünün
kullan∂m∂ görüntüleri normal durumlar∂na döndürür.
Kestirme Tuµ: Bu seçim parlakl∂k kontrolü olarak / ve kontrast
kontolü olarak –/+ kullanman∂za izin verir.
Factory Preset (Fabrika Ayarlar∂): Factory Preset (Fabrika Ayarlar∂)
seçmek OSM kontrol ayarlar∂n∂n ço©unu fabrika ayarlar∂na geri
döndürmenize izin verir. ALL (Tüm) ayarlar∂ s∂f∂rlamak istedi©inizi
onaylaman∂z∂ isteyen bir uyar∂ mesaj∂ belirir. Ayarlar∂ tek tek s∂f∂rlamak
için, s∂f∂rlamak istedi©iniz kontrolü vurgulay∂p RESET (S∂f∂rla)
dü©mesine bas∂n.
Bilgi
Display Mode (Görüntü Modu): Monitörün mevcut mod ve frekans
ayar∂n∂ gösterir.
Monitor Info (Monitör Bilgisi): Monitörünüzün model ve seri
numaras∂n∂ gösterir.
Refresh Notifier (Yenilenme Hat∂rlat∂c∂): Bilgisayardan monitöre
gelen sinyalin yenilenme oran∂ çok düµük oldu©unda bir mesaj sizi
uyar∂r. Daha fazla bilgi için ekran kart∂n∂z∂n veya sistemin kullan∂m
k∂lavuzuna bak∂n.
Üreticinin Bildirimi
Burada bildirmekteyiz ki, renkli monitör MultiSync
FE2111SB aµaπ∂da belirtilenlere uygundur
Konsey Yönetmeliπi 73/23/EEC:
– EN 60950
Konsey Yönetmeliπi 89/336/EEC:
– EN 55022
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
ve aµaπ∂daki iµarete sahiptir

Systems Corporation
4-13-23, Shibaura,
Türkçe
Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-0023, JAPONYA
Türkçe-3
11_Turkish 3 14/5/02, 11:56 am

Tavsiye edilen kullan∂m
MON∑TÖRÜN DO⁄RU
Güvenlik Uyar∂lar∂ ve Bak∂m
YERLEΩT∑R∑LMES∑ VE
MULTISYNC FE2111SB RENKL∑ AYARLANMASI GÖZ, OMUZ VE
MON∑TÖRÜ KURARKEN VE BOYUN A⁄RILARINI AZALTAB∑L∑R.
KULLANIRKEN EN ∑Y∑ PERFORMANS MON∑TÖRÜNÜZÜ YERLEΩT∑R∑RKEN
∑Ç∑N LÜTFEN AΩA⁄IDAK∑ NOKTALARA AΩA⁄IDAK∑LERE D∑KKAT ED∑N:
D∑KKAT ED∑N:
• MON∑TÖRÜ AÇMAYIN. ∑ç k∂s∂mda kullan∂c∂n∂n ilgilenebilece©i • Monitörün yüksekli©ini ekran
herhangi bir parça bulunmamaktad∂r ve kapa©∂ açmak ya da göz seviyesinde veya biraz
ç∂kartmak sizi ciddi µok tehlikeleri veya di©er risklere maruz alt∂nda olacak µekilde
b∂rakabilir. Tüm bak∂m iµleri için yetkili servis elemanlar∂na ayarlay∂n. Ekran∂n ortas∂na
baµvurun. bakarken gözlerinin çok hafif
• Kasaya herhangi bir s∂v∂ dökmeyin ya da monitörünüzü su aµa©∂ya do©ru bakmal∂d∂r.
yak∂n∂nda kullanmay∂n. • Monitör gözlerinize 40
• Tehlikeli voltaj noktalar∂na temas ederek, zararl∂ ya da öldürücü cm’den yak∂n ve 70 cm’den
olabilece©i veya elektrik µoku, yang∂n ya da cihaz ar∂zas∂na yol uzak olmamal∂d∂r. En iyi
açabilece©i için kasadaki yuvalara herhangi bir cisim sokmay∂n. mesafe 60 cm’dir.
• Güç kablosu üzerine a©∂r cisimler koymay∂n. Kablodaki hasar µok • Gözlerinizi periyodik olarak
ya da yang∂na yol açabilir. en az 6 m. uzaktaki bir
• Monitörün düµmesine ve ciddi µekilde hasar görmesine sebep nesneye odaklayarak
olabilece©i için bu ürünü e©imli ya da dengesiz taµ∂y∂c∂, stand veya dinlendirin. S∂k s∂k göz k∂rp∂n.
masa üzerine yerleµtirmeyin. • Parlama ve yans∂malar∂ en aza indirmek için monitörü pencere
• Monitörü güçlü manyetik alan yaratabilecek yüksek kapasiteli ve di©er ∂µ∂k kaynaklar∂na 90° aç∂ ile yerleµtirin. Monitörün
transformatörler, elektrik motorlar∂ ve harici hoparlörler veya fanlar e©imini ayarlayarak tavan ∂µ∂klar∂n∂n ekran∂n∂za yans∂mas∂n∂
gibi di©er ayg∂tlardan uzak tutun. engelleyin.
• E©er mümkünse monitörü do©u yönünde yerleµtirerek dünyan∂n • E©er ∂µ∂k yans∂malar∂ ekran∂n∂z∂ görmeyi zorlaµt∂r∂yorsa,
manyetik alan∂ndan etkilenmesini en aza indirin. parlama engelleyici filtre kullan∂n.
• Monitör aç∂kken yerinin de©iµtirilmesi görüntüde renk kayb∂na yol • Monitörünüzü temizleyin.
açabilir. Bunu düzeltmek için, monitörü kapat∂n ve tekrar açmadan Bu monitörün cam (CRT) yüzeyinde cam üzerindeki yans∂may∂
önce 20 dakika bekleyin. ve statik elektri©i azaltmak için özel bir kaplama mevcuttur.
• MultiSync FE2111SB’yi AC 100-120/220-240V güç kayna©∂ ile Cam yüzey üzerindeki hassas kaplama sebebiyle, tozlanmay∂
kullan∂rken, kullan∂lan AC güç kayna©∂n∂n sa©lad∂©∂ voltaja uygun en aza indirmek için tiftiksiz, aµ∂nd∂r∂c∂y∂ olmayan (pamuklu
güç kablosu kullan∂n. Kullanaca©∂n∂z güç kablosu ülkenizdeki veya benzeri) bir bez ve alkolsüz, do©al, aµ∂nd∂r∂c∂ olmayan
güvenlik standartlar∂na uygun ve onaylanm∂µ olmal∂d∂r. (Avrupa’da temizleme solüsyonlar∂ veya cam temizleyici kullan∂n. E©er
H05VV-F 3G 0.7 mm2 kullan∂lmal∂d∂r) ekran∂n hafif bir temizlikten fazlas∂na ihtiyac∂ varsa, su veya
• ∑ngiltere’de bu monitörle birlikte, BS onayl∂, (5A) sigortal∂ fiµi olan do©al deterjan∂ bol su ile yumuµatarak do©rudan yumuµak bir
güç kablosu kullan∂n. E©er monitörün içinden güç kablosu bezin üzerine uygulay∂n ve cam∂ bu µekilde temizleyin.
ç∂kmad∂ysa sat∂c∂n∂za baµvurun. UYARI: Aµa©∂dakiler cam yüzeyi temizlerken CRT’ye zarar
verir: Benzen, tiner, asit/alkalin deterjan, alkollü deterjan,
Aµa©∂daki durumlarda, monitörünüzü hemen fiµten çekin ve servis için
aµ∂nd∂r∂c∂ toz içeren deterjan, anti-statik ajanl∂ deterjan,
yetkili servis personeline baµvurun.
temizleme deterjan∂.
• Güç kayna©∂ kablosu ya da fiµi hasar gördü©ünde.
• Okunabilirli©i artt∂rmak için monitörün parlakl∂k ve kontrast
• E©er monitörün üstüne s∂v∂ döküldüyse veya içine herhangi bir kontrollerini ayarlay∂n.
nesne düµtüyse.
• Ekrana yak∂n bir döküman tutucu kullan∂n.
• E©er monitör ya©mur veya suya maruz kald∂ysa.
• Yazarken kafan∂z∂ döndürmeyi en aza indirmek için, daha fazla
• E©er monitör düµtüyse veya kasas∂ hasar gördüyse. bakt∂©∂n∂z neyse (ekran veya referans materyali) onu tam
• E©er monitör kullan∂m talimatlar∂n∂ takip etmenize ra©men normal önünüzde bulundurun.
çal∂µm∂yorsa. • Düzenli göz kontrolü yapt∂r∂n.
• Is∂n∂n düzgün olarak da©∂lmas∂ için, monitörün
Ergonomi
etraf∂nda yeterli havaland∂rma alan∂ olmas∂na dikkat
edin. Havaland∂rma boµluklar∂n∂ kapatmay∂n ya da Maksimum ergonomik fayda sa©lamak için, aµa©∂dakileri tavsiye
UYARI monitörü radyatör veya di©er ∂s∂ kaynaklar∂n∂n yak∂n∂na ederiz:
yerleµtirmeyin. Monitörün üzerine hiçbir µey koymay∂n. • Arka fondaki tram kayboluncaya kadar Parlakl∂l∂©∂ ayarlay∂n.
• Güç kablosu, ba©lay∂c∂s∂ sistemi güç kayna©∂ndan • Kontrast kontrolünü maksimum ayar∂na getirmeyin.
ay∂rman∂n birincil yoludur. Monitör, kolayca eriµilebilen • Standart sinyallerle belirlenmiµ Boyut ve Konum kontrollerini
bir prize yak∂n olarak kurulmal∂d∂r. kullan∂n.
• Taµ∂rken dikkatli olun. Ambalaj∂ taµ∂ma için saklay∂n. • Belirlenmiµ Renk Ayarlar∂ ve Sol/Sa© Kenar kontrollerini
kullan∂n.
• Dikey yenilenme oran∂ 75 ila 160 Hz aras∂nda olan titreµimsiz
sinyaller kullan∂n.
• Görülmesi zor olaca©∂ ve yetersiz kontrast yüzünden göz
yorgunlu©una sebep olabilece©i için koyu arka fon üzerinde
birincil renk olarak maviyi kullanmay∂n.
Türkçe-4
11_Turkish 4 14/5/02, 11:56 am

xx_Back 1 14/5/02, 11:56 am
Printed in Japan
Printed on recycled paper 7A812441
xx_Back 2 14/5/02, 11:56 am

Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

NEC-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VISUAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION

The surface of pucture tube may generate X-Radiation.

CRITICAL COMPONENT WARNING

T701, IC102, IC104, R706, R707

1. Circuit description ......................................................................................................................... 1-1

Power block Output voltage Mai load

AC D933 To Main power

1.1.4 Main power circuit

1.1.5 Demagnetizing circuit

1.1.6 Power management circuit

Mode H-SYNC V-SYNC State Display

1.2.1 Deflection processor (IC601)

1.2.2 Pressure-reduction type horizontal deflection power circuit (IC5C0)

1.2.3 Horizontal width control circuit

1.2.4 Vertical deflection circuit

Fig. 2 Vertical sawtooth waveform output circuit

1.2.4.2 Vertical output amplification circuit

IMID R411 IC451 V-DY

Fig. 3 Vertical output amplifier circuit

1.2.5 High voltage block

1.3.1 Video signal amplifier circuit

Fig. 4 Video signal amplifier circuit

1.3.1.2 Video blanking

1.3.1.3 Video mixing/amplifying

1.3.1.4 Control of contrast and white balance

R250G R250B R250R

Q251G D251G D251B D251R

Fig. 5 Cut-off control circuit

1.3.2.1 Control of brightness

1.3.2.2 Control of BIAS

1.3.3 OSM (On Screen Manager)

1.3.5 AUTO-SIZE function

1.3.6 SB MODE (Super Bright Mode) function

1.3.6.1 Adjustment item/operating function in selecting SB Mode

→SUPER BRIGHT MODE OFF (in factory adjustment state)

User adjustment items related to luminance/color coordination

Back raster luminance GAIN UP γ compensation Sharpness

SUPER BRIGHT MODE SUPER BRIGHT MODE-1 SUPER BRIGHT MODE-2

Amplitude: Approx. 44V

1.3.6.3 SB Mode setting data and control method

(OSM FACT3) Data name Data (hex)

EEP address (hex)

1.3.7 CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS function

1.4 CRT compensation block

1.4.1 Rotation circuit

1.4.2 Corner purity circuit

(1) User adjustment (OSM display)

(2) Aging variation compensation

(3) High/low temperature drift compensation

1.4.2.1 Corner purity circuit operation

<TL: Upper left corner>

<TR: Upper right corner>

<BL: Lower left corner>

<BR: Lower right corner>

1.4.3 Digital dynamic convergence clear (DDCC) circuit

1.4.3.1 Production of compensation current waveform

Fig. 6 DDCC compensation image

1.4.3.2 Waveform, and operation on the picture

1.4.3.3 Adjustment method

1.4.3.4 Block diagram

Fig. 9 shows the block diagram of the DDCC circuit.

Fig. 7 The principle of DDCC compensation